SHARP vf804SH User Guide

PDF

Documento

Anúncio

Introduction

Thank you for purchasing the Vodafone 804SH.

^ For proper handset use, read this manual beforehand.

^ This manual was created exclusively for Vodafone 804SH handsets sold in Japan.

^ Keep this manual in a convenient place for reference.

^ Accessible Vodafone services may vary by service area, subscription, etc.

804SH is compatible with both W-CDMA and GSM network technologies.

Note

^ Copying this manual in whole or part without authorisation is prohibited.

^ Manual content is subject to change without prior notice.

^ Efforts have been made to ensure the accuracy and clarity of this manual. Please contact

Customer Service, General Information (see P.18-24) about unclear or missing information.

Symbols

Multi Selector

Use Multi Selector to select menu items, move cursor and scroll, etc.

In this manual, Multi Selector operations are indicated as shown to the right.

B b

^ Basic Multi Selector Operations

B E: Press C or D

B F: Press B or A

B G: Press C, D, B or A

Side Keys

Use Side Keys to control compatible functions such as mobile camera.

In this manual, Side Keys are indicated as shown below.

Zoom/Select Key

L M

Shutter Key h

Note H

In this manual, most operations are described with clamshell open (see P.1-10) in Standby.

Sample screen shots, etc. are provided for reference only. Actual handset windows, menus, etc. may differ in appearance.

Abbreviated Steps

Handset operations starting from Index Menu are abbreviated as follows:

Select menu item and press b

Operations such as selecting a file

Use F to open the menu

Main Menu

Menu Item

Selection

Operation

Options (N)

Menu (F)

Select the menu item and press b

Select the folder or file and press b

Press the corresponding key in parentheses

In this Vodafone 804SH Instruction Manual, Vodafone 804SH is abbreviated as 804SH.

Accessories

CLithium-ion Battery (Type 1)

(SHBAA1)

CLCD Remote/Mic with

Headphones (white) (ZTBAA1)

CAC Charger (SHCAA1)

CUSB Cable (Black) ★ CUtility Software (CD-ROM) ★*

*Upgrades or updates of included Utility Software may become available on the Vodafone Website (http://www.vodafone.jp) without prior notification. Please check for the newest version of Utility Software (excluding SD-Jukebox) and download as required.

★

Complimentary sample not available for purchase

Note

Supplied Utility Software is designed exclusively for 804SH.

Tip H

^ For accessory-related information, please contact Vodafone Customer Centre, General Information (see P.18-24).

^ 804SH is compatible with miniSD! Memory Card; miniSD! Memory Card is not included in this package.

Purchase miniSD! Memory Card to use Memory Card-related handset functions.

^ In this manual, miniSD! Memory Card is referred to as "Memory Card".

iii

Symbols ............................................................................................i

Accessories ....................................................................................iii

Contents .........................................................................................iv

Safety Precautions.......................................................................xvi

General Notes.............................................................................xxvi

Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) .............................................xxxiii

Basic Operations

Getting Started

Function & Feature Preview ....................................................... 1-2

USIM Card .................................................................................... 1-4

C General Information & Precautions ...................................... 1-4

C Inserting & Removing USIM Card ........................................ 1-5

C USIM PINs............................................................................ 1-6

Handset Parts & Functions ........................................................ 1-7

C Handset ................................................................................ 1-7

C Display Indicators ................................................................. 1-9

C Display Positions ................................................................ 1-10

Battery & Charger ..................................................................... 1-11

C Getting Started ................................................................... 1-11

C Installing & Removing Battery ............................................ 1-15

C AC Charger ........................................................................ 1-16

C Desktop Holder................................................................... 1-17

C In-Car Charger ................................................................... 1-18

Handset Power On/Off .............................................................. 1-19

C Keypad Lock....................................................................... 1-20

C Pen Light ............................................................................ 1-20

Handset Menus.......................................................................... 1-21

C Main Menu.......................................................................... 1-21

C User Shortcuts ................................................................... 1-22

Assign ............................................................................. 1-22

Move ............................................................................... 1-22

Set to Default .................................................................. 1-22

Security Codes .......................................................................... 1-24

C Handset Code .................................................................... 1-24

C Centre Access Code .......................................................... 1-24

C Network Password.............................................................. 1-24

Basic Handset Operations

Initiating a Call ............................................................................ 2-2

C Redial ................................................................................... 2-3

C Placing an International Call ................................................ 2-4

C Emergency Calls .................................................................. 2-4

Incoming Call .............................................................................. 2-5

C Calling from Received Calls ................................................. 2-6

Handling Incoming Calls ............................................................ 2-7

C Rejecting a Call .................................................................... 2-7

C Redirecting a Call ................................................................. 2-7

Answer Phone ............................................................................. 2-8

C Activating & Deactivating...................................................... 2-8

C Playing Messages ................................................................ 2-9

Engaged Call Operations ......................................................... 2-10

C Earpiece Volume ................................................................ 2-10

C Voice Output....................................................................... 2-10

Loudspeaker ................................................................... 2-10

Mute................................................................................ 2-10

Hold ................................................................................ 2-10

C Voice Memo........................................................................ 2-11

Play................................................................................. 2-11

C Other Engaged Call Operations ......................................... 2-11

Phone Book List ............................................................. 2-11

Messaging ...................................................................... 2-11

Dial New Number............................................................ 2-11

Enable/Disable DTMF..................................................... 2-11

Call History ................................................................................ 2-12

Delete ............................................................................. 2-12

Delete All ........................................................................ 2-12

C Using Call History............................................................... 2-12

Call ................................................................................. 2-12

Create Message ............................................................. 2-12

Call Timers/Data Counter ......................................................... 2-13

C Call Timers ......................................................................... 2-13

Clear Timers ................................................................... 2-13

C Data Counter ...................................................................... 2-13

Clear Counter ................................................................. 2-13

Call Costs .................................................................................. 2-14

Clear Costs ..................................................................... 2-14

Cost Units ....................................................................... 2-14

C Limit Call Costs .................................................................. 2-14

Max Cost ........................................................................ 2-14

Outside Japan (International Roaming) .................................. 2-15

C Switching Network Services............................................... 2-15

C Calling from Outside Japan ................................................ 2-16

Manner Mode ............................................................................. 2-17

C Minding Mobile Manners .................................................... 2-17

C Activating & Cancelling....................................................... 2-18

C Activating/Cancelling Offline Mode..................................... 2-19

LCD Remote/Mic with Headphones......................................... 2-20

C Initiating Calls ..................................................................... 2-20

C Answering Calls.................................................................. 2-20

Entering Characters

Character Selection .................................................................... 3-2

C Entry Modes ......................................................................... 3-2

C Key Assignments.................................................................. 3-3

Entering Characters.................................................................... 3-5

C Kanji, Hiragana & Katakana ................................................. 3-5

C Entering Alphanumerics ....................................................... 3-7

C Symbols, Pictographs & Emoticons ..................................... 3-7

C Mail & Web Extensions ........................................................ 3-8

C Character Code .................................................................... 3-8

C Pager Code .......................................................................... 3-8

Conversion Methods (Japanese Only) .................................... 3-10

C Phonetic Conversion .......................................................... 3-10

C One-Hiragana Conversion.................................................. 3-10

C Hiragana to Katakana/Alphanumerics Conversion............. 3-10

C Quick Conversion (for Hiragana) ........................................ 3-11

C Conversion Settings ........................................................... 3-12

Optional Predictive Functions ......................................... 3-12

Set Low Priority .............................................................. 3-12

Reset Learning ............................................................... 3-12

Editing Characters .................................................................... 3-12

C Deleting & Replacing.......................................................... 3-12

C Copy/Cut & Paste ............................................................... 3-12

C Deleting Text On and After Cursor ..................................... 3-13

Additional Functions ................................................................ 3-13

C Copying from Phone Book ................................................. 3-13

C Using Text Templates ......................................................... 3-13

Phone Book

Overview ...................................................................................... 4-2

Saving to Phone Book ................................................................ 4-3

C Phone Book Entry Items ...................................................... 4-3

C New Phone Book Entries ..................................................... 4-4

C Saving from Dialled Numbers/Received Calls...................... 4-7

C Phone Book Memory Status ................................................ 4-7

Using Phone Book ...................................................................... 4-8

C Dialling from Phone Book..................................................... 4-8

Editing Phone Book .................................................................... 4-9

C Correction/Change ............................................................... 4-9

C Copying Phone Book Entries ............................................. 4-10

C Deleting Phone Book Entries ............................................. 4-10

Category Settings ..................................................................... 4-11

C Changing Category Name.................................................. 4-11

C Category Ringtone/Ringvideo ............................................ 4-11

Contact Groups ......................................................................... 4-12

C Creating Contact Groups.................................................... 4-12

C Saving Group Members ..................................................... 4-12

C Editing Contact Groups ...................................................... 4-12

C Editing Group Members ..................................................... 4-13

Speed Dial List .......................................................................... 4-13

C Saving Phone Numbers ..................................................... 4-13

C Speed Dial.......................................................................... 4-14

Delete ............................................................................. 4-14

Clear All .......................................................................... 4-14

My Details .................................................................................. 4-14

C Opening My Details ............................................................ 4-14

Edit/Add Details .............................................................. 4-14

Delete ............................................................................. 4-14

Video Call

Getting Started ............................................................................ 5-2

Initiating a Video Call.................................................................. 5-3

Answering a Video Call .............................................................. 5-3

Engaged Video Call Operations................................................. 5-4

Switch Images .................................................................. 5-4

Camera Picture................................................................. 5-4

Earpiece Volume .............................................................. 5-4

Mute.................................................................................. 5-4

Hold .................................................................................. 5-4

Loudspeaker ..................................................................... 5-4

Open Phone Book ............................................................ 5-5

Mirror Image ..................................................................... 5-5

Exposure .......................................................................... 5-5

Transfer Audio................................................................... 5-5

Video Call Settings ..................................................................... 5-5

Camera Picture................................................................. 5-5

Loudspeaker ..................................................................... 5-6

Incoming Picture ............................................................... 5-6

Outgoing Picture ............................................................... 5-6

Backlight ........................................................................... 5-6

Mute Microphone .............................................................. 5-6

Hold Guidance Pict ........................................................... 5-6

Camera

Getting Started ............................................................................ 6-2

C Mobile Camera Basics ......................................................... 6-2

C Camera Display Indicators ................................................... 6-3

C Key Assignments.................................................................. 6-4

Still Images .................................................................................. 6-5

C Photo Camera Mode ............................................................ 6-5

C Capturing Still Images .......................................................... 6-5

C Still Image Functions ............................................................ 6-6

Video ............................................................................................ 6-7

C Video Camera Mode ............................................................ 6-7

C Recording Video................................................................... 6-7

C Video Recording Operations ................................................ 6-8

Opening Images & Playing Video .............................................. 6-9

C Opening Still Images ............................................................ 6-9

C Playing Video ....................................................................... 6-9

SD VIDEO ........................................................................ 6-9

Special Shooting Modes .......................................................... 6-10

C Self-timer ............................................................................ 6-10

C Continuous Shoot (Photo Camera) .................................... 6-11

C Adding Frames (Photo Camera)......................................... 6-12

C Camera Effects (Photo Camera) ........................................ 6-13

Sending Still Images & Video .................................................. 6-13

C Still Images......................................................................... 6-13

C Video Clips ......................................................................... 6-14

Camera Settings........................................................................ 6-14

C Shooting Options................................................................ 6-14

Hide Indicators/Normal Finder........................................ 6-14

Shutter Sound................................................................. 6-14

Mobile Light .................................................................... 6-15

C Image Settings ................................................................... 6-15

Exposure ........................................................................ 6-15

Picture Size..................................................................... 6-15

Image Quality ................................................................. 6-16

Scene ............................................................................. 6-16

Record Time/Size ........................................................... 6-16

Microphone ..................................................................... 6-16

Video Encode ................................................................. 6-17

C Additional Settings.............................................................. 6-17

Photo Camera/Video Camera......................................... 6-17

Internal/External Camera................................................ 6-17

Save to............................................................................ 6-17

Auto Save ....................................................................... 6-18

Media Player

Media Player Basics.................................................................... 7-2

C Downloading Music/Video .................................................... 7-2

C Saving Music Files from PCs ............................................... 7-3

Recording Music ......................................................................... 7-4

C Connecting to Audio Sources............................................... 7-6

C Recording ............................................................................. 7-7

C Recording Settings ............................................................... 7-8

Monitor Level .................................................................... 7-8

Synch Recording .............................................................. 7-8

Bit Rate ............................................................................. 7-8

Auto Mark Level ................................................................ 7-8

Playing Music .............................................................................. 7-8

C Playback ............................................................................. 7-11

C Playback Settings ............................................................... 7-12

Tone Control ................................................................... 7-12

Playback Pattern............................................................. 7-12

Playing Video............................................................................. 7-12

C Playback ............................................................................. 7-13

C Playback Settings ............................................................... 7-14

Playback Pattern............................................................. 7-14

Backlight ......................................................................... 7-14

Display Size .................................................................... 7-14

Sound Settings ............................................................... 7-14

Editing Video ............................................................................. 7-15

C Clipping Portions between Two Points ............................... 7-15

C Cropping Video Clips.......................................................... 7-16

vii

viii

C Adding Subtitles ................................................................. 7-16

Duration .......................................................................... 7-17

Display Position .............................................................. 7-17

Font Size......................................................................... 7-17

Scrolling .......................................................................... 7-18

Background Colour ......................................................... 7-18

Font Colour ..................................................................... 7-18

Highlight.......................................................................... 7-19

Blink ................................................................................ 7-19

Managing Video & Music Files................................................. 7-19

C Adding New Playlist............................................................ 7-20

C Adding Files to Playlists ..................................................... 7-20

C Editing SD AUDIO Files...................................................... 7-21

C Deleting Files in SD VIDEO & SD AUDIO .......................... 7-21

Memory Card

Before Use ................................................................................... 8-2

C Precautions .......................................................................... 8-2

C Inserting & Removing Memory Card .................................... 8-3

C Format Card ......................................................................... 8-4

Backup & Restore ....................................................................... 8-4

C Handset to Memory Card ..................................................... 8-5

C Memory Card to Handset ..................................................... 8-5

Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)............................................. 8-6

C Selecting Images & Prints .................................................... 8-6

C Print Settings........................................................................ 8-7

Number of Copies............................................................. 8-7

Add Date........................................................................... 8-7

Index Print......................................................................... 8-7

Check Print Setting ........................................................... 8-7

Reset Settings .................................................................. 8-7

Additional Function .................................................................... 8-7

SD Local Contents............................................................ 8-7

Managing Files (Data Folder)

Data Folder .................................................................................. 9-2

C Window Description.............................................................. 9-2

C Major Icons........................................................................... 9-3

C Sorting Files ......................................................................... 9-3

Opening Files .............................................................................. 9-4

C MMS Mail Attachments ........................................................ 9-6

C Printing Images .................................................................... 9-6

Using Files ................................................................................... 9-7

C Wallpaper ............................................................................. 9-7

C Saving to Phone Book.......................................................... 9-7

C Ringvideo & Ringtone........................................................... 9-7

Editing Still Images ..................................................................... 9-8

C Changing Image Size ........................................................... 9-8

C Visual Effects (Retouch)....................................................... 9-9

C Adding Text & Stamps .......................................................... 9-9

C Face Arrange...................................................................... 9-10

C Additional Picture Effects ................................................... 9-11

Frame ............................................................................. 9-11

Rotate ............................................................................. 9-11

C Panorama Images .............................................................. 9-12

C Split Screen ........................................................................ 9-13

Text Templates .......................................................................... 9-14

C New Entry........................................................................... 9-14

C Opening Templates ............................................................ 9-14

C Editing Templates ............................................................... 9-14

C Deleting Templates............................................................. 9-14

Managing Files & Folders......................................................... 9-14

C Adding Folders ................................................................... 9-14

C Changing File/Folder Name ............................................... 9-15

C Deleting Files & Folders ..................................................... 9-15

C Copying/Moving Files ......................................................... 9-16

Additional Settings/Connectivity

Mode Settings ........................................................................... 10-2

C Activating a Mode............................................................... 10-2

Mode Settings................................................................. 10-2

C Customising Modes............................................................ 10-2

Personalise ..................................................................... 10-2

Any Key Answer.............................................................. 10-2

Answer Phone ................................................................ 10-2

C Reset .................................................................................. 10-2

Set to Default .................................................................. 10-2

Display ....................................................................................... 10-3

C Display Settings.................................................................. 10-3

Wallpaper........................................................................ 10-3

System Graphics ............................................................ 10-3

Font Settings................................................................... 10-4

Greeting Message .......................................................... 10-4

Show Operator Name ..................................................... 10-4

Language........................................................................ 10-4

C Custom Screens................................................................. 10-4

Delete ............................................................................. 10-6

Web Access.................................................................... 10-6

C Light Settings...................................................................... 10-7

Backlight ......................................................................... 10-7

Display Saving ................................................................ 10-7

C External Display Settings ................................................... 10-8

Switch On/Off ................................................................. 10-8

Backlight ......................................................................... 10-8

LCD Contrast .................................................................. 10-8

Caller Display.................................................................. 10-8

C Viewing Images on External Devices ................................. 10-8

Sounds & Alerts ...................................................................... 10-10

C Customising Handset Responses .................................... 10-10

Volume.......................................................................... 10-10

Ringtone/Ringvideos .................................................... 10-11

Vibration........................................................................ 10-11

Event Light.................................................................... 10-12

Status Light................................................................... 10-12

C Customising System Sounds ........................................... 10-12

Keypad Tones ............................................................... 10-12

Warning Tone & Power On/Off Sound .......................... 10-13

C Additional Sound Setting .................................................. 10-13

Surround ....................................................................... 10-13

Date & Time ............................................................................. 10-13

Set Date/Time............................................................... 10-13

Set Time Zone/Daylight Saving .................................... 10-14

Display Date & Time ..................................................... 10-14

Date/Time Format......................................................... 10-14

Calendar Format........................................................... 10-14

Wake-up Alarm ............................................................. 10-15

User Dictionary ....................................................................... 10-15

C Entries (Japanese Only)................................................... 10-15

New Entry ..................................................................... 10-15

Edit/Delete .................................................................... 10-15

C 804SH Download Dictionary (Japanese Only) ................. 10-15

Acquire Dictionary ........................................................ 10-15

Cancel .......................................................................... 10-16

Information.................................................................... 10-16

Handset Security..................................................................... 10-16

C PIN ................................................................................... 10-16

PIN Entry ...................................................................... 10-16

Change PIN .................................................................. 10-16

C Handset Locks.................................................................. 10-17

Handset Lock................................................................ 10-17

Function Lock ............................................................... 10-17

Phone Book Lock.......................................................... 10-17

C Secret Mode ..................................................................... 10-18

Show Secret Data......................................................... 10-18

C Changing Handset Code .................................................. 10-18

Change Handset Code ................................................. 10-18

Reset ........................................................................................ 10-18

Reset Settings .............................................................. 10-18

Reset All ....................................................................... 10-19

Call Settings ............................................................................ 10-19

C International Call .............................................................. 10-19

Int'l Prefix ...................................................................... 10-19

Country Codes.............................................................. 10-19

Auto Add Code ............................................................. 10-19

C Additional Settings............................................................ 10-20

Minute Minder ............................................................... 10-20

Call Time Counter......................................................... 10-20

Display Call Cost .......................................................... 10-20

Bluetooth ................................................................................. 10-20

C Getting Started ................................................................. 10-20

C Transferring Files via Bluetooth ........................................ 10-23

C Connecting Handsfree Devices........................................ 10-26

C Bluetooth Settings ............................................................ 10-27

Device Name ................................................................ 10-27

Bluetooth Timeout ........................................................ 10-27

Handsfree Setting ......................................................... 10-27

OPP Authentication ...................................................... 10-27

Encode Contact ............................................................ 10-27

My Phone Details ......................................................... 10-27

Infrared..................................................................................... 10-28

C Getting Started ................................................................. 10-28

C Transferring Files via Infrared ........................................... 10-28

Mass Storage........................................................................... 10-31

Network Settings..................................................................... 10-32

Select Network ............................................................. 10-32

Set Preferred ................................................................ 10-32

Add, Edit & Delete ........................................................ 10-32

Network Info.................................................................. 10-32

Internet Settings...................................................................... 10-33

C Custom Profile Items ........................................................ 10-33

C Creating & Editing Custom Profiles .................................. 10-34

Create New................................................................... 10-34

Activate ......................................................................... 10-34

Edit ............................................................................... 10-34

Copy ............................................................................. 10-34

Delete ........................................................................... 10-34

Create New................................................................... 10-34

Activate ......................................................................... 10-34

Edit ............................................................................... 10-34

Copy ............................................................................. 10-35

Delete ........................................................................... 10-35

Create New................................................................... 10-35

Edit ............................................................................... 10-35

Copy ............................................................................. 10-35

Delete ........................................................................... 10-35

C Additional Settings............................................................ 10-35

Re-Provisioning ............................................................ 10-35

Clear DNS Cache ......................................................... 10-36

White List ...................................................................... 10-36

LBS (Location Based Service) Settings................................ 10-36

LBS URL Setting .......................................................... 10-36

Datum On/Off ............................................................... 10-36

Tools

Calendar..................................................................................... 11-2

C Opening Calendar .............................................................. 11-2

Default View.................................................................... 11-2

Set Holiday ..................................................................... 11-2

Quick Entry ..................................................................... 11-2

C Saving Entries .................................................................... 11-2

Assign Tone .................................................................... 11-4

Assign Video................................................................... 11-4

Duration .......................................................................... 11-4

Repeat ............................................................................ 11-4

Secret ............................................................................. 11-4

C Opening Entries ................................................................. 11-5

C Searching Entries ............................................................... 11-5

C Editing Entries .................................................................... 11-5

C Deleting Entries .................................................................. 11-5

This Appointment/All This Day........................................ 11-5

All This Month/All This Week .......................................... 11-6

Up to Last Month/Up to Last Week................................. 11-6

All Appointments............................................................. 11-6

Tasks .......................................................................................... 11-6

C Saving Entries .................................................................... 11-6

Assign Tone .................................................................... 11-8

Assign Video................................................................... 11-8

Duration .......................................................................... 11-8

Secret ............................................................................. 11-8

C Opening Entries ................................................................. 11-8

C Searching Entries ............................................................... 11-9

C Editing Entries .................................................................... 11-9

C Deleting Entries .................................................................. 11-9

This Task......................................................................... 11-9

All Tasks/All Completed Tasks ........................................ 11-9

Alarm ........................................................................................ 11-10

C Setting Alarm.................................................................... 11-10

Assign Tone .................................................................. 11-11

Assign Video................................................................. 11-12

Snooze.......................................................................... 11-12

Alarm Volume ............................................................... 11-12

Duration ........................................................................ 11-12

Vibration........................................................................ 11-12

C Cancelling & Reactivating Alarm ...................................... 11-12

Switch Off ..................................................................... 11-12

Switch On ..................................................................... 11-12

C Deleting Alarm.................................................................. 11-12

Reset Alarm.................................................................. 11-12

Clear All ........................................................................ 11-12

Auto Power On ........................................................................ 11-13

World Clock ............................................................................. 11-13

C Setting Time Zone & Daylight Saving............................... 11-13

C Opening World Clock ....................................................... 11-14

Calculator ................................................................................ 11-14

Voice Recorder ........................................................................ 11-15

C Preparation....................................................................... 11-15

C Recording ......................................................................... 11-15

C Playback ........................................................................... 11-16

C Recording Setting............................................................. 11-16

Save Rec. to ................................................................. 11-16

Barcode.................................................................................... 11-17

Scanning during Text Entry........................................... 11-19

Open Barcode .............................................................. 11-20

Scanned Results .......................................................... 11-20

Create QR Codes .................................................................... 11-20

Phone Book .................................................................. 11-20

Text Input ...................................................................... 11-20

Data Folder ................................................................... 11-21

xii

Text Scanner............................................................................ 11-21

Scanning during Text Entry........................................... 11-23

Stopwatch ................................................................................ 11-23

Countdown Timer.................................................................... 11-23

Expenses Memo ...................................................................... 11-24

Add New Expense ........................................................ 11-24

Totals ............................................................................ 11-24

Edit Category................................................................ 11-24

E-Books ................................................................................... 11-25

C Reading Content .............................................................. 11-25

C Using E-Book Images....................................................... 11-27

Save as Wallpaper........................................................ 11-27

Embedded Information ................................................. 11-28

C Using a Dictionary ............................................................ 11-28

Look Up Word............................................................... 11-28

Compass .................................................................................. 11-28

C Motion Control Sensor...................................................... 11-29

Phone Help .............................................................................. 11-29

Optional Services

Optional Services Overview..................................................... 12-2

Call Forwarding ......................................................................... 12-2

Call Forwarding............................................................... 12-2

Cancel All ....................................................................... 12-3

Status ............................................................................. 12-3

Voice Mail................................................................................... 12-3

Voice Mail ....................................................................... 12-3

Cancel All ....................................................................... 12-4

Status ............................................................................. 12-4

Play Voice Mail ............................................................... 12-4

VM Centre Number......................................................... 12-4

Call Waiting................................................................................ 12-5

Call Waiting On/Off ......................................................... 12-5

Status ............................................................................. 12-5

Incoming Calls ................................................................ 12-5

Conference Call......................................................................... 12-5

Dial New Number............................................................ 12-5

Switch Line ..................................................................... 12-5

Conference Call .............................................................. 12-6

Call Barring................................................................................ 12-6

C Restricting Outgoing Calls.................................................. 12-7

Set/Cancel Restriction .................................................... 12-7

Status ............................................................................. 12-7

C Restricting Incoming Calls.................................................. 12-8

Set/Cancel Restriction .................................................... 12-8

Status ............................................................................. 12-8

C Rejecting Calls ................................................................... 12-8

Set Reject Number ......................................................... 12-8

Switch On/Off ................................................................. 12-8

C Rejecting Calls without Caller ID ........................................ 12-9

Withheld Call .................................................................. 12-9

C Changing Network Password ............................................. 12-9

Change N/W Password................................................... 12-9

Caller ID ..................................................................................... 12-9

Show Your Number ......................................................... 12-9

Status ............................................................................. 12-9

Vodafone live!

Vodafone live! Basics

Vodafone live! Services ............................................................ 13-2

Messaging

Basics ........................................................................................ 14-2

C Messaging Folder............................................................... 14-2

C Window Description............................................................ 14-2

C Customising Handset Address ........................................... 14-3

Sending Text Messages............................................................ 14-4

C Basics................................................................................. 14-4

C Creating & Sending a Message.......................................... 14-6

C Additional Settings............................................................ 14-11

Delivery Report............................................................. 14-11

Expiry Time................................................................... 14-11

Priority .......................................................................... 14-11

Delivery Time................................................................ 14-11

C Using Drafts...................................................................... 14-12

C Using Templates............................................................... 14-13

Incoming Text Messages........................................................ 14-13

C Opening New Messages .................................................. 14-13

C Retrieving Complete MMS Messages .............................. 14-14

C Acquire Mail List ............................................................... 14-14

Download...................................................................... 14-15

Remote Forward ........................................................... 14-15

Delete ........................................................................... 14-15

Using Messages ...................................................................... 14-15

C Checking Messages ......................................................... 14-15

C Replying to Messages ...................................................... 14-17

C Forwarding Messages ...................................................... 14-17

C Linked Info ........................................................................ 14-18

C Protecting Messages........................................................ 14-19

C Deleting Messages........................................................... 14-19

C Saving Attachments to Data Folder.................................. 14-20

C Mail Folders...................................................................... 14-20

Additional Functions .............................................................. 14-22

C Speed Mail List................................................................. 14-22

C Speed Mail ....................................................................... 14-22

C Using Automatic Resend.................................................. 14-23

C General Settings............................................................... 14-23

Received Box View ....................................................... 14-23

Edit Signature ............................................................... 14-23

Auto Delete ................................................................... 14-23

Message List View........................................................ 14-24

Delivery Report............................................................. 14-24

Expiry Time................................................................... 14-24

Roaming Download ...................................................... 14-24

Home Download ........................................................... 14-24

C SMS Settings.................................................................... 14-24

Message Centre ........................................................... 14-24

Text Optimisation .......................................................... 14-24

Connection Type ........................................................... 14-25

C MMS Settings ................................................................... 14-25

Delivery Rep. Allow....................................................... 14-25

Slide Duration ............................................................... 14-25

Max Message Size ....................................................... 14-25

Creation Mode .............................................................. 14-25

xiii

xiv

Web

Getting Started .......................................................................... 15-2

Using Web.................................................................................. 15-3

C Opening Vodafone Web Menu ........................................... 15-3

C Entering URLs Directly ....................................................... 15-4

Basic Operations ...................................................................... 15-5

Advanced Features ................................................................... 15-6

C Bookmarks & Saved Page.................................................. 15-6

Bookmarks Folder........................................................... 15-8

Rename .......................................................................... 15-8

Delete ............................................................................. 15-8

Edit URL (Bookmarks) .................................................... 15-8

C Saving to Data Folder......................................................... 15-8

C Using Linked Info................................................................ 15-9

Streaming ................................................................................ 15-10

Streaming from Media Player ....................................... 15-11

Additional Functions .............................................................. 15-12

C Sub Menu Settings ........................................................... 15-12

Home ............................................................................ 15-12

Enter URL ..................................................................... 15-12

Access History.............................................................. 15-12

Reload Page ................................................................. 15-12

Send Page .................................................................... 15-12

Properties ..................................................................... 15-12

Browser Data ................................................................ 15-12

Search This Page ......................................................... 15-13

Copy Text ...................................................................... 15-13

Certificates.................................................................... 15-13

Restart Browser............................................................ 15-13

About ............................................................................ 15-13

Uploading Files ............................................................. 15-13

C Basic Settings................................................................... 15-13

Font Size....................................................................... 15-13

Scroll Step .................................................................... 15-13

Send Referrer ............................................................... 15-13

Cookies......................................................................... 15-14

Downloads .................................................................... 15-14

Manufacture Number .................................................... 15-14

Location ........................................................................ 15-14

Download to.................................................................. 15-14

C Security ............................................................................ 15-14

Secure Prompt.............................................................. 15-14

Root Certificates ........................................................... 15-14

Authentication ............................................................... 15-14

V-applications

Getting Started .......................................................................... 16-2

C Downloading V-applications ............................................... 16-3

Using V-applications................................................................. 16-4

C Starting V-applications ....................................................... 16-4

C Exit, Pause & Resume ....................................................... 16-5

C Managing V-applications .................................................... 16-5

C Screensaver ....................................................................... 16-6

C Setting Permissions............................................................ 16-7

Additional Functions ................................................................ 16-8

C V-application Operational Settings ..................................... 16-8

Volume............................................................................ 16-8

Backlight ......................................................................... 16-8

Blink ................................................................................ 16-8

Vibration.......................................................................... 16-8

Calls & Alarms ................................................................ 16-8

Surround ......................................................................... 16-9

C Reset .................................................................................. 16-9

Set to Default .................................................................. 16-9

Memory All Clear ............................................................ 16-9

Vodafone live! FeliCa

Basics ........................................................................................ 17-2

C Starting IC-appli ................................................................. 17-3

Using Vodafone live! FeliCa ..................................................... 17-3

Vodafone live! FeliCa Settings ................................................. 17-4

C IC Card Status.................................................................... 17-4

C IC Card Lock ...................................................................... 17-4

C Remote Lock ...................................................................... 17-5

C Interface Settings ............................................................... 17-7

C Resetting Defaults .............................................................. 17-7

Appendix

Function Menu........................................................................... 18-2

Troubleshooting ........................................................................ 18-4

Character Code List .................................................................. 18-9

Pictograph List ........................................................................ 18-15

Specifications.......................................................................... 18-16

Memory List ............................................................................. 18-17

Index......................................................................................... 18-18

Warranty & After-Sales Services ........................................... 18-23

Customer Service ................................................................... 18-24

xvi

Safety Precautions

^ Read safety precautions before using handset.

^ Observe precautions to avoid injury to self or others, or damage to property.

^ Vodafone is not liable for any damages resulting from use of this product.

Before Using Handset

CSymbols

Make sure you thoroughly understand these symbols before reading on.

Symbols and their meanings are described below:

DANGER

Great risk of death or serious injury from improper use

WARNING

Risk of death or serious injury from improper use

CAUTION

Risk of injury or damage to property from improper use

CSymbols

$(%+*

Prohibited Actions

Compulsory Actions

Attention Required

Handset, Battery & Charger

Use specified battery, Charger and Desktop Holder

only (see P.iii).

Using non-specified equipment may cause malfunctions, electric shock or fire due to battery leakage, overheating or bursting.

Do not short-circuit Charger terminals.

Keep metal objects away from Charger terminals. Keep handset away from necklaces, hairpins, etc.

Battery may leak, overheat, burst or ignite causing injury.

Use a case to carry handset.

!DANGER

Battery

Prevent injury from battery leakage, breakage or fire.

Do not:

^ Heat or dispose of battery in fire

^ Open/modify/disassemble battery

^ Damage or solder battery

^ Use a damaged or deformed battery

^ Use non-specified charger (see P.iii)

^ Force battery into handset

^ Charge battery near fire or sources of heat; or expose it to extreme heat

^ Use battery for other equipment

If battery fluid contacts eyes, do not rub them.

Rinse with clean water and consult a doctor immediately.

Eyes may be severely damaged.

# xvii

xviii

!WARNING

Handset, Battery & Charger

Do not insert foreign objects into the handset,

Charger or Desktop Holder.

Do not insert metal or flammable objects into handset,

Charger or Desktop Holder; may cause fire or electric shock. Keep out of children's reach.

Keep handset out of rain or extreme humidity.

Fire or electric shock may result.

Keep handset away from liquid-filled containers.

Keep the handset, Charger and Desktop Holder away from chemicals or liquids; fire or electric shock may result.

Keep battery, handset, Charger or Desktop Holder away from microwave ovens.

Battery, handset, Charger or Desktop Holder may leak, burst, overheat or ignite, leading to accidents or injury.

Do not disassemble or modify handset or related hardware.

^ Do not open handset, Charger or Desktop Holder; may cause electric shock or injury. Contact Vodafone

Customer Centre, Customer Assistance for repairs.

^ Do not modify handset, Charger or Desktop Holder; fire or electric shock may result.

(

Do not use Mobile Light near people's faces.

Eyesight may be temporarily affected leading to accidents.

CAUTION:

Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedure other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure. As the emission level from Mobile

Light LED used in this product is harmful to the eyes, do not attempt to disassemble the cabinet. Servicing is limited to qualified servicing station only.

EN60825-1:1994 A1:2002 & A2:2001

CLASS 1 LED Product

If water or foreign matter is inside handset:

Discontinue handset use to prevent fire/electric shock. Turn off handset, remove battery and unplug Charger, then contact Vodafone Customer Centre, Customer Assistance.

)

Handset, Battery & Charger

!WARNING

Handset

Avoid sources of fire.

Prevent fire or explosion. Do not use handset in the presence of gas or fine particles (coal, dust, metal, etc.).

Do not subject handset to strong shocks or impacts.

Strong shocks or impacts to handset, Charger or Desktop

Holder may cause malfunction or injury.

Should handset be damaged, remove battery then contact

Vodafone Customer Centre, Customer Assistance.

Discontinue handset use; fire or electric shock may occur.

If an abnormality occurs:

If a handset emits an unusual sound, smoke or odour, discontinue use; may cause fire or electric shock. Turn off handset, remove battery and unplug Charger; contact

Vodafone Customer Centre, Customer Assistance.

Handset

)

Keep Memory Card and Memory Card Adapter out of children's reach.

If swallowed, consult a doctor immediately.

Take measures to prevent accidents.

^ For safety, never use handset while driving. Pull over beforehand. Mobile phone use while driving is prohibited by the revised Road Traffic Law (effective 1 November 2004).

^ Do not use headphones while driving or riding a bicycle.

Accidents may result.

^ Moderate volume outside, especially at level/road crossings to avoid accidents.

Do not swing handset by LCD Remote/Mic with

Headphones or handstrap.

May result in injury or breakage.

Turn handset power off before boarding aircraft.

Using wireless devices aboard aircraft may cause electronic malfunctions or endanger aircraft operation.

Adjusting vibration and Ringtone settings:

Users with a heart condition/pacemaker/defibrillator should adjust handset settings accordingly.

During thunderstorms, turn power off; find cover.

There is a risk of lightning strike or electric shock.

# xix

!WARNING

Charger

Use only the specified voltage.

Non-specified voltages may cause fire or electric shock.

^ AC Charger: AC 100V-240V Input

B Vodafone is not liable for problems caused by charging handset abroad.

^ In-Car Charger: DC 12V-24V Input

Do not use commercially available transformers.

Use of AC Charger with commercially available transformers may cause fire, electric shock or damage.

Do not use In-Car Charger if vehicle has a positive earth.

Fire may result. Use In-Car Charger only inside vehicles with a negative earth.

Charger care

^ Do not touch blades with wet hands. Electric shock may occur.

^ Do not use multiple cords in one outlet; may cause excess heat/fire.

^ Do not bend, twist, pull or set objects on cord. Exposed wire may cause fire or electric shock.

Do not short-circuit Charger terminals.

May cause overheating, fire or electric shock. Keep metal away from terminals.

Do not use Desktop Holder inside vehicles.

Extreme temperature or vibration may cause fire or damage handset, etc.

Take measures to prevent accidents.

Secure In-Car Charger to avoid injury or accidents.

Damaged AC Charger/In-Car Charger cord:

May cause fire or electric shock; contact Vodafone

Customer Centre, Customer Assistance to replace.

During thunderstorms:

Unplug Charger to avoid damage, fire or electric shock.

Charger/Desktop Holder use and children:

May cause electric shock/injury; keep out of reach.

)

!WARNING

Battery

^ If battery does not charge properly, stop charging. Battery may overheat, burst or ignite.

^ If there is leakage or abnormal odour, avoid fire sources.

Battery may catch fire or burst.

# If there is abnormal odour, excessive heat, discolouration or distortion, remove battery from handset.

It may leak, overheat or explode.

Handset Use & Electronic Medical Equipment

This section is based on "Guidelines on the Use of Radio Communications Equipment such as Cellular Telephones and

Safeguards for Electronic Medical Equipment" (Electromagnetic Compatibility Conference, April 1997) and "Report of

Investigation of the Effects of Radio Waves on Medical Equipment, etc." (Association of Radio Industries and Businesses,

March 2001).

# Persons with implanted pacemaker/defibrillator should keep handset more than 22 cm away.

Radio waves can interfere with implanted pacemakers or defibrillators causing such devices to malfunction.

Turn handset off in crowds or trains where persons with implanted pacemaker/defibrillator may be near.

Radio waves can interfere with implanted pacemakers or defibrillators causing such devices to malfunction.

Observe these rules inside medical facilities:

^ Do not enter an operating room or an Intensive or

Coronary Care Unit while carrying a mobile handset.

^ Keep handset off in hospitals.

^ Keep handset off in hospital lobbies. Electronic equipment may be near.

^ Obey rules regarding mobile phone use in medical facilities.

Consult manufacturer for radio wave effects on electronic medical equipment.

# xxi

xxii

Handset, Battery & Charger

!CAUTION

Handset

Handset care

^ Place handset on stable surfaces to avoid malfunction or injury.

^ Keep handset away from oily smoke or steam. Fire or accidents may result.

^ Cold air from air conditioners may condense, resulting in leakage or burnout.

^ Keep handset away from direct sunlight (inside vehicles, etc.) or heat sources. Distortion, discolouration or fire may occur. Battery shape may be affected.

^ Keep handset out of extremely cold places to avoid malfunction or accidents.

^ Keep handset away from fire sources to avoid malfunction or accidents.

Usage environment

^ Excessive dust may prevent heat release and cause burnout or fire.

^ Avoid using handset on the beach. Sand may cause malfunction or accidents.

^ Keep handset away from credit cards, telephone cards, etc. to avoid data loss.

Handset temperature

Handset may become hot while in use. Avoid prolonged contact with skin especially at high temperature. May cause burn injuries.

Avoid leaving handset in extreme heat (inside vehicles, etc.).

Handset may become hot to the touch, leading to burn injuries.

Volume settings

Moderate handset volume; excessive volume may damage ears or hearing.

LCD Remote/Mic with Headphones

^ Do not force plugs or pull on cord; may damage plugs or cord.

^ Keep plugs clean to avoid noise and malfunction.

Inside vehicles

Handset use may cause electronic equipment to malfunction.

!CAUTION

Handset

If you experience any skin irritation associated with handset use, discontinue handset use and consult a doctor.

See handset materials below. Some materials may cause skin irritation, rashes, or itchiness depending on your physical condition.

Housing (Main Display side)

Housing (External Display side), hinge cover

ABS resin/Acrylic UV curing painting (sealer: acrylic painting, discontinuous deposition)

Acrylic resin, PET sheet, Acrylic UV curing painting Faceplate (External Display side)

Housing (Keypad/Battery side), battery cover, Antenna terminal cover ABS resin/Acrylic UV curing painting (sealer: acrylic painting)

Display window, lens cover Acrylic resin

Portrait/Macro Selector

Lens cover ornament

Logo badge

Parts

Shortcuts and A/a Key, Clear/Back Key, Multimedia/Text Key, Multi

Selector (Cursor Keys), Mail Key, Vodafone Web Key, Start Key, Power

On/Off Key, Keypad, Side Keys

Materials & Finishing

Magnesium alloy/Acrylic baking finish (sealer: epoxy baking finish)

ABS resin

ABS resin/Chrome plating

Acrylic UV curing resin, aluminium (base)

PC resin/Acrylic UV curing painting (sealer: acrylic painting)

Multi Selector (Cursor Keys)

Multi Selector (centre)

Strap Eyelet pin

Infrared Port

Memory Card Slot cover, VIDEO OUT/Headphone/Optical Digital Line

In Connector cover, External Device Connector cover

Battery

Charger Terminal

PC resin/Acrylic UV curing painting (sealer: discontinuous deposition, acrylic painting)

PC resin/ABS resin/Chrome plating (sealer: nickel, copper)

Stainless steel

ABS resin (infrared grade)

PC resin/Elastomeric resin/Acrylic UV curing painting

Screw

Screw cover, stop pad

USIM pin

USIM cover

PC resin

Phosphor bronze, gold plating (sealer: nickel)

SWCH16A/Trivalent chromate (white) (green)

Urethane rubber, polyester film, Acrylic adhesive

Copper alloy, gold plating (sealer: nickel)

SUS xxiii

xxiv

!CAUTION

Charger

Charger & In-Car Charger

^ Grasp plug (not cord) to disconnect Charger. May cause fire/electric shock.

^ Keep cord away from heaters. Exposed wire may cause fire or electric shock.

^ Stop use if plug is hot or improperly connected. May cause fire/electric shock.

^ Keep In-Car Charger socket clean. May overheat and cause injury.

Do not touch Desktop Holder while in use.

May cause burn injuries.

Use only the specified fuse.

1 A fuse for In-Car Charger.

Or may cause breakage/fire.

Always charge handset in a well-ventilated area.

Avoid covering/wrapping Charger and Desktop Holder; may cause damage/fire.

Do not use In-Car Charger when engine is off.

To avoid weakening the car battery, always start engine before charging the handset using In-Car Charger.

During periods of disuse

Always unplug AC Charger or In-Car Charger after use.

Handset maintenance

Always disconnect AC Charger or In-Car Charger when cleaning handset, to prevent shock/injury.

)

Installing In-Car Charger

Properly position the cable for safe driving to avoid injury or accidents.

!CAUTION

Battery

Do not throw or abuse battery. Battery may overheat, burst or ignite.

Do not leave battery in direct sunlight or inside a closed vehicle; may reduce battery performance or overheat.

An overheated battery may cause fire.

Do not expose battery to liquids. Performance may deteriorate.

If battery fluid contacts skin or clothes, rinse with clean water immediately.

Do not dispose of an exhausted battery with ordinary refuse; always tape over battery terminals before disposal.

Take exhausted battery to a Vodafone shop, or follow the local disposal regulations.

Keep battery out of children's reach.

^ Charge battery in ambient temperatures between of 5]C and 35]C; outside this range, battery may leak/overheat and performance may deteriorate.

^ If your child is using handset, explain all instructions and supervise usage.

^ If there is abnormal odour or excessive heat, stop using battery and call Vodafone Customer Centre, Customer

Assistance.

^ Charge battery at least once every six months; an uncharged battery may become unusable.

xxv

xxvi

General Notes

General Use

^ Vodafone is not liable for any damages resulting from accidental loss/alteration of handset or Memory Card data.

Keep a copy of Phone Book entries, etc. in a separate place.

^ Handset transmissions may be disrupted inside buildings, tunnels or underground, or when moving into/out of such places.

^ Use handset without disturbing others.

^ Handsets are radios as stipulated by the Radio Law. Under the

Radio Law, handsets must be submitted for inspection upon request.

Inside Vehicles

^ Never use handset while driving.

^ Do not park illegally to use handset.

^ Handset use near landlines, TVs or radios may cause interference.

^ Beware of eavesdropping.

Because this service is completely digital, the possibility of signal interception is greatly reduced. However, some transmissions may be overheard.

Eavesdropping

Deliberate/accidental interception of communications constitutes eavesdropping.

^ Handset use may affect a vehicle's electronic equipment.

Aboard Aircraft

^ Never use handset aboard aircraft (keep power off).

Handset use may impair aircraft operation.

Electromagnetic Waves

For body worn operation, this phone has been tested and meets RF exposure guidelines when used with an accessory that contains no metal and that positions the handset a minimum of 15 mm from the body. Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with RF exposure guidelines.

FCC RF Exposure Information

Your handset is a radio transmitter and receiver.

It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy set by the Federal

Communications Commission of the U.S. Government.

The guidelines are based on standards that were developed by independent scientific organisations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The standards include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health.

The exposure standard for wireless handsets employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The

SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6 W/k g. The tests are performed in positions and locations (e.g., at the ear and worn on the body) as required by the FCC for each model. The highest SAR value for this model handset when tested for use at the ear is 0.430 W/k g and when worn on the body, as described in this user guide, is 0.442 W/k g.

Body-worn Operation; This device was tested for typical body-worn operations with the back of the handset kept 1.5 cm from the body. To maintain compliance with FCC RF exposure requirements, use accessories that maintain a 1.5 cm separation distance between the user's body and the back of the handset. The use of beltclips, holsters and similar accessories should not contain metallic components in its assembly.

The use of accessories that do not satisfy these requirements may not comply with FCC RF exposure requirements, and should be avoided.

The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorisation for this model handset with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF emission guidelines. SAR information on this model handset is on file with the FCC and can be found under the Display

Grant section of http://www.fcc.gov/oet/fccid after searching on FCC

ID APYHRO00044.

Additional information on Specific Absorption Rates (SAR) can be found on the Cellular Telecommunications & Internet Association

(CTIA) website at http://www.phonefacts.net.

European RF Exposure Information

Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio waves recommended by international guidelines. These guidelines were developed by the independent scientific organization ICNIRP and include safety margins designed to assure the protection of all persons, regardless of age and health.

The guidelines use a unit of measurement known as the Specific

Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit for mobile devices is 2 W/k g and the highest SAR value for this device when tested at the ear was

0.395 W/k g*. As mobile devices offer a range of functions, they can be used in other positions, such as on the body as described in this user guide**. In this case, the highest tested SAR value is 0.697 W/k g.

As SAR is measured utilizing the devices highest transmitting power the actual SAR of this device while operating is typically below that indicated above. This is due to automatic changes to the power level of the device to ensure it only uses the minimum level required to reach the network.

The World Health Organization has stated that present scientific information does not indicate the need for any special precautions for the use of mobile devices. They note that if you want to reduce your exposure then you can do so by limiting the length of calls or using a hands-free device to keep the mobile phone away from the head and body.

* The tests are carried out in accordance with international guidelines for testing.

** Please see General Notes (Electromagnetic Waves) on

P.xxvi for important notes regarding body worn operation.

xxvii

xxviii

Handset Care

^ If handset is left with no battery or an exhausted one, data may be altered/lost. Vodafone is not liable for any resulting damages.

^ Use handset within temperatures of 5]C to 35]C and humidity of 35% to 85%. Avoid extreme temperatures/direct sunlight.

^ Exposing lens to direct sunlight may damage colour filter and affect image colour.

^ Do not drop or subject handset to shocks.

^ Clean handset with dry, soft cloth. Using alcohol, thinner, etc. may damage it.

^ Do not expose handset to rain, snow or high humidity.

^ Never disassemble or modify handset.

^ Avoid scratching handset Display.

^ When closing handset, keep straps, etc. outside to avoid damaging the Display.

^ When using headphones, moderate volume to avoid sound bleed.

^ Handset is not water-proof. Avoid exposure to liquids and high humidity.

B Keep handset away from precipitation.

B Cold air from air conditioning, etc. may condense causing corrosion.

B Avoid dropping handset in damp places (toilet, bathroom, etc.).

B On the beach, keep handset away from water and direct sunlight.

B Perspiration may seep inside handset causing malfunction.

^ Avoid heavy objects or excessive pressure. May cause malfunction or injury.

B Do not sit down with handset in a back pocket.

B Do not place heavy objects on handset in a bag.

^ Connect only the specified products to VIDEO OUT/Headphone

Connector. Non-specified devices may malfunction or cause damage.

^ Always turn off handset before removing battery. If battery is removed while saving data or sending mail, data may be lost, changed, or destroyed.

xxix

xxx

Copyrights

Duplicated material is limited to private use only. Use of materials beyond this limit or without permission of copyright holders may constitute copyright infringement, and be subject to criminal punishment. Comply with copyright laws when using images captured with handset camera.

Video recording and playback are based on MPEG-4.

This product is licensed under the MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfolio

License for the personal and non-commercial use of a consumer to

(i) encode video in compliance with the MPEG-4 Video Standard

("MPEG-4 Video") and/or (ii) decode MPEG-4 Video that was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal and non-commercial activity and/or was obtained from a licensed video provider. No licence is granted or implied for any other use.

Additional information may be obtained from MPEG LA.

See http://www.mpegla.com.

This product is licensed under the MPEG-4 Systems Patent

Portfolio License for encoding in compliance with the MPEG-4

Systems Standard, except that an additional licence and payment of royalties are necessary for encoding in connection with (i) data stored or replicated in physical media which is paid for on a title by title basis and/or (ii) data which is paid for on a title by title basis and is transmitted to an end user for permanent storage and/or use. Such additional licence may be obtained from MPEG LA,

LLC.

See http://www.mpegla.com for additional details.

Browser software copyright $ 1999-2005

This product is equipped with

JBlend designed to accelerate the performance of Java! Application.

1997-2005 Aplix Corporation.

JBlend and JBlend-related brands are trademarks or registered trademarks of Aplix Corporation in

Japan and other countries.

Java and Java-related brands are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the United States and other countries.

miniSD! is a trademark of the SD Association.

Portions of this product are protected under copyright law and are provided under license by

ARIS/SOLANA/4C.

Chaku-Uta is a registered trademark of Sony Music Entertainment

(Japan) Inc.

Licensed by QUALCOMM Incorporated under one or more of the following United States Patents and/or their counterparts in other nations:

4,901,307 5,490,165 5,056,109 5,504,773 5,101,501

5,506,865 5,109,390 5,511,073 5,228,054 5,535,239

5,267,261 5,544,196 5,267,262 5,568,483 5,337,338

5,600,754 5,414,796 5,657,420 5,416,797 5,659,569

5,710,784 5,778,338

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Sharp is under license.

Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.

Mascot Capsule is a registered trademark of HI Corporation

This product employs Macromedia# Flash Lite! technology developed by Macromedia, Inc.

Macromedia, Flash, Flash Lite, Macromedia Flash and Macromedia Flash

Lite are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries.

MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer

IIS and Thomson.

QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED.

xxxi

xxxii

The frequency band used for the Bluetooth# function of 804SH is shared with other industrial, scientific or medical equipment

(microwave ovens, etc.), and used at premises radio stations, amateur radio stations, etc. (hereinafter "other radio stations").

1 Before using the Bluetooth# function, visually check that there are no other radio stations sharing the same frequency band nearby.

2 Should interference occur between 804SH and other radio stations, move to other place or stop the Bluetooth# function

(stop the transmission) immediately.

3 For additional information and support, contact us at the following number.

Vodafone Customer Centre, General Information

From a Vodafone handset, call toll free at 157 for General

Information.

From landlines, see P.18-24 "Customer Service".

^ This radio equipment operates in the 2.4 GHz band using the

FH-SS modulation, and its maximum communication distance is

10 m.

FeliCa is a contactless IC card technology developed by Sony

Corporation.

FeliCa is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

m is a trademark of FeliCa Network, Inc.

Vodafone, Vodafone live! and the speech mark symbol are trademarks or registered trademarks of Vodafone Group Plc.

Video Call, V-application, Custom Screen and Movie Sha-mail are trademarks or registered trademarks of Vodafone K.K.

CP8 PATENT

Other company and product names mentioned herein are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.

Specific Absorption Rate (SAR)

^ 804SH meets the government's requirements for exposure to radio waves.

These requirements are based on scientific basis to assure that radio waves emitted from mobile phones and other handheld wireless devices do not affect human health. They require that the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR), which is the unit of measurement for the amount of radiofrequency absorbed by the body, shall not exceed 2 W/k g*. This limit includes a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age or health, and meets the international standard set by International Commission on

Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) in cooperation with World Health Organization (WHO).

^ The highest SAR value for 804SH is 0.69 W/kg. Tests for SAR are conducted with handset transmitting at its highest certified power level, and follow the testing methods set by the government. While there may be differences between the SAR levels for various handsets, they all meet the governmental requirements for safe exposure. The actual SAR level of the handset while operating can be well below the highest value.

This is because the handset is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the

Network.

^ Additional information on SAR can be obtained on the following Websites:

B Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications (Protection from Radio Wave Environment) http://www.tele.soumu.go.jp/e/ele/index.htm

B Association of Radio Industries and Businesses (ARIB) http://www.arib-emf.org/index02.html (Japanese only)

Requirements are stipulated in Radio Law (Ordinance Regulating

Radio Equipment, Article 14-2).

xxxiii

Getting Started

1-1

1-2

Function & Feature Preview

Memory Card is required for items with grey background.

Vodafone live! FeliCa

Hold handset over compatible reader/writers to use e-money services, etc. all around Japan.

P.17-2

USIM Card

For use only with USIM Card- compatible Vodafone handsets; contains vital user information.

P.1-4

Manner Mode

Press a single key to mute ringer and activate Answer

Phone automatically.

P.2-17

Video Call

Place or receive video calls: send live video or previously saved still image during calls.

P.5-2

Kanji Conversion

Entering Japanese text with

Predictive or Previous Usage reduces required keystrokes.

P.3-10

International Roaming

Make/receive calls, exchange mail or access Vodafone live! services even outside Japan.

P.2-15

Phone Book

Save up to 750 entries; add up to three phone numbers/three mail addresses to each.

P.4-2

Camera

Capture still/video images shot with the 2.0 megapixel handset camera; send images via MMS.

P.6-2

Media Player

Play downloaded music and video images as well as those recorded/captured on handset.

P.7-2

Memory Card

Save files to Memory Card to expand handset memory or back-up your handset files.

P.8-2

Data Folder

Access handset image and sound files from here; files are organised by file type.

P.9-2

Bluetooth & Infrared

Wirelessly exchange handset files with compatible devices.

Use Bluetooth headsets, etc.

P.10-20, P.10-28

Display

Change Wallpaper, System

Graphics, Fonts, et cetera to customise handset interface.

P.10-3

Mass Storage

Use a PC to directly access

Memory Card content while card is inserted into handset.

P.10-31

Custom Screen

Load uni-themed Wallpaper,

Indicators, Ringtones, and more, all at the same time.

P.10-4

Calendar & Tasks

Add events by date with time parameters; set Reminder, add stamps and set other options.

P.11-2, P.11-6

Display Language

Change Phone Settings to make handset user interface appear in either English or Japanese.

P.10-4

Voice Recorder

Save short voice memos on handset or Memory Card; or long ones on Memory Card.

P.11-15

Barcodes/Text Scanner

Scan UPC/QR Codes and text or create QR Codes from

Phone Book entries, etc.

P.11-17, P.11-20, P.11-21

Call Forwarding

Automatically divert all or all unanswered incoming calls to another preset phone number.

P.12-2

Conference Call

Switch between open lines or connect multiple lines at once for wireless teleconferencing.

P.12-5

Electronic Books

Purchase and then download

E-Books to read on handset.

Mark pages with bookmarks.

P.11-25

Optional Services

Voice Mail

Redirect all or unanswered calls to Voice Mail; access messages from 804SH/touchtone landline.

P.12-3

Vodafone live!

Send/receive SMS/MMS, browse the Mobile Internet for files/info or download V-applications via Web.

P.13-2

Call Waiting

Reduce missed calls! Answer incoming calls even while the handset is already is engaged.

P.12-5

Call Barring

Restrict all incoming/outgoing calls or apply restrictions by type of call/current location.

P.12-6

Caller ID

Set 804SH to show/hide your phone number for all outgoing calls or enter show/hide prefix.

P.12-9

Video Output

View previously saved handset still/video images on an external display or send real-time images.

P.10-8, P.16-3

1-3

1-4

USIM Card

General Information & Precautions

Vodafone Global Standard USIM Card is an IC Card containing customer information such as handset number.

USIM Card must be inserted before using a USIM

Card-compatible handset. Without USIM Card, some services (calls, messaging, Web, etc.) are not available.

^ Save contacts on USIM Card Phone Book (see P.4-3).

^ Insert into compatible Vodafone handsets to access files.

^ Do not apply excessive force to insert/remove USIM Card.

^ Do not insert USIM Card into any other IC card device.

Vodafone is not liable for resulting damages.

^ Keep the USIM Card IC chip clean.

^ Use a dry, soft cloth to clean the USIM Card.

^ Do not attach labels to USIM Card. Malfunction may result.

IC Chip

CIf Handset is Dropped or Subjected to Shocks

804SH may not recognise USIM Card; it may shut down and remain off or automatically restart. This is not a malfunction.

If Insert USIM Card appears or 804SH does not restart, clean and properly reinsert USIM Card then restart 804SH.

Important

^ USIM Card is the property of Vodafone.

^ USIM Card will be reissued for a fee if lost or damaged.

^ Return USIM Card to Vodafone upon subscription termination.

^ Returned USIM Cards are recycled.

^ USIM Card specifications may change without prior notice.

^ Back-up USIM Card files. Vodafone is not liable for lost files.

^ If your USIM Card or handset (with USIM Card inserted) is lost or stolen, suspend your service immediately. For details, contact Vodafone Customer Centre, General Information

(see P.18-24).

USIM Card

Inserting & Removing USIM Card

Turn handset power off beforehand.

Inserting

1 Remove battery

(see P.1-15)

Removing

1 Remove battery

(see P.1-15)

2 Slide in USIM Card with

IC chip facing down

3 Insert battery (Steps 3 -

4 "Inserting" on P.1-15)

2 Press Tab then push

USIM Card as shown

3 Insert battery (Steps 3 -

4 "Inserting" on P.1-15)

f e

Tab

Note

H ^ Do not force USIM Card into or out of handset; damage may result.

^ Take care not to lose removed USIM Card.

^ Avoid touching USIM Card IC chip. May hinder performance (see P.1-4). Avoid touching USIM Card terminals as well.

^ Replacing USIM Card with one containing different customer information, or turning on handset without USIM Card inserted

deletes all downloaded Custom Screen Keys (see P.10-5); handset repairs may also delete Custom Screen Keys. If handset

number is unchanged, however, previously downloaded Keys may be re-downloaded at no charge (transmission fees apply).

1-5

USIM PINs

There are two Security Codes for USIM Card: PIN1 and PIN2.

PIN1

A 4-digit to 8-digit Security Code to prevent unauthorised use of Vodafone handset.

^ Change PIN1 as needed (see P.10-16 "Change PIN").

^ When PIN Entry (see P.10-16) is On, PIN1 must be entered

each time handset (with USIM Card inserted) is turned on.

^ PIN1 is 9999 by default.

PIN2

Required to clear Call Costs (see P.2-14) and to set Max

Cost (see P.2-14).

^ Change PIN2 as needed (see P.10-16 "Change PIN").

^ PIN2 is 9999 by default.

PIN Lock & PUK Code

PIN1 Lock or PIN2 Lock is activated if PIN1 or PIN2 is incorrectly entered three times consecutively. Cancel PIN

Lock (see P.10-16) by entering the Personal Unblocking Key

(PUK Code). For information on PUK Code, contact Vodafone

Customer Centre, General Information (see P.18-24).

Note

H ^ If PUK Code is incorrectly entered ten times, USIM

Card is locked and handset is disabled. Write down

PUK Code.

^ For USIM Card unlocking procedures, call Vodafone

Customer Centre, General Information (see P.18-24).

^ Emergency calls (110, etc.) are not possible when

Switch On/Off in PIN Entry is On. For more, see P.2-4

"Emergency Calls".

1-6

Handset Parts & Functions

Handset

1 Display

2 Mail Key

Open Messaging menu or execute Soft Key functions

(see P.1-21).

3 Start Key

Initiate/answer calls. Open records of All Calls.

4 Shortcuts & A/a Key

In Standby, open Shortcuts menu. In text entry windows, toggle upper/lower case roman letters or standard/small hiragana/katakana.

J K

5 Clear/Back Key

Delete entries, escape/return to previous window.

6 Keypad

7 U & Keypad Lock Key

In Standby, press for 1+ seconds to toggle Keypad Lock. In text entry, open web/mail address prefixes & suffixes.

8 Internal Camera

Use during Video Call.

9 Earpiece

1-7

1 A Multi Selector

Select menu items, move cursor and scroll, etc.

B Vodafone Web Key

Open Vodafone Web Main Menu or execute Soft Key

functions (see P.1-21).

C Power On/Off Key

Press for 2+ seconds to turn handset power on/off.

D Multimedia/Text Key

Start Media Player or toggle between character entry modes.

E # & Manner Key

In text entry windows, toggle Symbol/Pictograph Lists.

Press for 1+ seconds to activate/cancel Manner mode.

F Microphone

G Shutter Key

Open selected menu items or execute functions. In Standby

(clamshell open), press for 1+ seconds to activate mobile camera.

H Memory Card Slot

Insert Memory Card here.

I VIDEO OUT/Headphone/Optical Digital Line In Connector

Connect supplied LCD Remote/Mic with Headphones, optional Video Cable, etc.

J Charger Terminal

K External Device Connector

Connect Charger here.

L Infrared Port

Use for infrared data transmissions.

M Strap Eyelet

Attach straps as shown.

N Zoom/Select Key

Select menu items, move cursor, etc.

O Internal Antenna Location

P External Display

Q Small Light

Illuminates red while charging.

R m Logo

Vodafone live! FeliCa contactless IC Card embedded.

Centre m logo side over reader/writer to use IC Card.

S Speaker

T External Camera (lens cover)

Capture still and video image.

U Mobile Light

Flashes for calls/new mail; use as strobe/Pen Light.

V Portrait (p)/Macro (o) Selector

W Battery Cover

Note

Internal Antenna

^ 804SH has no external antenna. Handset transmits and receives signals via Internal Antenna.

^ Do not cover or place stickers, etc. over the area containing Internal Antenna.

^ Voice quality varies with handset usage/location.

^ Avoid attaching metallic straps. Antenna sensitivity will be affected.

Tip H

Descriptions on P.1-7 - 1-8 are illustrative of general

handset usage.

1-8

Display Indicators

Main Display Indicators

N gk9XcK1gsJ j ehm kkld

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B

N gk9XcK1gsJ j ehm kkld

H I J

1 Network Service

N: 3G, S: GSM

Signal Strength

N: Strong, O: Moderate, P: Low, Q: Weak,

S: Out-of-Range

2 7: Incoming Voice Call, g: Voice Call in Progress,

S: Video Call in Progress, U : Offline Mode,

7: Packet Transmission Ready,

8: Packet Transmission in Progress

3 Mail h: Unread Mail

Y: Handset Memory Low, X: USIM Card Memory Low,

Y: Handset & USIM Card Memories Low i: Receiving Mail, j: Sending Mail

4 IC Card Lock Active

5 X: Call Forwarding or Voice Mail Active

Appears when Always (forwarding condition) is set.

G: Auto Delivery Info

6 Memory Card Status c: Inserted, S: In Use, Q: Formatting, s: Unusable

7 K: Active V-application, K (grey): Paused V-application,

I: Music Player Active, X: SSL

8 External Transmission

1: USB Transmission Ready d (red): Infrared Connection in Progress

0: Infrared Transmission in Progress

2 *

: Bluetooth Transmission Ready

Appears in grey when Visibility is set to Hide My Phone.

B: Bluetooth Transmission in Progress

C: Bluetooth Talk in Progress

9 Ringtone/Vibration g: Silent, h: Increasing Volume, f: Vibration Active,

G: Silent & Vibration Active.

m: Loudspeaker Active

C: Microphone Muted

A Mode s: Meeting, r: Activity, b: Car, V: Headset, k: Manner

B Battery Strength

Indicator may appear vertically (e.g. @).

1-9

1 C j: Answer Phone Active r: Answer Phone Active & Message Recorded s: Answer Phone Cancelled & Message Recorded

D Alarm Set

E h: Schedule (Reminder Set) i: Schedule (Reminder Unset)

F Message Delivery Failure

G New Voice Mail

H Secret Mode Active

I l: Function Lock Active b: Keypad Lock Active

J d (grey): Infrared Transmission Ready

External Display Indicators

Only major External Display Indicators are described below.

@ P S

1 2 3

1 @/n: Battery Strength p: IC Card Lock Active

2 Time

3 S: Signal Strength

CIncoming Communications

Indicator and number of calls/messages, etc. appear for unconfirmed incoming communications or Alarm.

Missed Calls i Alarm R

Answer Phone Message h Calendar (Reminder set) V

New Messages

Auto Delivery Info z Tasks (Reminder set) U r Message Delivery Failure s

Up to two indicators appear at the same time. Press L or

M to view more.

Display Positions

CClamshell Closed

Handset is closed. Keep handset in this position when not in use.

CClamshell Open

Handset is open. Place or answer calls, enter text, etc.

1-10

Battery & Charger

Getting Started

Charge battery before first use/after period of disuse.

Battery Life

^ Do not use/store battery at extreme temperatures; this may shorten battery life. Ideally, use/store between 5]C and 35]C.

^ Use specified Charger only; others may damage handset/ battery or overheat or ignite battery.

^ Replace battery if operating time shortens noticeably.

Charging

^ Do not use Charger for other purposes.

^ Contact with metal may short, overheat or burst battery.

^ Small Light illuminates red while charging. (It may take longer for the light to illuminate when handset is off.)

^ Charging takes approximately 140 minutes (with handset off).

B Charging time may vary by ambient temperature.

^ 804SH and Charger may warm during charging.

^ Separate Charger from TV/radio if interference occurs.

Precautions

^ Clean device charging terminals with a dry cotton swab.

^ Avoid:

B Extreme temperatures

B Humidity, dust and vibration

B Direct sunlight

^ Charge battery at least once every six months; an uncharged battery may become unusable.

^ Use a case when carrying battery separately.

Tip H ^ Battery must be inside handset to charge it.

^ While charging battery with handset on, J flashes until battery is fully charged.

^ Battery will charge regardless of handset position.

1-11

Estimated Hours of Use (fully charged battery)

Continuous Talk Time

Continuous Standby Time

2.5 hours in 3G/4 hours in GSM

370 hours

Continuous Operating Time 5.5 hours

Continuous Playback Time 10 hours

Continuous Video Call Time 90 minutes

Values calculated with Backlight Brightness set to Level 4.

^ Continuous Talk Time is an average measured with a new, fully charged battery, with stable signals. Continuous Talk

Time may be less than half this value if handset is out-of-range or signal is weak.

^ Continuous Standby Time is an average measured with a new, fully charged battery, with clamshell closed without calls or operations, in Standby with stable signals. Standby Time may be less than half this value if handset is out-of-range or signal is weak. Standby Time may vary by environment (battery status, temperature, etc.).

^ Continuous Operating Time is the length of time handset keys can be pressed continuously without calls.

^ Continuous Playback Time is measured while music plays

(Tone Control set to Normal) using LCD Remote/Mic with

Headphones, Offline Mode cancelled, and clamshell closed.

^ The above values (Battery Time) are nominal values, measured under stable signal conditions.

Battery Time

Using handset in poor conditions may shorten Battery

Time:

^ Poor Usage Conditions

B Extreme temperatures (use within a range of 5]C to 35]C)

B Impaired handset, battery or Charger terminals

B Signal is weak/handset is out-of-range

^ Power Consuming Operations

B Activating/using V-applications

B Repeated mobile camera use or barcode scanning

B Frequent use of Mobile Light

B Playing video images

B Frequent use of Pen Light

B Continuous Keypad use (Keeping backlights on for long periods)

B Using Music Player/Voice Recorder

B Frequent Bluetooth transmissions

B Frequent infrared transfers

^ Power Consuming Settings

B Increasing Backlight Time Out/Display Saving time

B Setting Backlight to illuminate brighter

B Activating Bluetooth in Standby

1-12

Extend Battery Time

Select shorter Display Saving/Backlight time (see P.10-7)

to extend Battery Time.

When Battery Runs Out

A message appears and short beeps sound.

Press g to stop short beeps.

(Short beeps do not sound in Manner mode.)

CDuring Voice Call

A double beep sounds every five seconds.

After 20 seconds, the call ends and handset shuts down.

CDuring Video Call

A message appears and call ends with a double beep, then short beeps sound. Handset shuts down after 20 seconds.

(Short beeps are muted in Manner mode.)

Battery Disposal

Do not dispose of an exhausted battery with ordinary refuse; always tape over battery terminals before disposal.

Take exhausted battery to a Vodafone shop, or follow the local disposal regulations.

Battery Strength

Strength Levels

@ P N

External Display

When battery runs out, Recharge Battery appears and short beeps sound. Handset shuts down after 20 seconds.

1-13

1 CIndicator

Battery Strength indicator varies as shown.

Charge or replace when level is low.

Recharge Battery appears.

Charge or replace battery immediately.

J/ @

Level 3

Approx. 70%

Level 2

A L/ B

Level 1

Approx. 20% Approx. 10%

Remaining Strength (at 25 ]C)

Minimum Operating

Voltage

Level 0

Hours of Use

CBattery Strength & Environment

At low temperatures, battery is consumed faster.

At high temperatures, battery lasts longer.

Note

H ^ Battery Strength indicator is for reference only.

^ At Level 1, some functions including Video Camera,

Music Player and Voice Recorder do not operate

(see P.6-7, P.7-8, P.11-15).

Small Light & Battery Strength Indicator

CHandset Power On

Small Light

Off

Flashes red

Illuminates red

Off

Indicator (J/@)

Flashes

Illuminates

CHandset Power Off

Conditions

Ambient temperature is outside the range of 5]C to

35]C, or battery has run out

Battery life has ended, or battery defect

Charging

Charging completed/Standby

Small Light

Flashes red

Illuminates red

Off

Indicator (J/@)

Off

Conditions

Battery life has ended, or battery defect

Charging

Charging completed

1-14

Installing & Removing Battery

Inserting

1 Press down and slide cover as shown

Battery Cover e f

2 Lift and remove cover as shown

3 Insert battery

^ With printed side up, fit tabs into battery cavity slots.

4 Close cover

^ Position and slide the cover as shown until it stops.

f e

Removing

^ Turn handset power off before removing battery.

^ Do not remove battery immediately after saving files, sending messages, etc.

Battery Cover e

1 Press down and slide cover as shown f

2 Lift and remove cover as shown

3 Remove battery

^ Take hold of Battery Tab here and lift as shown.

Tip

H This product requires a lithium-ion battery. Lithium-ion batteries are a recyclable resource.

^ To recycle a used lithium-ion battery, take it to any shop displaying the symbol shown to the right.

^ To avoid fire or electric shock, do not:

B Short-circuit battery B Disassemble battery

1-15

AC Charger

AC 100V

Blades

Arrows Up

AC Charger

Release Tabs

Charger Connector

Small Light

Terminal Cover

External Device Connector

Use specified Charger only.

1 Open Terminal Cover to connect Charger

^ Squeeze release tabs and insert connector fully.

^ Use slot to gently pull Terminal

Cover down and out as shown.

Slot

2 Plug Charger into AC outlet

^ Charging starts and Small Light

illuminates red (see P.1-14).

^ Extend Charger blades.

(Fold back when not in use.)

3 Charging is complete when light goes out

^ Charging takes approximately 140 minutes.

4 After Charging

Unplug Charger from AC outlet, then 804SH

^ Squeeze release tabs to remove connector.

^ Replace Terminal Cover to protect External Device Connector.

Note H ^ Do not pull, bend or twist AC Charger cord.

^ AC Charger is compatible with household currents between AC 100V and 240V.

^ Vodafone is not liable for problems resulting from charging 804SH abroad.

1-16

Desktop Holder

Desktop Holder may be purchased separately.

Small Light

Release Tabs

AC 100V

Charger

Connector

AC Charger

Blades

Arrows Down

Insert cord into the groove.

Connection Terminal

Use specified Charger only.

1 Insert Charger connector into Desktop Holder until it clicks

^ Connection Terminal is on the back of Desktop Holder.

2 Plug Charger into AC outlet

^ Extend Charger blades.

(Fold back when not in use.)

3 Gently insert handset into Desktop Holder

^ Fit tabs into slots as shown in 1 and push handset as indicated in 2 until it clicks into place (resting flat).

^ Charging starts and Small Light illuminates red (see P.1-14).

4 Charging is complete when light goes out

^ Charging takes approximately 140 minutes.

5 After Charging

Unplug Charger from outlet and remove handset

1-17

In-Car Charger

In-Car Charger may be purchased separately.

Cigarette Lighter Socket

Release Tabs

Plug

Charger

Connector

In-Car Charger

Small Light

Terminal Cover

External Device Connector

Arrows Up

1 Open Terminal Cover and insert Charger

connector until it clicks (see P.1-16)

2 Plug Charger into cigarette lighter socket

3 Start car engine

^ Charging starts and Small Light illuminates red (see P.1-14).

4 Charging is complete when light goes out

^ Charging takes approximately 140 minutes.

Tip

H ^ For more information, see In-Car Charger manual.

^ Use optional In-Car Holder to secure handset.

5 After Charging

Unplug Charger from cigarette lighter socket, then 804SH

^ Squeeze release tabs to remove connector.

^ Replace Terminal Cover to protect External Device Connector.

Note

H ^ Use In-Car Charger only when vehicle has a negative earth.

^ Disconnect Charger before leaving vehicle to prevent charging with engine off.

^ Do not use In-Car Charger with Desktop Holder.

^ Avoid charging battery inside extremely hot vehicles.

1-18

Handset Power On/Off

Standby

1 Open handset

2 Press g for 2+ seconds

^ Backlight illuminates; after Power On

Graphic, handset enters Standby.

3 Turning Off

Press g for 2+ seconds

After Power Off Graphic, handset shuts down.

Clock Settings & Re-Provisioning

C If date and time have not been set, a confirmation appears after Power On Graphic.

Choose N i

Use F to select your zone

Press b

Enter date and time

Press b

Enter last name

Press b

Enter first name

Press b

^ Save your zone if not preset (see P.10-14 "Time Zone").

C Handset initiates Re-Provisioning to update Network information when N, M or b is pressed for the first time; press N i.

^ Perform Re-Provisioning to use Vodafone live! services.

^ To update Network information manually, see P.10-35 "Re-Provisioning".

My Details

C To confirm handset phone number, press b0 in Standby.

^ To add, edit, delete or copy My Details, see P.4-14.

Note

H ^ USIM Card data is read after turning power on. Signal strength indicator may take some time to appear. It may take longer when turning power on for the first time.

^ Insert USIM Card appears when USIM Card is not inserted. If it appears with USIM Card inserted, turn off handset power and check that the card is properly inserted and that the IC chip is clean, then restart handset.

Tip H Display shuts down after a period of inactivity.

1-19

Keypad Lock

Use Keypad Lock to lock handset keys and prevent accidental operation/function activation.

Activating

1 Press q for 1+ seconds b appears and Keypad Lock is set.

Cancelling

1 Press q for 1+ seconds b disappears.

Note

Emergency calls (110, etc.) are possible even when Keypad Lock is active. For more, see P.2-4

"Emergency Calls".

Tip H When Keypad Lock is Active

^ Incoming calls temporarily cancel Keypad Lock. To answer a call, press f. [Activate Any Key

Answer (see P.10-2) to answer calls with other keys.]

Keypad Lock reactivates after the call.

^ Handset power does not turn off even if g is pressed for 2+ seconds.

Pen Light

Use handset as a flashlight with clamshell closed.

1 Press h for 1+ seconds

C To change illumination colour, press L or M while on.

2 Press h to turn off

Note

Do not point Pen Light at people or look at it directly.

1-20

Handset Menus

Main Menu

Access functions/operations from Main Menu.

1 Press b

Main Menu opens.

CMain Menu Items

Mail Messages

V-applications

Web

Media Player

2 Use G to select an item and press b

Sub Menu opens (see P.18-2).

CSoft Keys

Soft Key functions appear at the bottom of

Display.

Data Folder

Mobile Camera

Call Log

Phone Book

Settings

My Details

IC-appli

Tools (Calendar, Alarm, World Clock, etc.)

Press

M to select or execute the assigned function or operation.

Press b to select or execute the assigned function or operation.

Press N to select or execute the assigned function or operation.

Return to Standby

C Press g to return to Standby (see P.1-19) from function windows, menus, etc.

^ When a confirmation appears, choose N i. Handset returns to Standby.

1-21

User Shortcuts

Using Shortcuts

Create shortcuts to functions and files.

Default Shortcuts:

B Calendar, Calculator, Alarms, Voice Recorder, Sounds & Alerts, Display,

Play Ans. Phone, Bluetooth, V-appli, Data Folder, Videos and Expenses

Memo

1 Press k

Shortcuts list appears.

2 Select a function and press b

Editing Shortcuts

Assign Change default shortcuts

Press k

Select an item

Press N P

Select Assign

Press b

Select new item

Press b

Move Change the order of items

Press k

Select an item

Press N P

Select Move

Press b

Select

target location with E

Press b

Set to Default Restore default shortcuts

Press k

Press N P

Select Set to Default

Press b

Press N i

1-22

Quick Operations

In Standby, enter numbers to access functions quickly.

To activate functions, press the key next to the function.

Accessible functions vary by the number of digits entered.

Function

Speed Dial (see P.4-14)

Calculator (see P.11-14)

Expenses Memo (see P.11-24)

Speed Mail (see P.14-22)

Calendar (see P.11-2)

Set Alarm (see P.11-10)

Place International Calls

Digits

(see P.2-4)

5 - 6

7 - 12

13 - 32

Except for 0.

Press N A after entering a number. Save entries to Speed Mail List (see P.14-22) beforehand.

Except for invalid numbers such as 0431 (there is no 31 April).

Enter four digits for time (24-hour format) to set Alarm.

Call to Japan appears when outside Japan.

CExample: Enter 1111 to use Calculator

1 Press 1111

2 Press C

1-23

Security Codes

Handset Code, Centre Access Code and Network Password are needed for handset use.

Handset Code

9999 or the 4-digit number selected at initial subscription; required to use/change some handset functions.

^ U appears when Handset Code is entered.

^ If incorrect, Handset code is incorrect! appears; re-enter code.

^ Change Handset Code as needed (see P.10-18).

Centre Access Code

The 4-digit number in the contract; required to access Voice

Mail via landlines or subscribe to fee-based information.

Do not attempt to change Centre Access Code. Contact

Vodafone Customer Centre, General Information (see

P.18-24) for details.

Network Password

The 4-digit number selected at initial subscription; required

to restrict handset services (see P.12-6).

^ If Network Password is incorrectly entered three times, Call

Barring settings are locked. To resolve, Network Password and

Centre Access Code must be changed. For details, contact

Vodafone Customer Centre, General Information (see P.18-24).

^ Change Network Password as needed (see P.12-9).

Note H ^ Write down Handset Code, Centre Access Code and Network Password. If lost, contact Vodafone Customer Centre, General

Information (see P.18-24).

^ Do not reveal Handset Code, Centre Access Code and Network Password. Vodafone is not liable for misuse or damages.

1-24

Basic Handset Operations

2-1

2-2

Initiating a Call

See P.2-4 to initiate international calls from Japan, P.2-16 for Voice Calls from outside Japan and P.5-3 for Video Calls.

1 Confirm handset is on

^ Check signal strength (see P.1-9 1).

^ Handset will not transmit when S, U, b or

l appears (see P.18-4 - 18-6).

Enter a phone number

^ Include dialling code for all numbers.

C To send/block Caller ID, enter a phone number and press N P A Select

Show My ID or Hide My ID

Press b

3 Confirm the number and press f

Correcting Numbers

^ Use F to move cursor and press i to delete the digit above the cursor. Press i for 1+ seconds to delete the entire number and return to Standby.

^ If you misdial, press g to hang up and try again.

Busy Numbers

^ Press g to end the call and try again later.

4 Press g to end call

^ Alternatively, close handset.

Calling Numbers Not Saved in Phone Book

^ Would you like to save this number to

your Phone Book? appears after calls.

B To save, press N i A Perform Step

4 on P.4-7

B Press M c to end without saving.

^ To hide this confirmation, see P.4-4

"Confirmation for Unsaved Numbers".

Note H

^ Do not cover handset microphone (see P.1-7 F) while talking on the phone.

^ Avoid covering area over Internal Antenna (see P.1-7 O).

^ Voice quality is affected depending on how and where handset is used.

Tip H

^ Check Call Timers (see P.2-13) and Call Costs (see P.2-14).

^ For operations during a call, see P.2-10 - 2-11.

Redial

Place calls from Dialled Numbers. Up to 30 recently dialled numbers are saved.

1 Press B 2 Select a record and press b

3 Press f

804SH dials the number.

CIndicators q Dialled Voice Call O Dialled Video Call

Dialled numbers appear with date and time.

^ Name appears if saved in Phone Book.

^ Press D or C to see more.

^ Use F to open Received Calls or All Calls.

Tip

H ^ When the same number is dialled more than once, only the last record appears.

^ Records remain even after handset power is turned off.

^ When there are 30 records, oldest records are replaced by new ones. To delete records

manually, see P.2-12.

2-3

2-4

Placing an International Call

^ See P.2-16 to initiate Voice Calls from outside Japan.

^ When calling Vodafone handsets, country code is not required.

^ Service requires an additional contract. For details, contact Vodafone Customer Centre, General

Information (see P.18-24).

1 Enter a phone number

^ Include dialling code for landline numbers.

C To use Quick Operations, enter a phone number and press j A Select a country

Press b

Skip ahead to Step 6

C To enter numbers directly, enter 0046010

(default international prefix)

Enter country code A Enter a phone number including the dialling code

Skip ahead to Step 6

B Omit the first 0 of the dialling code except when calling Italy (country code: 39) or

Russia (country code: 7).

2 Press N P

3 Select Int'l Call and press b

Country names appear.

4 Select a country and press b

C To call unlisted countries, select Enter

Code

Press b

A Press b

Enter country code

5 Select Japan and press b

6 Press f

Tip

To save frequently used country codes, see P.10-19 "Country Codes". For more information,

contact Vodafone Customer Centre, General Information (see P.18-24).

Emergency Calls

Emergency calls (110, 119, 118, etc.) are possible even while some handset restrictions are active.

Active Restriction

Max Cost (see P.2-14)

Offline Mode (see P.2-19)

Function Lock (see P.10-17)

Keypad Lock (see P.1-20)

Emergency Calls

Possible

Not Possible

Possible

Active Restriction

Handset Lock (see P.10-17)

PIN Entry (see P.1-6, P.10-16)

Outgoing Calls (see P.12-7)

Emergency Calls

Possible

Not Possible

Possible

Note H Emergency calls may not be possible outside Japan as handset operations are affected by wireless network/radio signals available in the country or handset settings.

Incoming Call

1 When a call arrives, open handset 2 Press f

Handling Incoming Calls: see P.2-7

3 Press g to end call

^ Alternatively, close handset.

Calls from Numbers Not Saved in Phone Book

^ Would you like to save this number to

your Phone Book? appears after calls.

B To save, press N i A

Perform Step

4 on P.4-7

B Press M c to end without saving.

^ To hide this confirmation, see P.4-4

"Confirmation for Unsaved Numbers".

^ Number appears when Caller ID is sent.

^ Name appears if saved in Phone Book.

Answering a Video Call: see P.5-3

Tip

^ When Any Key Answer (see P.10-2) is active, press any of the following keys to answer calls:

0 - 9, q, p, G, k, j

^ When Caller ID is not sent, Unset ID appears instead of the phone number.

^ Up to 30 received call records are saved (see P.2-12).

^ Use Quick Recorder (see P.2-9) to record caller messages on handset when Answer Phone is

inactive.

^ Change Ringtone volumes/patterns, Mobile Light colours, etc. (see P.10-10 - 10-12).

2-5

2-6

Calling from Received Calls

Up to 30 received calls are saved. When Caller ID is sent, numbers appear. Place calls directly to those numbers.

1 Press A 2 Select a record and press b

3 Press f

804SH dials the number.

CIndicators r Answered Voice Call Q Answered Video Call s Missed Voice Call R Missed Video Call

N Rejected Voice Call S Rejected Video Call

Received numbers appear with date and time.

^ Name appears if saved in Phone Book.

^ Press D or C to see more.

^ Use F to open Received Calls or All Calls.

Tip H ^ Names in Secret Mode entries appear only in Secret Mode.

^ Records remain even after handset power is turned off.

^ When there are 30 records, oldest records are replaced by new ones. To delete records

manually, see P.2-12.

Handling Incoming Calls

Rejecting a Call

Calls are rejected and saved in Received Calls.

1 When a call arrives, open handset 2 While handset is ringing/vibrating,

press g for 1+ seconds

Redirecting a Call

CCall Forwarding: see P.12-2

Direct incoming calls to a specified number by pressing M h.

CVoice Mail: see P.12-3

Unanswered calls are forwarded to Voice

Mail Centre.

CAnswer Phone: see P.2-8

Record caller messages on handset.

Use Quick Recorder (see P.2-9) to record

caller messages on handset when Answer

Phone is inactive.

Information

C Information window opens for Missed Calls or Answer Phone messages.

^ Select Call and press b to see details (see P.2-12).

^ Select Voice Msg. and press b to play recorded messages (see P.2-9).

2-7

2-8

Answer Phone

Record caller messages on handset.

^ Answer Phone cannot be used when handset is off, out-of-range or in Offline Mode. Use Voice Mail to record caller messages

when Answer Phone is not available (see P.12-3).

^ Record up to 90 seconds or 20 messages between Answer Phone and Voice Memo (see P.2-11).

^ Answer Phone is inactive by default.

Activating & Deactivating

Main Menu H Tools A Answer Phone

1 Select Settings and press b

2 Select Switch On/Off and press b

C To sample outgoing message, select

Guidance Message

Press b

B Press M W to stop.

3 Activating

1 Choose On and press b

^ Press g to return to Standby (j appears). (r appears when messages are recorded.)

Deactivating

1 Choose Off and press b

When Answer Phone is Active

C For incoming calls, outgoing message plays and recording starts.

^ Recording continues even if handset is closed.

^ To answer calls, press f during recording (no message will be recorded).

^ When recording ends, r appears.

C If recording capacity becomes full (see below) after the recording, Answer Phone is deactivated and s appears.

Note

H ^ When less than 12 seconds remain or 20 messages are recorded, Answer Phone is disabled.

Delete messages to activate Answer Phone.

^ Answer Phone is not available for incoming Video Calls.

^ In Manner mode, Manner settings take priority over (see P.10-2 "Mode Settings").

Playing Messages

Main Menu H Tools A Answer Phone

1 Select Play Ans. Phone and press b

Number of recordings appears and playback starts from the most recent message. After all messages have played, playback ends automatically.

C Press M W to stop playback.

C To skip a message, press A during playback.

C To play the previous message, press B twice during playback.

C To delete a message, press N P during playback

Select Delete A Press b A Press N i

Tip H Incoming Calls

Message playback stops for incoming calls. Press f to answer the call.

Earpiece Volume

C Follow these steps to activate or mute Earpiece for outgoing message/caller message recordings.

Press b

Select Tools

Press b

Select

Answer Phone

Press b

Select Settings

Press b

Select Volume

Press b

Select

Link to Profile or Silent A Press b

^ For Link to Profile, current Earpiece volume applies.

Answer Time

C Adjust ring time between 0 and 59 seconds (Answer Phone waits to answer calls).

Press b

Select Tools

Press b

Select

Answer Phone

Press b

Select Settings

Press b A Select Answer Time A Press b A

Enter time (00 - 59)

Press b

B To start recording immediately after a call arrives, enter

00 A Press b

^ Answer Time is 09 seconds by default.

C When Answer Phone and Voice Mail or Call Forwarding are both active, the function with the shortest ring time takes priority.

Example:

Ring time for Answer Phone: 9 seconds

Ring time for Voice Mail or Call Forwarding: 10 seconds

In this example, Answer Phone responds first. (Priority may change depending on signal conditions.)

^ If Answer Phone is full or handset is in Offline Mode or out-of-range, incoming calls are handled by Voice Mail or

Call Forwarding.

Quick Recorder

C Use Quick Recorder to record caller messages on handset when Answer Phone is inactive. When a call arrives, follow these steps. Outgoing message plays and caller's message is recorded.

Press N P

Select Recording

Press b

2-9

Engaged Call Operations

Earpiece Volume

Adjust Earpiece Volume (5 levels).

^ Volume level remains as set even after handset power is turned off.

^ Earpiece volume is Level 3 by default.

1 During a call, press L or M 2 Press L (up) or M (down) to adjust volume

Voice Output

Loudspeaker Use Loudspeaker for handsfree conversations

During a call, press N P

Select Loudspeaker On

Press b

C To cancel, press N P

Select Loudspeaker Off

Press b

Mute

Mute your handset microphone

Other party's voice can be heard

During a call, press M N.

C To cancel, press M M.

Hold Hold tone sounds and each other's voice is not heard

During a call, press N P A Select Hold A Press b

C To cancel, press M e.

^ Subscription to Call Waiting or Conference Call (see P.12-5) is required.

Touch Tones

C Use Touch Tones to send alphanumeric messages to pagers or operate a home answerphone remotely.

^ Use 0 - 9, U

and # to send Touch Tones.

2-10

Voice Memo

1 During a call, press N P

2 Select Record and press b

Recording starts.

Play Play Voice Memos

Main Menu H Tools A Answer Phone

Select Play Ans. Phone

Press b

For details, see P.2-9 "Playing Messages".

Other Engaged Call Operations

3 Press b to stop

^ Alternatively, end call to stop. (Recordings remain even after handset power is turned off.)

Phone Book List Open/save Phone Book entries or check My Details

During a call, press N P A entry (or My Details) A Press b

Select Phone Book List A Press b A Select an

C To save entries, press N P

Select Phone Book List

Press b

Press N P

Select Add New Entry A Press b A

Perform from Step 2 on P.4-4

Messaging Create a new message or check received/sent/draft messages

During a call, press N P

Select Messaging

Press b

Select an item

Press b

C To create a message, select Create Message A Press b A

Perform from Step 3 on P.14-6

Dial New

Call another number

Number

During a call, press N P

Select Dial New Number

Press b

Enter a phone number

Press f

Enable/Disable

Select whether to send Touch Tones during a call

DTMF

During a call, press N P

Select Disable DTMF or Enable DTMF

Press b

Tip

To switch sound output between handset and handsfree devices during a call, see P.10-26 "Connecting Handsfree Devices".

2-11

Call History

Open the following records:

All Calls

Dialled Numbers

Received Calls

All dialled/received calls

All dialled calls

All received calls

1 Press f

All Calls opens.

C Press A to open others.

Tip H Press f to open All Calls during a call.

2 Select a record and press b

Record details appear.

Delete Delete records one at a time

Press f

Select a record

Press N P

Select Delete

Press b

Press N i

Delete All Delete all records

Press f

Open All Calls, Dialled Numbers or Received Calls

Press N P

Select Delete All

Press b

Press N i

Tip

To save phone numbers to Phone Book, see P.4-7 "Saving from Dialled Numbers/Received Calls".

Using Call History

Call Place calls

Press f

Select a record

Press N P

Select Call or Video Call

Press b

C To edit numbers before dialling, select a record and press N P A Select Edit Before Call A

Press b A Edit number A Press f (Long Press for Video Calls)

Create Message Create messages

Press f

Select a record

Press N P

Select Create Message

Press b

Perform from Step 5 on P.14-7

2-12

Call Timers/Data Counter

Call Timers

Check estimated time of the most recent call (Last Call Time) and all calls made since Clear Timers was last applied (All Calls Time). Times for Dialled Calls and Received Calls appear separately.

Main Menu

Call Log

Call Timers

1 Select Received Calls or Dialled

Calls and press b

2 Press b to return to Call Timers menu

^ Press g to return to Standby.

Tip H ^ Last Call Time and All Calls Time remain even after handset power is turned off.

^ Ring time for incoming or outgoing calls is not counted. On hold time is counted.

Clear Timers Reset Call Timers

Main Menu H Call Log A Call Timers

Select Clear Timers

Press b

Enter Handset Code

Press b

Press N i

Data Counter

Check estimated volume of the most recent or all packet transmissions (sent, received and total). Charges do not appear.

Main Menu H Call Log A Data Counter

1 Select Last Data or All Data and

press b

2 Press b to return to Data Counter menu

^ Press g to return to Standby.

Clear Counter Reset Data Counter

Main Menu

Call Log

Data Counter

Select Clear Counter

Press b

Press N i

2-13

Call Costs

Check estimated call charge of the most recent call or all calls.

Main Menu

Call Log

Call Costs

Select Last Call or All Calls and

press b

2 Press b to return to Call Costs menu

^ Press g to return to Standby.

Tip H ^ Call Costs remain even after handset power is turned off.

^ Sum of charges appears for Conference Call (Optional Service).

Clear Costs Reset Call Casts

Main Menu H Call Log A Call Costs

Select Clear Costs

Press b

Enter PIN2

Press b

Press N i

Cost Units

Main Menu

Set currency and conversion rate (per yen) to show converted amount in Call Costs

KYEN 1

Call Log

Call Costs

Cost Units

Select Set Units

Press b

Enter PIN2

Press b

Enter currency

Press b

Enter conversion rate

Press b

C To check current cost unit, select Read Units

Press b

Limit Call Costs

Max Cost

Set a limit of total call charges

When the limit is reached, outgoing calls are blocked

Main Menu H Call Log A Call Costs

Select Max Cost

Press b

Select Set Limit

Press b

Enter PIN2

Press b

Enter the amount

Press b

C To check the set limit, select Max Cost A Press b A Select Read Limit A Press b

C To check the remaining amount, select Residual Credit A Press b

Note H

Emergency calls (110, etc.) are possible even when the limit is reached. For more, see P.2-4 "Emergency Calls".

2-14

Outside Japan (International Roaming)

Switching Network Services

GSM

Auto

Use in Japan or in 3G service areas abroad

Use in GSM service areas outside Japan

3G and GSM switch automatically by location (network status)

^ 3G is set by default.

^ Outside Japan, set to Auto whenever possible.

Main Menu

Settings

Network Settings (F)

Select Service

1 Select 3G, GSM or Auto and press b

Selected service is activated.

Note

H ^ For information on international roaming (service areas, charges, available functions,

restrictions, etc.), contact Vodafone Customer Centre, General Information (see P.18-24).

^ A separate contract is required for international roaming.

2-15

Calling from Outside Japan

1 Enter a phone number

^ Include dialling code for landline numbers.

^ When calling landlines or mobile phones within the county, skip ahead to Step 6.

C To call Japan with Quick Operation, enter a phone number and press j A Skip ahead to Step 6

C To enter numbers directly, press 0 for 1+ seconds (W appears)

Enter a country code A Enter a phone number (omit the first 0 )

Skip ahead to Step 6

B Omit the first 0 of the dialling code except when calling Italy (country code: 39) or

Russia (country code: 7).

2 Press N P

3 Select Int'l Call and press b

Country names appear.

C To call Japan, select Call to Japan

Press b A Skip ahead to Step 6

4 Select a country and press b

C To call unlisted countries, select Enter

Code

Press b

A Press b

Enter country code

Calling Vodafone Handsets

^ Always select 日本 (JPN) (or press 81 for direct entry).

5 Select Abroad and press b

^ W and country code are inserted before the phone number. The first 0 is omitted except when calling Italy (39) or Russia (7).

(W indicates international calls.)

6 Press f

Note H In some areas, other parties may not be able to hear you and vice versa after returning to calls

on hold (see P.2-10).

Tip

Adding Country Codes

To save frequently used country codes, see P.10-19 "Country Codes". For more information,

contact Vodafone Customer Centre, General Information (see P.18-24).

2-16

Manner Mode

Minding Mobile Manners

Please use your handset responsibly. Use these basic tips as a guide. Inappropriate handset use can be both dangerous and bothersome. Please take care not to disturb others when using your handset. Adjust handset use according to your surroundings.

^ Turn it off in theatres, museums and other places where silence is the norm.

^ Refrain from using it in restaurants, hotel lobbies, lifts, etc.

^ Observe signs and instructions regarding handset use aboard trains, etc.

^ Refrain from use that interrupts the flow of pedestrian or vehicle traffic.

Manner-Related Features

CManner Mode: see P.2-18

Press Manner Key to automatically mute all Ringtones and activate Vibration mode for incoming calls, mail, etc.

CVibration Mode: see P.10-11

Activate Vibration mode to use handset vibration to alert you to incoming calls, mail, etc. in public places.

CVolume Settings (see P.10-10)

Decrease or mute Ringtone volume for incoming calls, mail, etc. as well as tones for Web or V-applications when carrying handset in public places.

COffline Mode: see P.2-19

Use Offline Mode to temporarily suspend all handset transmissions. In Offline Mode, incoming/outgoing calls and

Vodafone live! transmissions are blocked.

CAnswer Phone: see P.2-8

Use Answer Phone to handle incoming calls when it is inappropriate or unsafe to answer.

2-17

Activating & Cancelling

Activating

1 Press p for 1+ seconds k appears and Manner mode is set.

^ j (Answer Phone), f (Vibration), g

(Silent) and h (Increasing Volume) appear

as set in Manner settings (see P.10-2 "Mode

Settings").

Cancelling

1 Press p for 1+ seconds k disappears and Manner mode is cancelled.

When Manner Mode is Active

C Keypad Tones, Power On/Off and error tones are muted. Beeps for Switch Line (see P.12-5 - 12-6)

are heard.

^ Even in Manner mode, Ringtone can be heard through LCD Remote/Mic with Headphones.

Volume is fixed to Level 1.

C Shutter click and Self-timer tone sound even in Manner mode.

C A confirmation for sound output appears when starting Media Player (see P.7-2).

C Settings for Manner mode (see P.10-2 "Mode Settings") are applied to Answer Phone, Ringtones,

Vibration, Mobile Light, etc.

Tip

H ^ When Answer Phone is recording messages, the other party's voice is heard through

Earpiece.

^ To change Manner settings, see P.10-2 "Mode Settings".

2-18

Activating/Cancelling Offline Mode

Use Offline Mode to temporarily suspend all handset transmissions.

^ In Offline Mode, incoming/outgoing calls and Vodafone live! transmissions are blocked.

^ Offline Mode is Off by default.

Activating Cancelling

Main Menu

Settings

Network Settings (F)

Offline Mode

1 Choose On and press b

U appears and Offline Mode is set.

Main Menu

Settings

Network Settings (F)

Offline Mode

1 Choose Off and press b

U disappears and Offline Mode is cancelled.

Tip

^ When Offline Mode is set while a Network V-application (see P.16-2) is paused, confirmation

appears. Press N i to enter Offline Mode. (Network connection is disabled until Offline

Mode is cancelled.)

^ Emergency calls (110, etc.) are not possible in Offline Mode. For more, see P.2-4.

2-19

LCD Remote/Mic with Headphones

Initiating Calls

Use Call Button (b) on LCD Remote/Mic with

Headphones to call the number saved in Speed Dial b

(see P.4-13).

1 Plug LCD Remote/Mic with Headphones into handset

LCD

Remote/Mic with Headphones

Headphone

Connector

Note

H ^ Do not wrap cord around handset or Internal Antenna

Location. Electronic noise from cord may cause malfunction or interference.

^ Plug in firmly. If not, sounds may not be heard.

^ Cancel Function Lock, Phone Book Lock (see P.10-17)

and Keypad Lock (see P.1-20) to place calls.

^ If Speed Dial x is a Secret Mode entry, activate Secret

Mode (see P.10-18) to call the number.

Microphone f

Plug

Answering Calls

1 Plug LCD Remote/Mic with Headphones into handset

Ringtone sounds from Headphones and handset speaker.

2 Press Call Button for 1+ seconds to answer a call

3 Press Call Button for 1+ seconds until a beep sounds

Call ends.

^ Alternatively, press g to end call.

Call Button

2 Press Call Button for 1+ seconds until a double beep sounds

^ 804SH dials the number.

3 Press Call Button for 1+ seconds until a beep sounds

Call ends.

^ Alternatively, press g to end call.

2-20

Entering Characters

3-1

3-2

Character Selection

Use Kana and Pager (see P.3-8) to enter alphanumerics,

Symbols, hiragana, kanji, katakana and Pictographs.

Unless otherwise noted, text entry operations are described for use in text entry windows using Kana Mode.

Entry Modes

Press j to toggle between character entry modes as follows:

I%J%B%A%D%E%G%I

Current Entry Mode

Available Modes

Kanji (hiragana)

Double-byte katakana

Single-byte katakana

Double-byte alphanumerics

(upper/lower case)

Double-byte alphanumerics

(lower case)

Single-byte alphanumerics

(upper/lower case)

Single-byte alphanumerics

(lower case)

Single-byte number

Character Code

^ Alternatively, use F to toggle between entry modes after pressing j once.

^ F and H appear in upper/lower case mode (see right).

Upper & Lower Case

C In double or single-byte alphanumerics mode, press k to toggle between upper/lower case and lower case modes. In

Pager Mode (see P.3-8), while selecting double or

single-byte entry mode, press k to toggle between upper and lower case modes.

Double-byte Alphanumerics

(Upper/Lower Case)

Double-byte Alphanumerics

(Lower Case)

Tip H ^ Handset Character Codes correspond to 6,355 kanji.

^ Some characters are not available for mail addresses, etc.

Key Assignments

Multiple characters are assigned to each key. Press a key to toggle between character options for that key.

Example: In katakana entry, press 1 three times for ウ .

When entering characters, press f to toggle options in reverse. (Not available for single-byte numbers or Character Codes.)

Example: Enter い , then press f to return to あ .

Key

0 q p

Kanji (Hiragana)

[Double-byte]

Katakana

[Double & Single-byte]

Alphanumerics

[Double & Single-byte]

あいうえおぁぃぅぇぉアイウエオァィゥェォ＠．／＿―1) (space)

かきくけこ

さしすせそ

カキクケコ

サシスセソ

ＡＢＣａｂｃ2

ＤＥＦｄｅｆ3

たちつてとっ

なにぬねの

はひふへほ

まみむめも

やゆよゃゅょ

らりるれろ

わをんー、。

X (Line Break)

タチツテトッ

ナニヌネノ

ハヒフヘホ

マミムメモ

ヤユヨャュョ

ラリルレロ

ワヲンー、。

X (Line Break)

ＧＨＩｇｈｉ4

ＪＫＬｊｋｌ5

ＭＮＯｍｎｏ6

ＰＱＲＳｐｑｒｓ7

ＴＵＶｔｕｖ8

ＷＸＹＺｗｘｙｚ9

，．0 X (Line Break)

゛゜

Log List, Pictograph List,

Double-Byte Symbol List

゛゜-

Single-byte Mail/Web

Extensions

Log List, Double-byte Symbol

List, Pictograph List

Numbers

[Single-byte]

0 +

UM (Pause) ? 4

, Log List,

Single-byte Symbol List,

Pictograph List

Cursor Up C Conversion (Up)

Press 0 for 1+ seconds to enter + (available for phone number entry).

- is available only in single-byte katakana entry.

Extensions are listed for easy entry.

4 M (Pause), ? and - are for phone number entry.

Single-byte in single-byte katakana/alphanumeric entry.

# is for phone number entry.

Cursor moves up except during conversion.

Character Codes

──

3-3

CKey Assignments (Continued)

Key

A j k

Kanji (Hiragana)

[Double-byte]

Conversion (Down)

Katakana

[Double & Single-byte]

Toggle Case (for some characters)

Alphanumerics

[Double & Single-byte]

Numbers

[Single-byte]

Cursor Down X (Line Break)

Cursor Left

Cursor Right

Change Entry Mode

Toggle Case + Toggle

Mode (upper/lower and lower case)

──

Character Codes

── i

Press i

Long Press f b

Delete One Character,

Cancel Conversion

Delete One Character

Delete before or after cursor

Recover up to 64 deleted characters

──

Delete Code/One

Character

Phonetic Conversion

Hiragana to Katakana/

Alphanumerics

Conversion

──

Cursor moves down except during conversion.

Press f once for each character to recover immediately after deleting. (Not available after deleting text with i (Long Press).)

3-4

Entering Characters

Kanji, Hiragana & Katakana

Following the example below, enter 鈴木 to learn how to enter characters in kanji (hiragana) entry mode.

1 Press 3 three times

Word suggestions change as hiragana are entered.

2 Press A

^ When the next character is on the same key, press A first.

4 Press 2 twice

^ To enter unconverted hiragana, skip ahead to Step 6.

5 Press D (convert) and use E to select a word

^ The most recent selection appears first in the list.

C To see other suggestions, press N W or M J.

C To exit the list, press i.

To change segment, see P.3-6

"Segmenting Phrases".

6 Press b

3 Press 3 three times and

press q

Katakana Entry

C Switch to double or single katakana mode to enter katakana.

Alternatively, enter hiragana and then select katakana from the word suggestion list.

C To convert hiragana to katakana/alphanumerics only, see

P.3-10 "Hiragana to Katakana/Alphanumerics Conversion".

3-5

3-6

Predictive & Previous Usage

C Use these functions to convert hiragana to kanji more quickly.

Predictive

Word suggestions change as up to 5 hiragana are entered

Previous Usage

Suggests words/characters likely to follow entry based on previous entries

^ Both functions are active by default (see P.3-12 "Optional

Predictive Functions").

^ To lower priority of particular types of words (names of

people, places, etc.) in the word suggestion list, see P.3-12

"Set Low Priority".

User Dictionary

C Save frequently used words/phrases to select from the word

suggestion list (see P.10-15).

CSegmenting Phrases

If the word is not listed, press i after Step 5 on P.3-5 to

exit. Use F to segment hiragana to convert separately.

Example: Segment みち into み and ち .

みちみち三ち

CSelecting Multiple Converted Words

Press j

Example: To enter 西山大輔

D j

にしやまだいすけ

DEb

西山大輔

DEb

三智

西山大輔

Small Kana ( っ , ッ , etc.)

Enter small hiragana あ , い , う , え , お , つ , や , ゆ and よ as well as small katakana.

1 Enter a character and press k つ k

っ

Adding ゛or ゜

1 Enter a character and press q

^ In kanji (hiragana)/double-byte katakana entry, press the key once to add ゛ to か (Ka) row, さ (Sa) row and

た (Ta) row characters, and press twice to remove. For は (Ha) row characters, press once to add ゛ , twice to add ゜ and three times to remove.

は

ば

ぱ

は

Tip

In Single-byte Katakana Entry

^ Press q once to add single-byte ﾞor twice for ﾟ.

^ Press i to remove ﾞor ﾟ.

q q q

Space

1 Press A

^ Alternatively, in alphanumeric entry, press 1 seven times for space.

Ueda

Line Break

Insert line breaks in text, Text Templates, etc.

1 Press D at the end of text

^ To insert line breaks in text, press 0 until

X appears. In kanji (hiragana) entry mode, then press b. Keystroke count varies by

character entry mode (see P.3-3).

Contact me at

Entering Alphanumerics

Enter alphanumerics in double or single-byte alphanumerics mode. Alternatively, enter numbers in single-byte number mode.

3 a a d

^ When the next character is on the same key (example: entering a then b), press A first to move cursor.

^ In double or single-byte alphanumerics mode, press k to toggle between upper/lower and lower case modes.

^ To convert hiragana to katakana/alphanumerics only, see

P.3-10 "Hiragana to Katakana/Alphanumerics Conversion".

Symbols, Pictographs & Emoticons

Symbols & Pictographs

1 Press p to open Log List (Log List is available

in some entry modes; see P.3-3)

Recently used Symbols/Pictographs appear.

^ Alternatively, in kanji (hiragana) mode, press q to open Log List.

^ ― appears by default or when Log List is deleted (see right).

2 Use G to select one and press b

^ Repeat Step 2 to enter more.

C To see more lists, press N or p. The list toggles as follows: Log List %

Symbol List(s) % Pictograph Lists.

B Press q to toggle the list in reverse order.

B Press D to scroll down.

3 Press M X to exit list

Tip

H ^ Symbols are double or single-byte according to the character type. (Pictographs are all double-byte.)

^ Single-byte Symbols do not appear in Log List.

^ Alternatively, enter きごう and press D (convert).

Some Symbols can be selected.

^ For available Pictographs, see P.18-15.

^ Enter a descriptive word such as ハート or はな and press D (convert). Corresponding Pictographs can be selected.

Deleting Log List

C In a text entry window, press N P A

Select Input/

Conversion A Press b A Select Clear Symbols A

Press b

Press N i

B Press M W twice to return to the text entry window.

3-7

3-8

Emoticons

1 Press N P

2 Select Emoticons and press b

^ Enter two digits (01 - 50) to jump to the emoticon assigned to the number.

3 Select an emoticon and press b

Tip H ^ For other emoticons, enter かお and press D (convert).

Alternatively, enter a descriptive word such as わーい or

うーん and press D (convert). Corresponding emoticons can be selected.

^ Immediately after inserting a descriptive word such as

嬉しい or 悲しい , corresponding emoticons may appear in the word suggestion list. To disable this

function, see P.3-12 "Optional Predictive Functions"

(Pre-used Emoticon).

Mail & Web Extensions

1 In alphanumeric entry, press q

2 Select an extension and press b

^ Mail addresses and URLs are single-byte.

Character Code

1 In Character Code entry mode, enter four digits

(see P.18-9)

Pager Code

1 Press N P

2 Select Input/Conversion and press b

3 Select Input Method and press b

4 Select Pager Code and press b

Pager Code _ _ appears at the bottom.

C To switch to Kana Mode, select Kana A Press b

Enter two digits (see P.3-9)

^ Pager Mode is active until switched to Kana Mode.

Character Entry Modes

C For text entry in Pager Mode, press j to toggle between entry modes as follows:

Single-byte lower case (N) % Character Code (B)

% Double-byte lower case (L)

C While selecting an entry mode, press k to toggle between upper and lower case modes.

Tip

H ^ Hiragana to Katakana/Alphanumerics Conversion is disabled in Pager Mode.

^ To enter ﾞ or ﾟ, see Pager Code List on P.3-9.

CPager Code List

^ Blanks indicate no entry.

^ Grey background indicates upper and lower case available. Press k to switch immediately after character entry.

Double-byte upper case Single-byte upper case

1 2

Second digit (Press next)

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

1 あいうえおＡＢＣＤＥ

2 かきくけこＦＧＨＩＪ

3 さしすせそＫＬＭＮＯ

4 たちつてとＰＱＲＳＴ

5 なにぬねのＵＶＷＸＹ

6 はひふへほＺ？！ ― ／

7 まみむめも V ＆ Z *1

8 や（ゆ）よ U ＃ Space Y *2

9 らりるれろ１２３４５

0 わをん゛゜６７８９０

Double-byte lower case

1 2

Second digit (Press next)

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

1 ぁぃぅぇぉａｂｃｄｅ

っｆｇｈｉｊｋｌｍｎｏｐｑｒｓｔｕｖｗｘｙｚ

8 ゃゅ

、

ょ

。

Press 70 to insert line breaks (in mail message text, Text Templates, etc.).

Press 80 to toggle between upper and lower case.

^ Y and Z are double-byte.

ﾁ

ﾆ

ｷ

ｼ

ｲ

(

ﾘ

ﾋ

ﾐ

ｦ

ﾀ

ﾅ

ｶ

ｻ

ｱ

ﾔ

ﾗ

ﾊ

ﾏ

ﾜ

Single-byte lower case

ﾕ

ﾙ

Second digit (Press next)

ｳ

ｸ

ｽ

ﾌ

ﾑ

ﾂ

ﾇ

ｴ

ｹ

ｾ

ﾃ

ﾈ

ﾍ

ﾒ

ｵ

ｺ

ｿ

ﾄ

ﾉ

ﾎ

ﾓ

B C

G H

L M

R S

W X

I J

N O

Z *1

ﾝ

)

ﾚ

゛

ﾖ

ﾛ

゜

Space

ｧ

ｬ

ｨ

Second digit (Press next)

3 4 5 6 7 8

ｩｪｫ a f k b g l c h m

ｯ p u z q v r w

ｭ

ｮ

s x i n

9 d t y o j

0 e

3-9

Conversion Methods (Japanese Only)

Phonetic Conversion

Enter alternate readings to search for kanji.

1 Enter reading in hiragana

2 Press N _

3 Select a kanji and press b

One-Hiragana Conversion

Enter the first hiragana to access previously selected words.

Example: To enter 鈴木

DE b

す鈴木鈴木

^ One-Hiragana Conversion and User Dictionary (see P.10-15)

share memory. Selected words may not be saved if User

Dictionary is full.

^ Up to 20 word selections are saved per hiragana. When memory is full, the oldest entry is deleted to make room for a new entry. However, User Dictionary remains unchanged.

Hiragana to Katakana/Alphanumerics Conversion

Enter katakana and alphanumerics in kanji (hiragana) entry mode.

1 Enter hiragana and press M S

^ To enter AM, press 26 then M S.

2 Use E to select a word and press b

^ Hiragana to Roman Letter Conversion (hiragana with ﾞ or ﾟ is converted to the same characters/Symbols):

な

は

ま

や

ら

あ

か

さ

た

わ

＠

Ａ

Ｄ

Ｇ

Ｊ

Ｍ

Ｐ

Ｔ

Ｗ

，

い

き

し

ち

に

ひ

み

ゆ

り

を

．う

Ｂ

Ｅ

Ｈ

Ｋ

Ｎ

Ｑ

Ｕ

Ｘ

．

く

す

つ

ぬ

ふ

む

よ

る

ん

／

Ｃ

Ｆ

Ｉ

Ｌ

Ｏ

Ｒ

Ｖ

Ｙ

Space

え＿お Space

け Space こ Space

せ Space そ Space

て Space と Space

ね Space の Space

へ Space ほ Space

め

―

Ｓ

―

も

―

Space

―

れＺろ Space

ー (Long Sound)

、。 Line Break

Space

^ Hiragana to Number Conversion (hiragana with ﾞ or ﾟ is converted to the same numbers):

B あ (A) row...1

B た (Ta) row...4

B か (Ka) row...2

B な (Na) row...5

B ま (Ma) row...7

B や (Ya) row...8

B わをんー (Long Sound)、。Line Break...0

B さ (Sa) row...3

B は (Ha) row...6

B ら (Ra) row...9

3-10

Quick Conversion (for Hiragana)

Quick Conversion helps reduce keystrokes needed to enter frequently used words.

A list of word suggestions appears based on the key pressed.

Example: To enter 微妙

Normal Conversion

Quick Conversion

66q ( び ) 77 ( み )

888888 ( ょ )

111 ( う ) D (convert)

6q ( ば ) 7 ( ま ) 8 ( や ) 1 ( あ )

C (convert)

1 Enter hiragana and press C

Cursor turns green.

^ While cursor is green, use F to segment entered hiragana and then convert one segment at a time.

C To cancel Quick Conversion, press i

Press D for normal conversion

2 Use E to select a word and press b

Note H Use Quick Conversion in kanji (hiragana) mode only.

Tip

The most recent selection (mostly nouns) appears first.

One Hiragana Predictive Entry

Enter hiragana and initiate Quick Conversion. Words starting with a hiragana in the same row ( あ , い , う , え , お for あ ) appear. Word suggestions vary by time of day.

Example: When あ is entered

5:00 - 10:59

朝一番

朝帰り

行ってきます

いってらっしゃい

11:00 - 16:59 17:00 - 22:59

あちぃ∼

後でね

いただきま∼す♪

移動中

遊ぼう

明日

急いで行くよ

今どこ？

23:00 - 4:59

アウチ！！

ありがとう

いえーい！！！

行こうね

^ Words in the list are preset by time blocks.

^ If Clock is unset, only words for 11:00 - 16:59 are available.

One Hiragana Word Call

Enter the first hiragana of entries you used Quick

Conversion for. The most recent selection appears first.

Example: You entered あたあさわ and selected お父さん last time.

あお父さん

3-11

3-12

Conversion Settings

Optional Predictive

Functions

Activate or cancel Predictive, Previous Usage or Pre-used Emoticon

KOn

Press N P

Select Input/Conversion

Press b

Select Predictive, Previous Usage or Pre-usedEmoticon

Press b

Choose On (activate) or Off

Press b

Set Select types of words to lower their priorities in

Low Priority the word suggestion list

Press N P

Select Input/Conversion

Press b

Select Set Low Priority

Press b

Select an item

Press b

Press N K

Clear log of words selected in kanji conversion,

Reset Learning

Predictive, etc.

Press N P

Select Input/Conversion

Press b

Select Reset Learning

Press b

Press N i

^ Words saved in User Dictionary remain.

Editing Characters

Deleting & Replacing

1 Use G to select a character and

press i

Mik a ko

^ The highlighted character is deleted.

Mik k o

^ Place cursor at the end of text and press i for 1+ seconds to delete all text.

When cursor is located amidst a block of Miki text, characters on and after cursor are deleted.

k o

2 Enter another character i

Copy/Cut & Paste

When Options appears, copy or cut and paste text into the same window or another.

1 Press N P

2 Select Copy or Cut and press b

3 Use G to select the first

character of text and press b

Start point is set.

C To change the start point, press i.

4 Select the end of text and

press b

5 Open text paste target window

6 Press N P

7 Select Paste and press b

Cut

Deleting Text On and After Cursor

1 Select the first character of text

2 Press N P

3 Select Delete Posterior and press b

Additional Functions

Copying from Phone Book

Insert Phone Book entry items into text entry windows.

Select from phone numbers, mail addresses, postal addresses, Note, etc.

1 Press N P

^ Move cursor to target location beforehand.

2 Select Advanced and press b

3 Select Phone Book and press b

4 Open a Phone Book entry or

My Details

5 Use E to select an item and

press b

Item is inserted following a comma and the entry name.

Using Text Templates

Insert text saved in Text Templates (see P.9-14) into text

entry windows.

1 Press N P

2 Select Text Templates and press b

3 Select Call Templates and press b

4 Select text and press b

Text is inserted.

Saving to Text Templates

C Follow these steps to save text in text entry windows to Text

Templates.

Press N P

Select Text Templates

Press b

A Select Save Templates A Press b A Select the first character of text

Press b

Select the end of text

Press b

^ Save up to 256 characters.

3-13

Phone Book

4-1

Overview

Save frequently used phone numbers and mail addresses to Phone Book.

^ Entry names appear for calls from numbers saved in Phone Book.

^ Set Ringtone/Ringvideo by caller/sender, sort entries into Categories, etc. See P.4-3 for more about Phone Book entry items.

CDialling from Phone Book CWhen a Call Arrives f

A call arrives

4-2

CSending SMS/MMS messages from Phone Book b

Service Dial

C Dial service dial numbers saved on USIM Card to use services.

Press b

Select Phone Book

Press b

Select Service Dial No.

Press b

Select service

Press b

^ For details, contact the service providers.

Note

Back-up Important Information

Keep separate copies of important information. When battery is exhausted/removed for long periods, Phone

Book entries may be lost; handset damage may also affect information recovery. Vodafone is not liable for damages from lost or altered data.

Tip H

^ Use Phone Book Lock (see P.10-17) to protect entries

from accidental alteration and to restrict access to

Phone Book information.

^ Exchange Phone Book entries via Bluetooth (see P.10-20)

or infrared (see P.10-28) with compatible devices.

Saving to Phone Book

Phone Book Entry Items

Save up to 750 entries in 804SH Phone Book; USIM Card Phone Book entry limit varies according to card specifications.

Last Name:

First Name:

Reading:

Add Phone Number:

Add Email Address:

Category:

Address:

Item

Homepage:

Note:

Birthday:

Picture:

Tone/Video for Voice Call:

Tone/Video for Video Call:

Tone/Video for New Message:

Secret:

Enter birth date

Description

Enter up to 32 characters

(Select Name: when saving to USIM Card)

Save URLs. Enter up to 1,024 characters.

Add personal details. Enter up to 256 characters.

Set an image to appear for incoming calls/mail

Set Ringtone or Ringvideo by caller/sender

Restrict access to Phone Book entries by saving them as Secret Mode entries

Storage Media

Handset USIM Card

Available Available

Enter up to 64 characters Available Available

Enter up to three numbers on handset and two numbers to USIM Card (32 digits each) Available Available

Enter up to three addresses on handset and one address on USIM Card (128 single-byte alphanumerics each)

Sort entries into 16 Categories (handset) and 11 Categories (USIM Card). Category names can be changed. Set Ringtone by Category (handset only).

Enter postal (zip) code (20 characters), country name (32 characters), state/province

(64 characters), city name (64 characters) and street name/number (64 characters)

Available

N/A

Available

N/A

Note

Depending on the USIM Card in use, some items may not be supported, and character entry limits or number of Categories may be lower.

Also, the number of phone numbers or mail addresses per entry may be lower.

4-3

4-4

New Phone Book Entries

Enter a name, reading, phone number and mail address.

For other items, see P.4-5 - 4-7.

Storage media is set to handset by default.

Main Menu

Phone Book

1 Select Add New Entry and

press b

Phone Book Details appears.

C If storage media confirmation appears, select To Handset or To

USIM A Press b

2 Select Last Name: and press b

3 Enter last name and press b

4 Select First Name: and press b

5 Enter first name and press b

Phone Book

Details

Characters entered for names (reading for kanji) appear.

^ To correct reading, see P.4-7.

6 Select Add Phone Number: and press b

7 Enter a phone number and press b

^ Include dialling code for landline numbers.

8 Select an icon and press b

^ To save additional phone numbers, repeat Steps 6 - 8.

9 Select Add Email Address: and press b

10 Enter a mail address and press b

11 Select an icon and press b

^ To save additional mail addresses, repeat Steps 9 - 11.

12 Press M q

Note

To save an entry, enter at least one of the following: a) last name; b) first name; c) phone number; or d) mail address.

Incoming Calls while Creating Entry

C Contents are temporarily saved. End the call to return.

Storage Media

C Follow these steps to set default storage media for new entries.

Press b

Select Phone Book

Press b

Select Settings A Press b A Select Save New

Entry A Press b A Select Handset, USIM Memory or Ask Each Time

Press b

^ Handset is set by default.

^ For Ask Each Time, select storage media for each new entry.

Confirmation for Unsaved Numbers

C Follow these steps to show/hide confirmation for saving to

Phone Book after calls with unsaved numbers.

Press b

Select Phone Book

Press b

Select Settings

Press b

Select

SaveUnregistered A Press b A Select Incoming

Call or Outgoing Call

Press b

Choose On or

Off

Press b

^ Both are On by default.

Personal Ringtone/Ringvideo

Select Ringtones or Ringvideos for incoming calls/mail from numbers/addresses saved in Phone Book.

^ Select from preset patterns or use the following melody or video files in Data Folder.

B Files in Sounds & Ringtones folder (file name: 55 characters or less including extension)

B Files in Videos folder (file name: 55 characters or less including extension)

^ Save files to Data Folder (Videos) before assigning video.

^ Files on Memory Card are not supported.

^ Follow these steps after opening Phone Book Details (see

P.4-4). When finished, Phone Book Details returns. Complete

other fields.

1 Select Tone/Video for Voice Call:, Tone/Video for Video

Call: or Tone/Video for New Message: and press b

C To set Ringtone/Ringvideo duration for incoming mail, select Tone/

Video for New Message:

Press b

Select Duration

Press b A Enter time A Press b (Omit the next steps.)

2 Ringtone

1 Select Assign Tone and press b

C To cancel assigned tone, select Remove Tone/Video

A Press b A Press N i

2 Select Preset Sounds or My Sounds and

press b

Ringvideo

1 Select Assign Video and press b

C To cancel assigned video, select Remove Tone/Video

A Press b A Press N i

3 Select a file and press b

C For Preset Sounds, select a file A Press N U

Note H ^ When source file in Data Folder is deleted, renamed or moved to Memory Card, tone/video set in Sounds &

Alerts (see P.10-11 "Ringtone/Ringvideos") applies.

(This also applies if source file is copyrighted and the licence expires.)

^ To apply settings to Secret Mode entries, first activate

Secret Mode.

4-5

4-6

Personal Picture

Save an image to each Phone Book entry; saved image appears for calls/mail from phone numbers/mail addresses saved in that entry.

^ Select from image files smaller than 40 KB.

^ Files on Memory Card are not supported.

^ Follow these steps after opening Phone Book Details (see P.4-4).

When finished, Phone Book Details returns. Complete other fields.

1 Select Picture: and press b

C To cancel saved image, select Remove Picture

Press b

A Press N i

2 Selecting from Data Folder

1 Select Assign Picture and press b

2 Select an image and press b

Capturing New Image

1 Select Take Picture and press b

2 Frame image on Display and press b

Captured image appears.

3 Press b

Note H ^ Setting is cancelled when source file in Data Folder is deleted, renamed or moved to Memory Card.

^ To apply the setting to Secret Mode entries, first activate Secret Mode.

Saving Secret Mode Entries

Restrict access to Phone Book entries by saving them as

Secret Mode entries.

Follow these steps after opening Phone Book Details (see

P.4-4). When finished, Phone Book Details returns.

Complete other fields.

1 Select Secret: and press b

2 Choose On and press b

Note H

^ Activate Secret Mode (see P.10-18) to open Secret

Mode entries.

^ To cancel Secret, activate Secret Mode (see P.10-18) and

choose Off in Step 2. To edit Phone Book entries, see

P.4-9 "Editing Phone Book".

Other Phone Book Entry Items

^ For descriptions of each item, see P.4-3.

^ Follow these steps after opening Phone Book Details (see

P.4-4). When finished, Phone Book Details returns. Complete

other fields.

Reading

Category

Address

Homepage

Note

Birthday

Select Reading: A Press b A Enter reading

Press b

Select Category:

Press b

Select a

Category A Press b

Select Address: A Press b A Select Postal

Code:

Press b

Enter postal (zip) code

Press b A Select Country: A Press b A

Enter country name

Press b

Select State/

Province: A Press b A Enter name A

Press b

Select City:

Press b

Enter name A Press b A Select Street & Number:

Press b

Enter street name/number

Press b A Press M K

Select Homepage: A Press b A Enter URL A

Press b

Select Note:

Press b

Enter text

Press b

Select Birthday: A Press b A Enter date A

Press b

Saving from Dialled Numbers/Received Calls

1 Use F to open Dialled Numbers or Received

Calls

2 Use E to select a record and press N P

3 Select Save Number and press b

4 New Entry

1 Select As New Contact and press b

Phone number is entered automatically and Phone Book

Details (see P.4-4) appears. Complete other fields.

Add to Existing Entry

1 Select a Phone Book entry and press b

Phone number is entered automatically and Phone Book

Details (see P.4-4) appears. Complete other fields.

Note

Unset ID records cannot be saved. New numbers cannot be saved to 804SH Phone Book entries with three phone numbers or USIM Card entries with two phone numbers.

Phone Book Memory Status

Main Menu

Phone Book

Manage Ph.Book

1 Select Memory Status and press b

Numbers of entries on handset and USIM Card appear.

C Press g to exit.

4-7

4-8

Using Phone Book

Dialling from Phone Book

Search Phone Book by katakana row (default search method) to call numbers within entries.

^ To dial numbers saved in Secret Mode entries, first activate

Secret Mode (see P.10-18).

^ To search by other methods, see right.

1 Press D

2 Use F to specify katakana row

^ Alternatively, enter Reading to search

Phone Book.

3 Use E to select an entry and

press b

Phone Book entry opens.

C For entries with multiple numbers, use

E to select one.

4 Press f

804SH dials the number.

Switching Between 804SH & USIM Card

C Press D A

Press N P

Select Settings

Press b A Select Ph.Book Location A Press b A

Select Handset, USIM Memory or Both

Press b

^ Handset is set by default.

^ For Both, entries in both storage media appear.

Phone Book Search Methods

By Reading Order Shows entries that start with specified Reading

By Category Opens entries in the specified Category

By Katakana

Shows entries with Readings that start with katakana in the specified row

By Katakana is set by default.

Main Menu H Phone Book A Settings A View Phone Book

1 Select By Reading Order, By Category or By

Katakana and press b

^ Dialling Methods:

By Reading

Order

By Category

By Katakana

Enter Reading A Select an entry A

Press b

Press f

Select a Category

Press b

Select an entry A Press b A Press f

Use F to specify a row A Select an entry

Press b

Press f

For entries with multiple numbers, select one and press f.

Tip

In Standby, press D and follow the steps above.

Window Description

1 Name

2 Image Set for Picture

3 Phone Number

4 Mail Address

5 Category Name

6 Address

7 Homepage

8 Note

9 Birthday

A Name of Image Set for Picture

B Tone/Video Set for Incoming

Calls/Mail

C Secret Mode Status

Tip H To see details or use saved information, select an item and press b. To add information, select an item in angle brackets (<Add New

Entry>, etc.) and press b.

Editing Phone Book

To edit Secret Mode entries, first activate Secret Mode

(see P.10-18).

Correction/Change

1 Press D, then select an entry

2 Press N P

3 Select Edit and press b

4 Select an item and press b

Edit contents.

^ See procedure for saving items to Phone Book (see P.4-4).

^ Edit Reading after editing names.

5 Press b when finished

^ To edit other items, repeat Steps 4 - 5.

C To cancel, press g

Press N i

6 Press M q

The entry is overwritten.

4-9

Copying Phone Book Entries

Exchange entries between handset and USIM Card.

USIM Card does not support some Phone Book entry items

(see P.4-3). Those items are deleted when Phone Book

entries are copied from handset.

One Entry

1 Press D, then select an entry

2 Press N P

3 Select Manage Ph.Book and press b

4 Handset to USIM Card

1 Select Copy to USIM and press b

2 Press N i

USIM Card to Handset

1 Select Copy to Handset and press b

All Entries

If handset or USIM Card memory is low, entries cannot be copied all at once.

Main Menu

Phone Book

Manage Ph.Book

Copy All

Entries

1 Select USIM to Phone or Phone to USIM and

press b

2 Press N i

Deleting Phone Book Entries

One by One

1 Press D, then select an entry

2 Press N P

3 Select Delete and press b

4 Press N i

Tip H The source files remain in Data Folder, even when deleting entries containing melodies, video or images set for incoming calls/mail or Picture.

All at Once

Main Menu

Phone Book

Manage Ph.Book

Del. All

Entries

1 Select Phone Entries, USIM Entries or Both

Entries and press b

2 Press N i

3 Enter Handset Code

4 Press b

4-10

Category Settings

Customise Category options; create new Category names.

Changing Category Name

Main Menu

Phone Book

Manage Category

1 Use F to select handset or USIM

2 Select a Category and press N P

^ No Category (on handset) cannot be renamed.

3 Select Edit Name and press b

C To change icons, select Change Icon

Press b

Select an icon A Press b (Omit the next steps.)

4 Enter a name

^ Enter up to 16 characters (handset) or 12 characters (USIM

Card).

5 Press b

^ Repeat Steps 1 - 5 for other Categories.

Category Ringtone/Ringvideo

Set Ringtone or Ringvideo for incoming calls/mail by Category.

^ Category Ringtone/Ringvideo setting is not available for

Categories on USIM Card.

^ Save files to Data Folder (Videos) before assigning video.

^ Files on Memory Card are not supported.

Main Menu

Phone Book

Manage Category

1 Use F to select handset

2 Select a Category and press N P

3 Select Assign Ringtone and press b

4 Select For Voice Call:, For Video Call: or For New

Message: and press b

5 Ringtone

1 Select Assign Tone and press b

2 Select Preset Sounds or My Sounds and

press b

Ringvideo

1 Select Assign Video and press b

C To cancel assigned tone/video, select Remove Tone/

Video

Press b

Press N i

6 Select a file and press b

C For Preset Sounds, select a file A Press N U

C To set Ringtone/Ringvideo duration for incoming mail, press b after Step 6 A Select Duration A Press b A

Enter time

Press b

Note

Personal Ringtone/Ringvideo settings (see P.4-5) take

priority.

4-11

Contact Groups

Create Contact Groups to send MMS messages to multiple recipients at one time (see "Contact Groups" in Step 4 on

P.14-7).

Creating Contact Groups

Create up to five Contact Groups.

Main Menu

H Phone Book A Contact Groups A Add New

Group

1 Enter a Group name and press b

Saving Group Members

Save up to 20 members per Group.

Main Menu

Phone Book

Contact Groups

1 Select a Group and press b

2 Select Assign New Entry and press b

3 Select an entry and press b

C For entries with multiple numbers/addresses, use E to select a Vodafone handset number or mail address

Press b

^ To add other numbers/mail addresses, repeat Steps 2 - 3.

Note H Saved handset numbers/mail addresses are deleted from

Contact Groups when changed or deleted in Phone Book.

Editing Contact Groups

Renaming Groups

Main Menu

Phone Book

Contact Groups

1 Select a Group and press N P

2 Select Edit Name and press b

3 Enter a name and press b

^ Enter up to 16 characters.

4 Press N i

Deleting Groups

Main Menu

Phone Book

Contact Groups

1 Select a Group and press N P

2 Select Delete and press b

3 Press N i

4 Enter Handset Code and press b

4-12

Editing Group Members

Deleting Members

Main Menu

Phone Book

Contact Groups

Select a Group

1 Select a member and press N P

2 Select Remove Entry and press b

3 Press N i

Tip

Source Phone Book entries remain even after deleting members.

Changing Members

Main Menu

Phone Book

Contact Groups

Select a Group

1 Select a member and press N P

2 Select Re-assign Entry and press b

3 Select an entry and press b

C For entries with multiple numbers/addresses, use E to select a Vodafone handset number or mail address

Press b

4 Press N i

Speed Dial List

Saving Phone Numbers

Save phone numbers to Speed Dial List for easy dialling.

Voice Mail Centre number is preset in Speed Dial w and cannot be changed.

Main Menu

Phone Book

Speed Dial List

1 Select from x to m and press b

2 Select a Phone Book entry and press b

C For entries with multiple numbers, use E to select one

Press b

C To overwrite existing number, press N i after Step 2.

Saving from Phone Book

C Open a Phone Book entry and select a phone number A

Press N P A Select Add Speed Dial A Press b A

Select from x to m

Press b

B To overwrite existing number, press N i after the above steps.

Note

Saved phone numbers are deleted from Speed Dial List when edited in Phone Book or when source Phone Book entries are deleted.

Tip H Use LCD Remote/Mic with Headphones to call the

number saved in Speed Dial x (see P.2-20).

4-13

Speed Dial

To dial numbers saved in Secret Mode entries, first activate

Secret Mode (see P.10-18).

1 Press a key (2 - 9) for 1+ seconds

804SH dials the number. (Name appears if saved.)

^ Alternatively, select a name from Speed Dial List and press f.

Delete Delete entries one at a time

Main Menu

Phone Book

Speed Dial List

Select an entry

Press N P

Select Delete

Press b

Press N i

Tip

Source Phone Book entries remain even after deleting

Speed Dial entries.

Clear All Return Speed Dial List to default setting

Main Menu

Phone Book

Speed Dial List

Press D A Press N P A Select Clear All A

Press b

Press N i

My Details

Opening My Details

Confirm handset number (phone number on USIM Card).

Save name, reading, phone number, mail address, personal data, etc.

1 Press b

2 Select My Details and press b

^ My Details are similar to Phone Book entries (see P.4-9).

3 Press g to exit

Tip H

Exchange My Details via Bluetooth (see P.10-20) or infrared

(see P.10-28) with compatible devices.

Edit/

Add Details

Edit/add My Details

Main Menu

My Details

Press N P

Select Edit/Add Details

Press b

Select an item

Press b

^ For more, see P.4-4.

Note

Phone number in Tel 1: cannot be changed.

Delete Clear My Details

Main Menu H My Details

Press N P

Select Delete

Press b

Press N i

Note

Phone number in Tel 1: remains.

4-14

Video Call

5-1

5-2

Getting Started

Communicate with another party using live video images.

^ Use Video Call with compatible handsets only.

^ Use Internal Camera to send your own image.

^ Use External Camera to send higher quality images.

Window Description

Internal Camera

Important Video Call Usage Notes

^ If both parties are not using the same Video Call system, call may be interrupted. (Video Call charges apply.)

^ Depending on the other party's handset specifications or settings, incoming image may appear small or not at all.

^ Rapid motion can make images appear choppy or distorted.

^ Conversations may be hampered by ambient noise. Use LCD

Remote/Mic with Headphones to reduce noise.

^ Increasing Earpiece Volume for Loudspeaker (see P.5-6) use

may cause feedback/interference. Moderate volume or use

LCD Remote/Mic with Headphones.

^ Handset temperature may rise during Video Calls; this is normal.

Incoming Image 1

Outgoing Image 1

Other Party's Number 2

Change incoming/outgoing image size/position (see P.5-4 "Switch

Images").

Name appears if saved in Phone Book.

Initiating a Video Call

1 Enter a phone number

^ Alternatively, select a number from Phone Book (see P.4-8),

Dialled Numbers (see P.2-3) or Received Calls (see P.2-6).

2 Press N P

3 Select Video Call and press b

When the call is answered, incoming image appears.

^ Incoming image may not appear depending on handset settings. (Video

Call charges apply.)

C For operations during a Video Call,

see P.5-4.

4 Press g to end call

^ Alternatively, close handset to end calls. (Note, however, that if

LCD Remote/Mic with Headphones or a Bluetooth headset is in use, line will remain open even when handset is closed.)

Tip H Enter a phone number and press f for 1+ seconds to initiate a Video Call.

Answering a Video Call

1 When a Video Call arrives, open handset

Incoming Video Call appears.

2 Answer with Video Image

1 Press f

Internal Camera image is sent.

C For operations during a Video

Call, see P.5-4.

Answer with Voice Only

1 Press N P

2 Select Hide Picture and

press b

^ Outgoing image is suppressed.

(Video Call charges apply.)

For operations during a Video Call, see P.5-4.

3 Press g to end call

^ Alternatively, close handset to end calls. (Note, however, that if

LCD Remote/Mic with Headphones or a Bluetooth headset is in use, line will remain open even when handset is closed.)

Rejecting/Redirecting Video Calls

C When a Video Call arrives, press N P A Select

Reject Call or Busy

Press b

5-3

5-4

Engaged Video Call Operations

Switch Images Change incoming/outgoing image size/position

During a call, press b.

^ Images toggle as shown below.

^ Incoming Priority (incoming image appears larger) is set when initiating Video Calls.

Incoming Priority b b b

Outgoing Priority b

Incoming Only Outgoing Only

C To change Outgoing Only or Incoming Only image size, press N P A Select Display Size A Press b A

Select Original Size or Enlarge A Press b

Note

Outgoing image appears on other party's handset even when Incoming Only is active.

Camera

Picture

Change outgoing image

KInternal Camera

During a call, press A.

^ Image toggles as follows: External Camera image %

Alternative Image % Internal Camera image.

^ Press B to toggle image in reverse order.

^ To change Alternate Image during a call, press N P A

Select Settings A Press b A Perform from "Select

Alternative Image" in "Camera Picture" on P.5-5.

Earpiece

Volume

Adjust Earpiece Volume (5 levels)

KLevel 3

During a call, press L or M

Press L (up) or

M (down) to adjust level

^ Each press changes volume by one level.

^ Volume level remains as set even after handset power is turned off.

Mute Mute handset microphone

During a call, press M N.

C To cancel, press M M.

Pause live voice/image transmissions

Hold

Send Hold Guidance Picture

During a call, press N P

Select Hold

Press b

C To resume, press M e.

Loudspeaker Disable Loudspeaker

During a call, press N P

Select Loudspeaker

Off

Press b

C To activate Loudspeaker during a call, press N P A

Select Loudspeaker On A Press b

Open

Phone Book

Open/save Phone Book entries or My Details

Opening Phone Book

During a call, press N P

Select Open Phone

Book A Press b A Select an entry (or My Details)

A Press b

^ My Details appears only when View Phone Book is set to By Reading

Order or By Category (see P.4-8 "Phone Book Search Method").

Saving Entries

During a call, press N P

Select Open Phone

Book

Press b

Press N P

Select Add

New Entry

Press b

Perform from Step 2 on P.4-4

Mirror Image Activate/cancel reversed Internal Camera image

During a call, press N P

Select Settings

Press b

Select Mirror Image

Press b

Choose On or Off

Press b

^ External Camera image, Alternative Image and incoming images cannot be reversed.

^ Mirror Image is On when initiating Video Calls.

Adjust outgoing image brightness (5 levels: -2

Exposure to +2)

During a call, press N P

Select Settings

Press b

Select Exposure

Press b

Use E to adjust level

Press b

^ Alternative Image appearance is fixed.

^ Exposure is Level 0 when initiating Video Calls.

Transfer Audio

Select sound output when a handsfree device, etc. is used for conversations

During a call, press N P

Select Settings

Press b

Select Transfer Audio

Press b

Select To Handset or To Bluetooth

Press b

Other Engaged Video Call Operations

C Mobile Light

Press p for 1+ seconds to turn on or off.

^ (Use Mobile Light as a strobe for External Camera.)

C Digital Zoom

Press C (zoom in) or D (zoom out).

^ Select from two settings for Internal Camera or nine for

External Camera.

C To change Incoming Picture, Outgoing Picture, Backlight or

Hold Guidance Pict (see P.5-6) during a call, press N P,

select Settings and press b.

Video Call Settings

To change these settings during calls, see P.5-4 - 5-5.

Camera

Picture

Main Menu

Outgoing image is either live video via Internal

Camera or Alternative Image when initiating

Video Calls

KInternal Camera

H Settings A Call/Video Call (F) A Video Call A

Camera Picture

Select Default Image

Press b

Select Internal

Camera or Alternative Image

Press b

C To change Alternative Image, select Alternative Image

Press b

Press b A

Select Preset Picture or My Pictures

Select an image

Press b twice

^ External Camera image is selectable during a call.

5-5

Loudspeaker Activate/cancel Loudspeaker for Video Calls

Main Menu

KOn

Settings

Call/Video Call (F)

Video Call

Loudspeaker

Choose On (activate Loudspeaker) or Off A Press b

Incoming

Picture

Main Menu

Select quality of incoming images

KNormal

H Settings A Call/Video Call (F) A Video Call A

Incoming Picture

Select Normal, Quality Prior or Frame Rate Prior

Press b

^ Select Quality Prior for higher quality and Frame Rate Prior for faster frame rate.

Outgoing

Picture

Main Menu

Select quality of outgoing images

KStandard

H Settings A Call/Video Call (F) A Video Call A

Outgoing Picture

Select Normal, Quality Prior or Frame Rate Prior

Press b

^ Select Quality Prior for higher quality and Frame Rate Prior for faster frame rate.

Backlight Select a Backlight status for Video Calls

Main Menu

KAlways On

Settings

Call/Video Call (F)

Video Call

Backlight

Select Always On, Always Off or Normal Setting A

Press b

^ Selecting Normal Setting applies Display Backlight setting

(see P.10-7).

Mute

Microphone

Main Menu

Mute handset microphone for Video Calls

KOff

H Settings A Call/Video Call (F) A Video Call A

Mute Microphone

Choose On (mute) or Off

Press b

Hold Guidance

Pict

Main Menu

Select image that can be sent while calls are on hold

KPicture 1

H Settings A Call/Video Call (F) A Video Call A

Hold Guidance Pict

Select Preset Picture or My Picture

Press b

Select an image

Press b twice

5-6

Camera

6-1

6-2

Getting Started

804SH features a 2.0 megapixel CCD camera. Capture still

images (see P.6-5) or record video (see P.6-7).

Tip

Use Internal Camera (see P.1-7 8) or External Camera

(see P.1-7 T); unless otherwise noted, mobile camera

operations are described for External Camera.

Mobile Camera Basics

^ Clean dust/smudges from lens cover (see P.1-7 T) with a soft

cloth before use.

^ Handset movement may blur images; hold 804SH firmly or

place it on a stable surface and use Self-timer (see P.6-10).

^ Mobile camera is a precision instrument, however, some pixels may appear brighter or darker.

^ Shooting/saving images while handset is hot may affect the image quality.

^ Subjecting the lens to direct sunlight will damage the camera's colour filter.

Shutter Click

C Shutter click volume is fixed, and sounds even in Manner mode.

C To change shutter click sound for still images, see P.6-14.

Incoming Calls/Alarm while Using Camera

C Mobile camera shuts down for incoming calls and Alarm.

C When recording video, Alarm Times are announced after mobile camera operations are concluded.

C Captured image/recorded video is temporarily saved. End the call or close Alarm Time notice to return.

Precautions for Video Recording

C When battery is low (L or B), Video Camera is not available.

If battery runs low while recording video, recording stops.

(Recorded video is saved.)

Auto Shut-off

C Before image capture, mobile camera shuts down after five minutes of inactivity and handset returns to Standby.

Exporting Images

C View images and video on PCs, TVs or other display devices

via Video Cable (see P.10-8 "Viewing Images on External

Devices").

Camera Display Indicators

Photo Camera Mode

7 Self-timer (see P.6-10)

A: Self-timer Active

Continuous Shoot (see P.6-11)

b - c: Captured/Total

Q: 4 Pictures, R: 9 Pictures, d: Overlapped, e: Bracket

^ d, etc.: Self-timer and Continuous Shoot are active.

^ S: Index Image (composite image for Overlapped) is on Display.

Video Camera Mode

1 Capacity (see P.6-5)

^ F: 101 or more

^ Red background: 3 or less

2 Image Quality (see P.6-16)

K: Normal, L: Fine, M: High Quality

3 Picture Size (see P.6-15)

4 Mobile Light (see P.6-15)

I: On, K: Automatic, J: Low Light

Scene (see P.6-16)

P: Automatic, s: Night, R: Sports, Q: Characters

5 Save to (see P.6-17)

b: Handset, c: Memory Card (SD Pictures), r: Memory Card (SD DCIM), D: Ask Each Time

6 Exposure (see P.6-15)

E D A B C

Dark

Standard

Bright

1 Image Quality (see P.6-16)

K: Normal, L: Fine, M: High Quality

2 Record Time/Size (see P.6-16)

3 Mobile Light (see P.6-15)

I: On, K: Automatic

4 Save to (see P.6-17)

b: Handset, c: Memory Card, D: Ask Each Time

5 Exposure (see P.6-15)

E D A B C

Dark B Standard A Bright

6 Self-timer (see P.6-10)

A: Self-timer Active

6-3

Key Assignments

1 Portrait (p)/Macro (o) Selector

^ Slide to Macro to capture images as close as 10 cm. Allow at least 40 cm for Portrait.

2 Digital Zoom

C (zoom in), D (zoom out)

^ Alternatively, use L (zoom in) and M (zoom out).

3 Options

4 Cancel

Press to start over.

5 Toggle Mode

6 Shutter

7 Exposure

B (darker), A (brighter)

8 End

6-4

9 Function Shortcuts

Activate mobile camera and press the following keys to use the corresponding functions.

^ Available options vary by selected image capture mode.

For details, see P.6-6 "Still Image Functions" and P.6-8

"Video Recording Operations".

1 Maximise or cancel Digital Zoom

Adjust Exposure (see P.6-15)

^ Press 2, then use F to adjust level.

Switch save location (see P.6-17 "Save to")

Change image size (see P.6-15 "Picture Size" or

P.6-16 "Record Time/Size")

Switch Scene options for image capture (see P.6-16)

Turn Microphone on/off for video recording (see P.6-16)

Change image quality (see P.6-16)

Activate/cancel Self-timer (see P.6-10)

Change Mobile Light colour while the light illuminates (see P.6-15)

Hide indicators to frame image on full Display (see

P.6-14 "Toggle Preview")

Toggle between Internal Camera and External Camera

(see P.6-17 "Internal/External Camera")

Turn Mobile Light on/off (see P.6-15)

A Camera Startup & Shutter

In Standby, press for 1+ seconds to activate the mode used last (default: Photo Camera).

Help

C Follow these steps to view a summary of key assignments.

Activate mobile camera and press N P

Select Help A Press b

B Press D to scroll down.

B Press b to return.

Still Images

Photo Camera Mode

Capture images to send via MMS, save as Wallpaper, etc.

Various settings and functions are available for camera use.

Picture Size

Format

Save Location

Image Quality

Digital Zoom

W 1216 x H 1632 dots

W 960 x H 1280 dots (Quad-VGA)

W 768 x H 1024 dots (XGA)

W 480 x H 640 dots (VGA)

W 240 x H 320 dots (QVGA)

W 120 x H 160 dots (QQVGA)

JPEG (.jpg)

Handset Data Folder (Pictures) or

Memory Card Data Folder (Pictures/DCIM

)

Normal/Fine/High Quality

W 1216 x H 1632 dots: None

W 960 x H 1280 dots: 1x - 1.25x

W 768 x H 1024 dots: 1x - 1.6x

W 480 x H 640 dots: 1x - 2.5x

W 240 x H 320 dots: 1x - 10x

W 120 x H 160 dots: 1x - 20x

MMS

Attachment

Memory

Capacity

1,260 files

Default file names appear as Image0001, Image0002, etc.

Save W 480 x H 640 dots or larger images to DCIM.

Approximate value for handset Data Folder, with default image size and quality.

Tip

H ^ Select storage media beforehand or each time you save

an image (see P.6-17 "Save to").

^ Saved video, melodies or V-applications reduce still image memory.

^ To check memory status, see P.9-2.

Capturing Still Images

Main Menu H Camera

1 Frame image on Display

C In Video Camera mode, press M (j) to switch to Photo Camera.

Key Assignments: see P.6-4

Special Shooting Modes: see P.6-10

Camera Settings: see P.6-14

2 Press b or h

Shutter clicks and captured image appears on Display.

^ When Auto Save is On, captured image is saved automatically and

Viewfinder returns.

C To start over, press M 3 or i.

C To send image via MMS, press N f

Perform from Step 3 on P.14-6

Photo Camera

6-5

6-6

3 Press b to save

Image is saved and Viewfinder returns for another shot.

C When confirmation for save location appears, select a location A Press b

To open saved images, see P.6-9 "Opening Still Images".

4 Press g to exit

Tip H When Captured Image is Unsaved

Finished? appears.

^ Press N i to end. Handset returns to Standby.

^ Press M c to return to captured image.

Still Image Functions

Press N P before image capture to use the following functions:

Exposure

Picture Size

Picture Quality

My Pictures

Mobile Light

Scene

Adjust amount of light (see P.6-15)

Select image size (see P.6-15)

Select Normal, Fine or High Quality

(see P.6-16)

Open Data Folder files (see P.6-9)

Select mode and colour (see P.6-15)

Select a mode according to lighting or

subject (see P.6-16)

Self-timer

Add Frame

Set Self-timer (see P.6-10)

Add frames (see P.6-12)

Continuous Shoot

Capture images sequentially (see P.6-11)

Camera Effects

Capture images with special effects (see P.6-13)

Hide Indicators/

Normal Finder

Hide indicators to frame image on full

Display (see P.6-14)

Shutter Sound

Change shutter click sound (see P.6-14)

Save Pictures to

Select handset or Memory Card (see P.6-17)

Auto Save

Select whether to save captured image

automatically (see P.6-18)

Switch to Video Camera (see P.6-17)

to Video Camera

Internal Camera/

External Camera

Help

Toggle between Internal Camera and

External Camera (see P.6-17)

View a summary of key assignments

(see P.6-4)

Available for External Camera.

Video

Video Camera Mode

Record short video clips to send via MMS. Use Memory

Cards to save long recordings (recording time depends on the card capacity.)

Image Size

Format

Save Location

Image Quality

W 176 x H 144 dots

(QCIF)

W 128 x H 96 dots

(SubQCIF)

W 240 x H 320 dots

(QVGA)

MPEG-4 (.3gp)

MPEG-4

(.ASF)

Handset or Memory

Card Data Folder

(Videos)

Memory

Card Data

Folder

(Videos)

Normal/Fine/

High Quality

2.5x - 4.6x

―

Memory

Card

(SD VIDEO)

Digital Zoom

MMS

Attachment

OK N/A

For

Message

Approx. 60 seconds

(Normal)

Approx. 50 seconds

(Fine)

Approx. 30 seconds

(High Quality)

―

Extended

Video

30 minutes

Capacitybased

Default file names appear as video0001.3gp, video0002.3gp, etc.

Default file names appear as MOL001.ASF, MOL002.ASF, etc.

Extended Video recordings are saved to Memory Card.

Tip

H ^ For best results, record within 1.5 metres, in well-lit conditions.

^ Select storage media beforehand or each time you save

a video file (see P.6-17 "Save to").

^ Saved still images, melodies or V-applications reduce video memory.

^ To check memory status, see P.9-2.

Recording Video

Make sure battery is adequately charged and there is enough free memory before recording video. When battery is low (L or B), Video Camera is not available. If battery runs low or memory becomes full while recording video, recording stops.

Main Menu

Camera

1 Press M (i)

^ Omit this step if Video Camera is already active.

2 Frame image on Display

Key Assignments: see P.6-4

Special Shooting Modes: see P.6-10

Camera Settings: see P.6-14

Video Camera

6-7

6-8

3 Press b or h

Recording begins after a tone.

C To start over, press M 3.

4 To stop, press b or h

Recording stops with a tone.

^ Recording stops automatically when maximum recording time is reached or memory becomes full.

^ When Auto Save is On, recorded video is saved automatically and Viewfinder returns.

C To play back, select Preview A

Press b

B To toggle Display Size during playback, press 0

(see P.7-14 "Display Size").

C To start over, press M W.

5 To save, select Save and press b

Video is saved and Viewfinder returns for another shot.

C When confirmation for save location appears, select a location

Press b

6 Press g to exit

Tip H When Recorded Video is Unsaved

Finished? appears.

^ Press N i to end. Handset returns to Standby.

^ Press M c to return to Menu.

Video Recording Operations

Before Recording

Press N P to use the following functions:

Exposure

Record Time/Size

Video Quality

My Videos

Mobile Light

Adjust amount of light (see P.6-15)

Select a format based on recording time

and image size (see P.6-16)

Select Normal, Fine or High Quality

(see P.6-16)

Open Data Folder files (see P.6-9)

Select mode and colour (see P.6-15)

Self-timer

Set Self-timer (see P.6-10)

Microphone

Video Encode

Save Videos to

Activate to record sound (see P.6-16)

Select a video encoding format

(see P.6-17)

Select handset or Memory Card (see

P.6-17)

Auto Save to Photo Camera

Internal Camera

External Camera

Select whether to save recorded video

automatically (see P.6-18)

Switch to Photo Camera (see P.6-17)

Toggle between Internal Camera and

External Camera (see P.6-17)

Help

View a summary of key assignments

(see P.6-4)

Not available for QVGA images (W 240 x H 320 dots).

Available for External Camera.

Available when Record Time/Size is set to For Message.

Before Saving

The following menu items appear after recording:

Save

Preview

Save and Send

Save video to handset or Memory Card

(see P.6-8)

Play video (see P.6-8)

Attach video to MMS Mail (see P.6-14)

Available when Record Time/Size is set to For Message.

Opening Images & Playing Video

To open files from Data Folder, see P.9-4.

Opening Still Images

Main Menu H Camera A Activate Photo Camera

1 Press N P

2 Select My Pictures and press b

C When Memory Card is inserted, select Pictures or Camera

Images (DCIM)

Press b

B Use F to switch between handset and Memory Card.

C To open a created sub folder or a sub folder in DCIM, select it

A Press b

3 Select a file and press b

C To open other files, press M W A Select one A

Press b

Playing Video

Main Menu H Camera A Activate Video Camera

1 Press N P

2 Select My Videos and press b

C Use F to switch between handset and Memory Card.

C To open a created sub folder, select it

Press b

3 Select a file and press b

Video plays. Press b to pause/resume playback.

C To open other files, press M W A Select one A

Press b

SD VIDEO

Play QVGA size (.ASF) video

(W 240 x H 320 dots)

Main Menu

Media Player

Videos

SD VIDEO

Select a file

Press b

C To open other files, press M W A Select one A

Press b

6-9

Special Shooting Modes

Self-timer

Delay shutter release by 10 seconds after Shutter Key is pressed to capture still images or record video.

^ Switch to External Camera to use Self-timer.

^ Follow these steps before capturing an image (after Step 1 on

P.6-5) or recording video (after Step 2 on P.6-7).

^ Self-timer is Off by default.

1 Press N P

2 Select Modes and press b

3 Select Self-timer and press b

4 Choose On and press b

Viewfinder returns (A appears).

C To cancel, choose Off A Press b

5 Frame image on Display and press b or h

Tone sounds and countdown starts.

^ After 10 seconds, shutter is released and captured image appears or video recording starts.

C To cancel Self-timer during countdown, press M 3.

B Viewfinder returns. (Self-timer remains active.)

6 Saving Still Images

1 Press b

Self-timer is cancelled and Viewfinder returns.

C When confirmation for save location appears, select a location A Press b

Saving Video

1 To stop, press b or h

2 To save, select Save and press b

Self-timer is cancelled and Viewfinder returns.

C When confirmation for save location appears, select a location

Press b

7 Press g to exit

C When Captured Image/Recorded Video is Unsaved:

see P.6-6 or P.6-8

Note H Self-timer is not available when shooting speed for

Continuous Shoot (see P.6-11) is Manual.

Self-timer Details

C To release shutter manually during countdown, press b or h. Image is captured or video recording starts and

Self-timer is cancelled.

C Incoming calls and Alarm interrupt countdown. (Self-timer is cancelled and handset returns to Standby.)

C Available functions during countdown are Digital Zoom,

Mobile Light, and Exposure (adjust level for video recording).

6-10

Continuous Shoot (Photo Camera)

Capture a series of 4 or 9 separate images automatically with a single press of the Shutter Key. Select from three speed settings or choose the manual option to control the rate at which images are captured.

4 Pictures

9 Pictures

Overlapped

Bracket

Capture four separate images with Index Image

Capture nine separate images with Index Image

Capture five images to create a composite image

Capture nine separate images with Index Image

Exposure and Mobile Light colour vary slightly for each shot.

Available when Picture Size is 480 x 640 or smaller. (Index Image is not created for 480 x 640.)

Index Image consists of reduced images of each shot.

Available when Picture Size is 240 x 320 or smaller.

^ Press b or h for the first shot. Handset captures the rest automatically.

^ In 4 Pictures or 9 Pictures mode, select shutter interval from three levels, or select Manual to release shutter manually.

^ Switch to External Camera to use Continuous Shoot.

^ Follow these steps before capturing an image (after Step 1 on

P.6-5).

1 Press N P

2 Select Modes and press b

3 Select Continuous Shoot and press b

4 Select from 4 Pictures to Bracket and press b

C To cancel, choose Off A Press b (Omit the next steps.)

5 Select speed and press b

Viewfinder returns with the corresponding indicator (see P.6-3).

^ Manual is not available when Self-timer (see P.6-10) is active.

^ Available shooting speed options vary by selected Picture

Size.

6 Frame image on Display and press b or h

The first frame is captured with subsequent frames captured at selected speed.

^ For manual control (4 Pictures and 9 Pictures modes), repeat

Step 6 for each frame.

C To stop, press M 3.

B To save captured images, skip ahead to Step 8.

B To cancel during manual shutter control, press M 3.

(Captured images are deleted and Viewfinder returns.)

7 Index Image or a composite image appears

^ When Picture Size is 480 x 640, the first captured image appears.

C Use F to toggle between frames and

Index Image.

B To save images individually, select a frame or Index Image and proceed to Step 8.

4 Pictures

C To send image via MMS, press N f

Perform from

Step 3 on P.14-6

6-11

8 To save, press b

C When confirmation for save location appears, select a location

Press b

9 Saving All Images

1 Select All Pictures and press b

Images are saved and Viewfinder returns with

Continuous Shoot active.

Saving the Selected Image

1 Select Selected Picture and press b

Image is saved and captured image returns with

Continuous Shoot active.

C To save other images, use F to select one

Press b A Select Selected Picture A Press b

C Press M 3 to return to Viewfinder.

10 Press g to exit

When Captured Image is Unsaved: see P.6-6

Note

In low light or while Mobile Light is on, shooting speed may slow down.

Tip H When Only Selected Image is Saved

Finished? appears when closing mobile camera before returning to Viewfinder.

^ Press N i to end. Handset returns to Standby.

^ Press M c to return to captured image.

Adding Frames (Photo Camera)

^ In addition to Preset Frames, use transparent PNG files (40 KB or smaller) obtained via Web or MMS.

^ Select Picture Size 240 x 320 or 120 x 160 to add frames.

^ Switch to External Camera to add frames.

^ Follow these steps before capturing an image (after Step 1 on

P.6-5); after Viewfinder returns, perform from Step 1 on P.6-5 to

complete.

1 Press N P

2 Select Modes and press b

3 Select Add Frame and press b

4 Preset Frames

1 Select Preset Frames and press b

2 Select a frame and press N U

C To check frames, select one A Press b

B Press M W to return.

Original Frames

1 Select My Pictures and press b

^ Some images may not be used as a frame.

2 Select a frame and press b

C To change image (frame), press M W.

3 Press b

Cancelling

1 Choose Off and press b

Tip H In Continuous Shoot, frame is added to each image.

6-12

Camera Effects (Photo Camera)

Capture images with special effects.

^ Select Picture Size 240 x 320 or 120 x 160 to use Camera

Effects.

^ Switch to External Camera to use Camera Effects.

^ Follow these steps before capturing an image (after Step 1 on

P.6-5); after Viewfinder returns, perform from Step 1 on P.6-5

to complete.

1 Press N P

2 Select Modes and press b

3 Select Camera Effects and press b

4 Select an effect and press N U

C To check effects, select one

Press b

B Press M W to return.

C To cancel, choose Off

Press b

Sending Still Images & Video

Still Images

Capture and send images as MMS Mail attachments.

To attach images in Data Folder, see P.9-6.

Capture an image (perform Steps 1 - 2 on P.6-5)

To attach Continuous Shoot images, after Step 7 on P.6-11,

use F to select a frame or Index Image.

2 Press N f

Image is saved to Data Folder and Mail Composition window opens with image attached.

C When confirmation for save location appears, select a location

Press b

3 Complete other fields and send MMS Mail

(perform from Step 3 on P.14-6)

Tip

Make sure that the recipient's handset is able to receive attachments. For information about Mail service and compatibility with other handset models, contact

Vodafone Customer Centre, General Information

(see P.18-24).

6-13

Video Clips

Send recorded video clips via MMS.

^ For details of attachable files, see the table on P.6-7.

^ To attach video files saved in Data Folder, see P.9-6.

Record video (perform Steps 1 - 4 on P.6-7)

2 Select Save and Send and press b

Video is saved to Data Folder and Mail Composition window opens with the video file attached.

C When confirmation for save location appears, select a location

Press b

3 Complete other fields and send MMS Mail

(perform from Step 3 on P.14-6)

Note

H ^ Send video clips to MMS- or VGS-compatible Vodafone handsets.

^ Only MPEG 4-compatible Vodafone handsets support video files recorded on 804SH.

Tip

For information about Mail service and compatibility with other handset models, contact Vodafone Customer

Centre, General Information (see P.18-24).

Camera Settings

^ Available options vary by selected image capture mode.

^ Shortcut keys are assigned to some functions (see P.6-4

"Function Shortcuts").

Shooting Options

Follow these steps before capturing an image (after Step 1

on P.6-5) or recording video (after Step 2 on P.6-7); after

Viewfinder returns, perform from Step 1 on P.6-5 or Step 2

on P.6-7 to complete.

Hide Indicators/

Normal Finder

Hide indicators to frame image on full Display

Photo Camera !

Video Camera #

KNormal Finder

Press N P

Select Settings

Press b

Select Hide Indicators or Normal Finder

Press b

Shutter Sound Change shutter click sound

Photo Camera !

Video Camera #

KPattern 1

Press N P

Select Settings

Press b

Select Shutter Sound

Press b

Select a pattern

Press b

C To check sound, select a pattern and press N L.

^ Volume is fixed.

^ Shutter click sound for Continuous Shoot is unique and fixed.

6-14

Mobile Light Select mode and colour

Photo Camera !

Video Camera !

1, 2

Available for External Camera.

Low Light is not available.

KOff/White

Mode

Press N P

Select Modes

Press b

Select Mobile Light

Press b

Select Switch On/

Off

Press b

Select a mode

Press b

^ Setting returns to default when mobile camera shuts down.

Automatic

Low Light

Mobile Light activates (and brightens for still image capture)

Mobile Light activates when light is low and brightens for image capture

Mobile Light activates and brightness is constant

Colour

Press N P

Select Modes

Press b

Select Mobile Light

Press b

Select Light

Colour

Press b

Select a colour

Press b

C To return to Viewfinder, press M W three times.

Note

H ^ Do not use Mobile Light near people's faces or look into the light yourself.

^ Even when On or Automatic is selected, Mobile Light may not illuminate if battery is low.

Image Settings

Follow these steps before capturing an image (after Step 1

on P.6-5) or recording video (after Step 2 on P.6-7); after

Viewfinder returns, perform from Step 1 on P.6-5 or Step 2

on P.6-7 to complete.

Exposure Adjust brightness for still images and video

Photo Camera !

Video Camera !

K0 (standard)

Press N P

Select Exposure

Press b

Use F to adjust level

^ Setting returns to default when mobile camera shuts down, when switching between Photo Camera and Video Camera

(see P.6-17 "Photo Camera/Video Camera") or when switching between Internal Camera and External Camera (see P.6-17

"Internal/External Camera").

Picture Size Select still image size

Photo Camera !

Video Camera #

K240 x 320

Press N P

Select Picture Size

Press b

Select a size (see P.6-5)

Press b

^ Select 240 x 320 or 120 x 160 for Internal Camera.

^ To change video image size, see P.6-16 "Record Time/Size".

6-15

Image Quality Select image or video quality

Photo Camera !

Video Camera !

Not available for QVGA images (W 240 x H 320 dots).

KNormal (Photo Camera), Fine (Video Camera)

Press N P

Select Picture Quality or Video

Quality A Press b A Select quality A Press b

^ The image quality increases as follows: Normal % Fine %

High Quality. Saving higher quality images/video requires more space in memory.

Scene Select a mode according to lighting or subject

Photo Camera !

Video Camera #

Available for External Camera.

KAutomatic

Press N P

Select Modes

Press b

Select Scene

Press b

Select a mode

Press b

^ Setting returns to default when mobile camera shuts down, when switching between Photo Camera and Video Camera

(see P.6-17 "Photo Camera/Video Camera") or when switching between Internal Camera and External Camera (see P.6-17

"Internal/External Camera").

Automatic

Night

Sports

Characters

Automatic adjustment

Use in low light conditions

Best suited for action sports or fast-moving subjects

Most suitable for high contrast black and white subjects

Record Time/

Size

Select For Message to record short video (up to 295 KB) to send via MMS

For longer video recording, select Extended

Video

Photo Camera # Video Camera !

KFor Message/Large (QCIF)

Press N P

Select Record Time/Size

Press b

Select For Message or Extended Video

Press b

Select an option

Press b

C For Extended Video options, press b after the above steps.

^ Extended Video recordings are saved to Memory Card.

QVGA (3gp)

QVGA (asf)

Large (QCIF)

Small (SubQCIF)

W 240 x H 320 dots

Format: MPEG-4 (.3gp)

W 240 x H 320 dots

Format: MPEG-4 (.ASF)

W 176 x H 144 dots

Format: 3GPP (.3gp)

W 128 x H 96 dots

Format: 3GPP (.3gp)

Available for Extended Video.

Microphone Record sound together with video

Photo Camera # Video Camera !

KOn

Press N P

Select Settings

Press b

Select Microphone

Press b

Choose On or Off

A Press b

6-16

Video Encode Select a video encoding format

Photo Camera # Video Camera !

Not available for QVGA images (W 240 x H 320 dots).

KMPEG4 (Japan)

Press N P

Select Settings

Press b

Select Video Encode A Press b A Select

H.263(Europe) or MPEG4(Japan) A Press b

Additional Settings

Follow these steps before capturing an image (after Step 1

on P.6-5) or recording video (after Step 2 on P.6-7); after

Viewfinder returns, perform from Step 1 on P.6-5 or Step 2

on P.6-7 to complete.

Photo Camera/

Video Camera

Switch between Photo Camera and Video

Camera

Photo Camera !

Video Camera !

Press N P

Select to Video Camera or to

Photo Camera

Press b

Internal/

External Camera

Switch between Internal Camera and External

Camera

Photo Camera !

Video Camera !

Switch to External Camera to record QVGA video (W 240 x H 320 dots).

KExternal Camera

Press N P

Select External Camera or

Internal Camera A Press b

Save to Select a save location for images or video

Photo Camera !

Video Camera !

Available when Record Time/Size is set to For Message.

KHandset

Press N P

Select Settings

Press b

Select Save Pictures to or Save Videos to

Press b

Select a location or Ask Each Time

Press b

^ For Ask Each Time, confirmation appears each time you save an image or video.

Camera Mode/Size

Photo Camera

(120 x 160 or 240 x 320)

Photo Camera

(480 x 640 or larger)

Video Camera

Save Location

Phone Memory [handset]

Memory Card

Phone Memory [handset]

SD (Pictures) [Memory Card]

SD (DCIM) [Memory Card]

To Phone Me... [handset]

To Memory Card

Note

H ^ Ask Each Time is not available when Auto Save (see

P.6-18) is active.

^ To save to Memory Card, insert a card before saving image or recording video.

6-17

Auto Save

Select whether to save captured images or recorded video automatically

Photo Camera !

Video Camera !

KOff

Press N P A Select Settings A Press b A

Select Auto Save A Press b A Choose On or Off A

Press b

Note H Auto Save is disabled when Ask Each Time is set for

Save Pictures to or Save Videos to (see P.6-17).

6-18

Media Player

7-1

7-2

Media Player Basics

Use Media Player to record and listen to music (Music Player) or play video (Video Player). Save video/music files to handset or Memory Card (including SD VIDEO and SD AUDIO). To open files, specify the location first.

Music (Music Player)

My Music

Video (Video Player)

My Videos

Handset

Memory Card

SD VIDEO

Memory Card

Handset/Memory Card

SD AUDIO

Memory Card

^ For Playlist details, see P.7-19.

^ Playback stops when battery is low. Charge battery and

resume from where it stopped (see Step 1 on P.7-11 or

P.7-13).

^ Consume media as it downloads (Streaming: see P.15-10).

When Manner Mode is Active

C When Media Player is opened, sound output confirmation appears.

^ Press N i to cancel Manner mode temporarily. Handset speaker outputs sound at the volume set for Media Player.

^ Press M c to stay in Manner mode. Use LCD

Remote/Mic with Headphones to listen to music without bothering others.

Incoming Calls/Mail during Playback

C Playback stops for incoming calls or Alarm.

^ When playback stops while streaming, the URL is saved to

Access History.

C An icon appears for incoming mail without interrupting playback.

Downloading Music/Video

Open music/video-related links in Vodafone Web Menu directly from Media Player to download music (Chaku-Uta) and video.

^ Read information (price, expiry date, etc.) on the source site.

^ Use Music Search (see P.7-3) to search by title, artist, etc.

Main Menu H Media Player

1 Select Music or Videos and press b

2 Select Download Music or Download Videos and

press b

Handset connects to the Network and the corresponding

Vodafone Web Menu opens.

^ Follow the links to download music/video.

Music Search

C Follow these steps to access the Vodafone Music Search site.

In Step 1 on

P.7-2 , select Music

Press b

Select Music Search

Press b

^ Fill in fields or follow links to search for/download music.

Saving Music Files from PCs

Save music files onto Memory Cards from CDs, etc. using

PCs or other devices to play them on handset Music Player.

Precautions for Handling Music Files on PCs

CRespect copyrights.

^ Comply with copyright and other intellectual property laws when using music saved on Memory Cards.

^ Under copyright law, music saved on Memory Cards is limited to private use.

CUse music files compliant with the SD-Audio standard.

804SH supports Secure MP3, Secure AAC and AAC files compliant with the SD-Audio standard.

B For AAC files, see "Precautions for Handling AAC Files" on the right.

CSave music to the specified directory.

Save music to the following folder on Memory Card using a miniSD! reader/writer or other compatible device.

PRIVATE/VODAFONE/My Items/Sounds & Ringtones

Tip

For more about saving music files from PCs, see "Utility

Software Starter Guide" on Utility Software CD-ROM.

Precautions for Handling AAC Files

CUse software supporting AAC conversion.

^ Use software such as iTunes to convert music to AAC format.

^ iTunes is an example only. Vodafone does not guarantee compatibility with any software.

^ For software usage and specifications, see the provider's website, etc.

iTunes is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc registered in the United States and other countries.

CSupported bit rate and sampling frequency are as follows.

Bit Rate (kbps)

Sampling Frequency (Hz)

20*

, 24*

, 28, 32, 40, 48, 56, 64,

80, 96*

, 112*

, 128*

16000, 22050, 24000, 32000,

44100, 48000

Supports stereo playback only when the sampling frequency is

16000 Hz.

Monaural playback is not supported.

Note

Artist names for AAC files do not appear on 804SH.

7-3

7-4

Recording Music

Connect 804SH to audio sources supporting optical output to record music onto Memory Cards.

^ 804SH encryption technology complies with Secure Digital

Music Initiative (SDMI) for copyright protection. This technology prevents unauthorised copying or playback through data encryption and authentication.

^ Analogue recording is not supported.

Required Cables for Recording Music

^ Optical Conversion Cable (optional accessory)

^ Optical digital connecting cable (sold separately)

Recording Time

Estimated Recording Time for Memory Card with no Files or

Recordings:

Card Capacity

Bit Rate/Recording Time

96 kbps 128 kbps

80 minutes 60 minutes 64 MB

Bit rate measures audio compression rate or the quality of audio data recorded per second. Sound quality improves at higher rates.

Precautions before Recording

CCharge handset while recording.

^ Recording stops when battery level falls too low. Always use

AC Charger when recording to ensure a stable power supply.

^ When battery is low (L or B), Music Player will not record. If battery runs low while recording, recording stops.

CMusic is recorded onto Memory Card.

To start Music Player, insert a Memory Card formatted for

804SH (see P.8-3, P.8-4).

CActivate Offline Mode to prevent disruptions (see

Steps 1 - 2 on P.7-7).

Incoming communications may disrupt recording or damage outputs of audio sources. (To place calls or send mail, stop recording and cancel Offline Mode.)

CDo not remove Memory Card while recording.

Doing so may damage the card or result in lost files.

Note

H ^ Under copyright law, duplicated material is limited to private use. Unauthorised reproduction or use is prohibited.

^ Vodafone is not liable for any damages resulting from accidental loss or alteration of recordings.

^ Music recorded onto Memory Card cannot be recopied to other media digitally.

Recording Window Indicators

1 Title

2 Track Number

3 Status

K: Recording, M: Stopped

4 Synch Recording (see P.7-8)

^ Synch Recording On

5 Elapsed Time

6 Remaining Recording Time

^ Reduces after each recording

7 Sampling Frequency (see P.7-6)

8 Bit Rate (see P.7-8)

Track Bookmarks

Add Bookmarks to music in Playlist to divide it into tracks for

Repeat or Random Play. Track Bookmarks are created when a period of silence is detected between music files.

^ When recording from CD/MD players, etc., track numbers remain the same as the original.

^ If Music Player does not detect a period of silence, recorded music files are all combined and saved as a single track.

^ When Synch Recording is On, recording pauses after a period of silence. Recording resumes when sound (next music) is detected.

B When Synch Recording is On, recording stops after 15 seconds of pause.

^ Brief sound dropouts occur when Track Bookmarks are created.

^ Track Bookmarks may not be created automatically depending on the connected audio source. In this case, divide music into

tracks manually (see Step 4 on P.7-7).

Note H Recording may result in silence or a single music file with a low volume level if the music consists of long periods of silence or sustained low volume level.

7-5

Sampling Frequency

Sampling frequency is the number of times an audio signal is measured (sampled) per second, expressed in kilohertz (kHz).

Similar to bit rate, higher rates translate into better sound quality. Sampling frequency is automatically set to 32 kHz,

44.1 kHz or 48kHz according to the recording method or audio source.

When recording from DVD players, cancel DTS.

Note

Recording results may not be satisfactory depending on the signal format.

Connecting to Audio Sources

Connection Precautions

Connect Optical Conversion Cable with an optical digital connecting cable, then to 804SH gently.

Disconnect Optical Conversion Cable gently by holding the plug and handset.

Do not use excessive force when connecting/disconnecting cables; doing so may damage cable, Mini Plug or

Headphone/Optical Digital Line In Connector.

Use specified Optical Conversion Cable only.

Non-specified cables may not function properly and damage may result.

Cable Connections

Use Optical Digital Audio Toslink-Mini or Mini-Mini Cables

(sold separately) with Optical Conversion Cable to connect audio sources to 804SH.

^ Use Optical Conversion Cable only for recording music.

^ Optical Conversion Cable is designed exclusively for 804SH and other specified Vodafone handsets. Do not use for other devices to prevent damage or malfunction.

OPTICAL OUT

Mini Plug Jack Optical Mini Plug

Optical Digital

(3.5 mm)

Connecting Cable

Optical Digital

Connecting Cable

DIGITAL OUT

To Rectangular

(Toslink) Plug Jack

Optical Conversion

Cable (Plug)

Optical Digital

Line In Connector

AC 100V

7-6

Recording

^ Most operations are described with Synch Recording active.

^ Read the precautions on P.7-4 before recording.

^ To listen to music while recording, adjust Monitor Level before

recording (see P.7-8).

^ Prepare an audio source and pause playback at the beginning of music.

Main Menu

Media Player

Music

1 Select SD AUDIO Recorder and press b

Receive calls during recording? appears.

^ To prevent disruption by calls, choose M c in Step 2 to

activate Offline Mode (see P.2-19).

^ If Offline Mode is already active, skip ahead to Step 3.

^ SD AUDIO Recorder can only be selected when a Memory

Card is inserted.

2 Press M c

Recording window opens.

^ Customise settings before recording

(see P.7-8 "Recording Settings").

C To accept incoming calls, mail, etc. while recording, press N i.

3 Press b

Handset is ready for Synch Recording (see P.7-8).

C When Synch Recording is Off, press b again

Start playback

4 Start playback

Recording starts automatically when handset detects sound.

To create Track Bookmarks (see P.7-5) manually,

press M 7 while recording.

5 To stop recording, stop playback on the audio source

Recording pauses, then stops after 15 seconds.

^ If M c was pressed in Step 2, Offline Mode is cancelled after recording ends.

C When Synch Recording is Off, press b to stop recording.

Note H ^ Do not remove Memory Card or battery while recording.

Doing so may damage the card or result in lost information.

^ Do not touch cables or plugs while recording. May cause noise or skipping.

^ When recording from PCs or BS/CS digital tuners, recording level may decrease.

^ Unchecked files recorded with J-SH51/J-SH52 will be deleted when the Memory Card is used for 804SH

Music Player.

7-7

7-8

Tip

H ^ Alarm is disabled while recording, and starts after

Music Player stops/closes.

^ Recorded music is saved by date and time by default.

Recording Settings

Follow these steps after Step 2 on P.7-7.

Monitor Level

Set volume level to listen to music while recording

KLevel 3

Press N P

Select Monitor Level

Press b

A Use G to adjust level A Press b

Synch

Recording

Start recording automatically when playback starts on audio sources

KOn

Press N P

Select Synch Recording

Press b

Choose On or Off

Press b

Bit Rate

Select a bit rate (see P.7-4 "Recording Time")

KNormal (96 kbps)

Press N P

Select Bit Rate

Press b

Select Normal (96 kbps) or High-quality (128 kbps)

Press b

^ Sound quality is better at 128 kbps. However, recording time shortens as more space is required in memory.

Auto Mark

Level

Select sensitivity to detect silence for creating

Track Bookmarks

K-41dB

Press N P

Select Auto Mark Level

Press b

Select -41dB or -59dB

Press b

^ Select -59dB for soft music to prevent unintended Track

Bookmark creation.

Playing Music

Play music on Memory Card.

^ Use LCD Remote/Mic with Headphones (see P.7-10) to listen

to music without bothering others.

^ Alternatively, use handset speaker.

Left

Right

LCD

Remote/Mic with

Headphones Plug

Precautions before Playing Music

^ Music Player is not compatible with some recording/playback formats. Music may not play depending on the Memory Card status.

^ Grasp the plug when connecting or disconnecting LCD

Remote/Mic with Headphones. Do not bend the plug to avoid damaging the cord or Headphone Connector.

^ Use only the specified accessories (LCD Remote/Mic with

Headphones, etc.). Other devices may not function properly and cause damage to Headphone Connector.

^ When battery is low (L or B), Music Player will not play. If battery runs low during playback, Music Player shuts off.

Tip

H ^ To answer calls during playback with LCD Remote/Mic with Headphones, press Call Button (b) for 1+ seconds.

^ Turn down the volume if distortion is noticeable in speaker sound.

^ Large files may take longer to open. My Music and

Playlists may take longer to open if large files are saved.

Playback Window Indicators

1 Playback in Progress

2 Playlist Name

3 Title

4 Artist Name

^ No Artist Name appears if not available.

5 Track Number

6 Status

1: Playing, 0: Paused, 3: Fast Forwarding,

4: Fast Rewinding

7 Playback Pattern (see P.7-12)

5: Repeat, 6: Repeat All, J: Random

^ Indicator does not appear for Normal.

8 Elapsed Time

9 Volume

A Tone Control (see P.7-12)

i: Bass, l: Surround, k: Surround Bass f: Karaoke

^ Indicator does not appear for Normal.

7-9

LCD Remote/Mic with Headphones

CKey Assignments

CLCD Indicators

1 2 3 4 5 6

7 8 9 A

1 Call Button (b)

Press to place or answer calls (see P.2-20).

2 VOL+/VOL- Key

Press to adjust volume.

3 TRAIN Key

Press to limit maximum volume level to 13.

4 PLAY/SET Key

Press to toggle Playback Pattern (see P.7-12).

5 TONE Key

Press to toggle Tone Control (see P.7-12).

6 DISPLAY Key

Press to toggle Information view.

7 HOLD Key

Slide towards U (orange mark appears) to disable key press.

8 Fast Rewind Key (H)

Press to replay or fast rewind (see P.7-11).

9 Play/Stop Key (J)

Press to play or stop music (see P.7-11).

A Fast Forward Key (I)

Skip or fast forward (see P.7-11).

7 8

1 Ringtone Output

G appears at any time.

2 Manner Mode Active (see P.2-18)

3 Information

Title/artist name, elapsed time, Tone Control and current date/time appear.

4 TRAIN Active (see left)

5 Battery Level

6 Signal Strength

*Nothing appears when handset is out-of-range or in Offline

Mode.

7 Incoming Call Priority

E appears at any time.

8 Incoming Communications

Appears for missed incoming communications.

9 Playback Pattern (see P.7-12)

c: Repeat, d: Repeat All, e: Random

^ Indicator does not appear for Normal..

7-10

Playback

Main Menu H Media Player A Music

1 Select My Music or SD AUDIO

and press b

C To play the last played file from where it stopped, select Last Played Music

A Press b

2 Select a Playlist and press b

C To search files, press N P A

Select Search

Press b

Enter search text A Press b

My Music

B When no matching text is found, text entry window returns.

Change text and try again.

C To sort files, press N P

Select Sort

Press b

Select a sort option A Press b

B Files in SD AUDIO cannot be sorted.

C To check file/Playlist properties, select a file or Playlist A

Press N P

Select Information

Press b

(Press D to scroll down.)

B Press M W twice to return.

3 Select a file and press b

Playback window opens and playback starts.

^ Playback stops after the last file when Playback Pattern is set

to Normal (see P.7-12).

C To pause playback, press b.

C Use C (up) or D (down) to adjust volume.

B The setting remains until you change it.

Playback Operations

Replay

Skip Forward

Fast Forward

Fast Reverse

Pause

Mute

Handset

LCD Remote/Mic with Headphones

Press B Press H

Press repeatedly to play previous files.

Press A

Press I

Press and hold A Press and hold I

Release for playback.

Press and hold B Press and hold H

Release for playback.

Press b Press J

Press again to resume playback.

Press D

(Long Press)

Press VOL-

(Long Press)

Press C or VOL+ to play sound.

In Random Play, B or H only replays the current file.

Not available for the last file when Playback Pattern is set to

Normal.

Tip H ^ Press g to create mail messages and use Phone

Book, etc. during playback; however, some functions are not available.

^ Stop music? appears when g is pressed in Standby.

Press N i or M c.

7-11

Playback Settings

Tone Control

Increase bass for dynamic sound or create a surround field

KNormal

Main Menu H Media Player A Music A Settings

Select Tone Control

Press b

Select an effect

Press b

Normal

Bass

No sound effects

Bass is increased

Surround Surround effect

Surround Bass Surround effect with increased bass

Karaoke Vocals are softened

Playback

Pattern

Main Menu

Play files repeatedly or play them in random order

KNormal

Media Player

Music

Settings

Select Playback Pattern A Press b A Select a pattern

Press b

Normal

Repeat

Repeat All

Random

Play in order until the last file ends

Repeat one file

Repeat all files in the current Playlist

Play files in the current Playlist in random order

Playing Video

Play video files recorded with mobile camera or downloaded via Web.

^ Sounds play from handset speaker.

^ Alternatively, use LCD Remote/Mic with Headphones to listen

(see P.7-8).

Playback Window Indicators

1 Playlist Name

2 Video Image/Subtitles

3 Clip Number

4 Status

1: Playing, 0: Paused, L: Advancing Frame,

3: Fast Forwarding, 4: Fast Rewinding

5 Playback Pattern (see P.7-14)

^ Indicators are the same as those for Music Player (see P.7-9).

6 Volume

7 Elapsed Time

8 Sound Settings (seeP.7-14)

i: Bass, l: Surround, k: Surround + Bass

7-12

Playback

Play video on Video Player. To change playback settings,

see P.7-14. To add subtitles, see P.7-16.

Main Menu H Media Player A Videos

1 Select My Videos or SD VIDEO and press b

^ For SD VIDEO, skip ahead to Step 4.

C To play the last played file from where it stopped, select Last

Played Video A Press b

2 Select Phone Memory or Memory Card and press b

3 Select a Playlist and press b

C To search files, press N P A

Select Search

Press b

Enter search text A Press b

B When no matching text is found, text entry window returns. Change text and try again.

C To sort files, press N P A

Select Sort

Press b

Select a sort option A Press b

All Videos

B Files in SD VIDEO cannot be sorted.

C To check file/Playlist properties, select a file or Playlist A

Press N P

Select Information

Press b

(Press D to scroll down.)

B Press N K to return.

4 Select a file and press b

Playback window opens and playback starts.

^ Playback stops after the last file when Playback Pattern is set

to Normal (see P.7-14).

C To change playback settings while playing or paused, press

N P A Select Settings A Press b A

See P.7-14

To edit video, see P.7-15.

C To pause playback, press b.

B For frame advance, pause playback and press A for 1+ seconds.

C Use C (up) or D (down) to adjust volume.

B The setting remains until you change it.

To toggle Display Size (see P.7-14), press 0 during

playback.

B Subtitles appear only in Original Size.

Playback Operations: see P.7-11

Tip H Video recorded on other devices may appear rotated.

7-13

Playback Settings

Playback Pattern is available for files in My Videos only.

Playback

Pattern

Play files repeatedly or in random order

KNormal

Main Menu

Media Player

Videos

Settings

Select Playback Pattern

Press b

Select a pattern

Press b

Normal

Repeat

Repeat All

Random

Play in order until the last file ends

Repeat one file

Repeat all files in the current Playlist

Play files in the current Playlist in random order

Backlight Select a Backlight status for playback

KAlways On

Main Menu

Media Player

Videos

Settings

Select Backlight

Press b

Select a pattern

Press b

Always On

Always Off

Backlight remains on during playback

Backlight remains off during playback

Normal Settings

Applies Display Backlight setting (see P.10-7)

Display Size Change playback size

KEnlarge

Main Menu

Media Player

Videos

Settings

Select Display Size A Press b A Select Original

Size, Enlarge or Full Screen

Press b

^ Alternatively, press 0 during playback to toggle Display Size as follows: Full Screen (no indicators) % Full Screen (with indicators) % Original Size % Enlarge

B Press 0 in paused Full Screen view to show or hide indicators.

Sound

Settings

Main Menu

Select Surround or Bass; use LCD Remote/

Mic with Headphones for a more pleasant sound experience

KOff

Media Player

Videos

Settings

Sound

Settings

Select Surround or Bass

Press b

Choose On or Off A Press b

7-14

Editing Video

QVGA (W 240 x H 320 dots) video cannot be edited.

Crop

Subtitle

Select Two Points

Delete Before

Delete After

Save portion between two points as a new file

Save portion before selected point as a new file

Save portion after selected point as a new file

Add subtitles (text) to video

Note H ^ Some files may not be edited.

^ Edited video may not play properly if Memory Card is not formatted for 804SH.

^ To save to Memory Card, a maximum of 300 KB of free memory is required in addition to the file size.

Clipping Portions between Two Points

Follow these steps after Step 4 on P.7-13.

1 While paused or during playback, press N P

2 Select Edit and press b

3 Press N i

^ Incoming transmissions are blocked during editing.

4 Select Crop and press b

5 Select Select Two Points and press b

Video plays.

^ Press b to pause/start video.

6 Press N U at the start point

The start point is specified and playback resumes.

7 Press N E at the end point

The portion is saved.

^ If video has ended before pressing N E, start over from

Step 6.

Note H Portions over 30 minutes may not be saved.

7-15

Cropping Video Clips

Delete the portion before or after the selected point to save the rest as a new file.

Follow these steps after Step 4 on P.7-13.

1 While paused or during playback, press N P

2 Select Edit and press b

3 Press N i

^ Incoming transmissions are blocked during editing.

4 Select Crop and press b

5 Select Delete Before or Delete After and press b

Video plays.

6 Press b at approximate start point

^ The portion before or after the selected point will be deleted.

^ To adjust start point, press b to start/pause video.

C To cancel, press M W.

7 Press N {

The remaining portion is saved as a new file.

Note

Portions over 30 minutes may not be saved.

Adding Subtitles

Set subtitles to appear while playing video. Select timing, add effects, etc.

Entering Text

After entry, set timing and time period for subtitles.

^ Save up to ten subtitles of up to 48 single-byte alphanumerics per entry.

^ Follow these steps after Step 4 on P.7-13.

1 While paused or during playback, press N P

2 Select Edit and press b

3 Press N i

^ Incoming transmissions are blocked during editing.

4 Select Subtitle and press b

5 Select Edit Subtitle and press b

C To delete saved subtitles, select Delete All Subtitle A Press b

Press N i

6 Select a number and press b

7 Enter text and press b

^ Press b to pause/play video.

7-16

8 Press N U at the start point

9 Press N E at the end point

Edit Subtitle menu returns.

^ If video has ended before pressing

N E, start over from Step 8.

^ To complete without changing display settings or adding effects, skip ahead to Step 11.

C To edit text, select Edit Text A

Press b

Edit text

Press b

Edit Subtitle Menu

10 Change display settings/add effects

C To change display settings, select Display Settings

Press b

A See right

C To add effects, select Text Effects

Press b

See P.7-18

C To cancel effects, select Reset Effects A Press b A

Press N i

11 After completing all the settings, press N j

^ To add more, repeat Steps 6 - 11.

C To edit saved subtitles, select one

Press b

Select Edit

A Press b A Select Edit Text A Press b A Start over from Step 7

C To delete saved subtitles, select one A Press b A Select

Delete

Press b

12 Press N E

13 Select Overwrite or Create New and press b

Display Settings

Follow these steps after Step 10 on the right.

Duration Set timing and time period for subtitles

Select Duration

Press b

Press N U at the start point

Press N E at the end point

C When finished, press M W

Perform from Step 11 on the left

Display

Set position for subtitles to appear

Position

Select Display Position

Press b

Use G to select a position

Press b

C When finished, press M W A Perform from Step 11 on the left

Font Size Change font size of subtitles

KHandset (20 x 20)

Select Font Size

Press b

Select Handset (20 x 20) or PC (12 x 12)

Press b

C When finished, press M W A Perform from Step 11 on the left

7-17

Scrolling

Select a direction and visual effect for subtitle scroll

KDirection: Left to Right, Effect: Frame In

Scroll Direction

Select Scrolling

Press b

Select Direction

Press b

Select Left to Right or Right to Left

Press b

C When finished, press M W

Press M W

Perform from Step 11 on P.7-17

Scroll Effects

Select Scrolling A Press b A Select Effect A Press b

A Select an effect A Press b

Frame In

Frame Out

Rolling

Subtitle comes in from an end, then disappears in the centre

Subtitle appears in the centre and scrolls out

Subtitle scrolls from end to end

C When finished, press M W

Press M W

Perform from Step 11 on P.7-17

On-Screen Time

Select Scrolling

Press b

Select On-Screen

Time

Press b

Enter time

Press b

C When finished, press M W A Press M W A

Perform from Step 11 on P.7-17

Background

Select from seven background colours

Colour

KBlack

Select Background Colour

Press b

Select a colour

Press b

C When finished, press M W A Perform from Step 11 on

P.7-17

Adding Text Effects

^ Up to two effects can be applied per entry.

^ Follow these steps after Step 10 on P.7-17.

Font Colour Change font colours

KWhite

Changing Colour of Entire Text

Select Font Colour

Press b

Select All

Press b

Select a colour

Press b

C When finished, press M W

Perform from Step 11 on

P.7-17

Changing Colour of Portion

Select Font Colour A Press b A Select Select Text

A Press b A Use G to select the first character of text

Press b

Use G to select the end of text

Press b A Select a colour A Press b

C When finished, press M W

Perform from Step 11 on

P.7-17

7-18

Highlight Highlight subtitles

Select Highlight

Press b

Use G to select the first character of text

Press b

Use G to select the end of text

Press b

Select a colour

Press b

C When finished, press M W

Perform from Step 11 on

P.7-17

Blink Set subtitles to flash

Select Blink

Press b

Use G to select the first character of text

Press b

Use G to select the end of text

Press b

C When finished, press M W A Perform from Step 11 on

P.7-17

Managing Video & Music Files

Organise video/music files on handset in My Videos and My

Music. All files are saved in All Videos or All Music. Use

Playlists to organise them.

All Videos/All Music Playlist

Classic_music_01

Classic_music_02

Classic_music_03

…

Pops_music_01

Pops_music_02

Pops_music_03

…

Rock_music_01

Rock_music_02

Rock_music_03

…

Classic_music_01

Pops_music_01

Rock_music_02

Rock_music_03

Selected Files

All Files

^ Playlists store only file locations. Source files remain in All

Videos or All Music.

^ Three Playlists are saved by default. To create new Playlists,

see P.7-20.

^ To save to Memory Card, a maximum of 300 KB (video) or 96 KB

(music) of free memory is required in addition to the file size.

^ Use Music Manager on the supplied Utility Software CD-ROM to create Playlists and organise music files via PCs.

7-19

Adding New Playlist

Create up to 99 Playlists in My Videos, My Music and SD

AUDIO each.

^ Playlists cannot be added into SD VIDEO.

^ Playlist 1 to Playlist 3 are saved in My Videos and My Music by default.

Main Menu

Media Player

1 Video Playlists

1 Select Videos and press b

2 Select My Videos and press b

3 Select Phone Memory or Memory Card

Music Playlists

1 Select Music and press b

2 Select My Music or SD AUDIO

2 Press b

C To delete Playlists, select one

Press

N P A Select Delete Playlist A

Press b

Press N i

C To rename Playlists, select one A

Press N P

Select Edit List

Title A Press b A Enter new name

Press b

3 Press N P

4 Select Add New Playlist and press b

5 Enter name and press b

My Videos

Adding Files to Playlists

Add files to Playlists from All Videos or All Music.

^ Playlists store only file locations. Source files remain in All

Videos or All Music.

^ Files in SD VIDEO cannot be added to Playlists.

Main Menu H Media Player

1 Adding Video Files

1 Select Videos and press b

2 Select My Videos and press b

3 Select Phone Memory or Memory Card.

Adding Music Files

1 Select Music and press b

2 Select My Music or SD AUDIO

2 Press b

C To delete saved files, select a Playlist A Press b A Select a file

Press N P

Select Delete

Press b

Press N i

C To move files within a list, select a Playlist

Press b

Select a file A Press N P A Select Change Order A

Press b

Use E to move file

Press b

3 Select All Videos or All Music and press b

4 Select a file and press N P

5 Select Add to Playlist and press b

6 Select a Playlist and press b

File is added to the end of the Playlist.

7-20

Editing SD AUDIO Files

Edit titles and artist names of files in SD AUDIO.

Main Menu

Media Player

Music

SD AUDIO

1 Select a Playlist and press b

2 Select a file and press N P

3 Select Edit and press b

4 Editing Titles

1 Select Title and press b

2 Enter title and press b

Editing Artist Name

1 Select Artist and press b

2 Enter name and press b

Deleting Files in SD VIDEO & SD AUDIO

Delete video files in SD VIDEO and music files in All Music of SD AUDIO.

Source files will be deleted.

Deleting Video Files

Main Menu H Media Player A Videos A SD VIDEO

1 Select a file and press N P

2 Select Delete and press b

3 Press N i

Deleting Music Files

Main Menu H Media Player A Music A SD AUDIO A All Music

1 Select a file and press N P

2 Select Delete Track and press b

3 Press N i

Deleting Files in My Videos/My Music

C Delete files in All Videos and All Music from Videos and

Sounds & Ringtones in Data Folder respectively (see

P.9-15).

7-21

Memory Card

8-1

8-2

Before Use

804SH is compatible with miniSD! Memory Card;

^ miniSD! Memory Card is not included in this package.

Purchase miniSD! Memory Card to use Memory Card-related handset functions.

^ Format a new miniSD! Memory Card for use with 804SH (see

P.8-4).

^ To learn how to save a particular file to Memory Card, refer to that section of the manual.

Memory Card Memory Status

C Press b A

Select Data Folder

Press b

Select

Memory Status A Press b A Select Memory Card A

Press b

^ A portion of Memory Card is reserved for storing copyright information, etc.

Precautions

^ To reduce risk of malfunction, use only recommended miniSD! Memory Card sizes.

^ Turn handset power off before inserting or removing a Memory

Card.

^ Do not place labels or stickers on Memory Card. These items may affect card performance or result in lost information.

^ Use an oil-based felt pen to write on Memory Card. Using a pencil or ballpoint pen may damage the card or result in lost information.

^ Never disassemble or modify a Memory Card.

^ Do not expose Memory Card to strong impacts, pressure or liquids.

^ Do not touch Memory Card terminals or expose them to metal objects.

^ Do not expose Memory Card to direct sunlight or excessive heat (e.g. inside vehicles, etc.).

^ Keep a Memory Card away from dust or high humidity.

^ Do not use in the presence of corrosive gases.

^ Avoid heat sources and do not dispose of in fire.

^ A Memory Card is a consumable item. Card performance deteriorates with usage.

Note

H ^ Vodafone is not liable for any damages resulting from accidental loss/alteration of information. Keep a copy of

Phone Book entries, etc. in a separate place.

^ miniSD! Memory Cards do not have Write Protection

Switch. There is a risk of accidental erasure or overwriting of files.

Tip

The manufacturer recommends the use of 32, 64, 128,

256 or 512 MB cards.

Inserting & Removing Memory Card

Inserting

Turn handset power off.

1 Open cover

Removing

Turn handset power off.

1 Open cover and gently push down on card

^ With a light push, the card pops out.

2 Remove card

^ Using the notch on its edge, pull the card straight out

2 With logo side down, insert card until it clicks

Logo Side Down

3 Close cover

Note

Do not insert other objects into Memory Card Slot; may damage handset/card.

Tip H Insert a Memory Card and turn handset power on.

Standby appears. Memory Card load times vary depending on card size and the amount of information saved.

CClosing Cover

1 Slide cover as shown

2 Push in cover until it clicks

1 2

Note

Never remove Memory Card or battery while files are being accessed. Damage to handset/card may result and files/data may be damaged/lost.

8-3

8-4

Format Card

When using a new miniSD! Memory Card, format it on

804SH for use with 804SH before trying to save files, etc.

Main Menu

H Settings A Connectivity (F) A Memory Card A

Format Card

1 Press N i

Offline Mode is set.

C When handset is connected to the Network, press b.

2 Enter Handset Code

3 Press b

4 Press N i

C To cancel, press M c.

Note

H ^ Before formatting a Memory Card, make sure there is no important information saved on the card. Format

Card deletes all files from Memory Card.

^ Never remove Memory Card or battery while formatting.

^ An improperly formatted Memory Card may not function as it should with 804SH.

Backup & Restore

Back-up entries to Memory Card by function, and restore to handset whenever necessary. All entries of the following functions can be transferred at once:

B Phone Book B Calendar B Tasks

B Text Templates B Bookmarks

All contents are copied to Memory Card as a single file. (File name is the date of transfer.)

Precautions

^ Backup or Restore is not available when battery is low.

^ When a V-application is paused, Application suspended.

End application? appears. Press N i to start Backup or Restore.

^ When handset or Memory Card memory is low, entries may not transfer correctly.

^ Some items may not be transferable. Some backup files may not be usable on other Vodafone handsets, PCs or other devices.

^ Handset stores up to 300 entries between Calendar and

Tasks. If the limit is reached during a transfer, the remaining entries will not be received.

^ Backup file contents can only be accessed when restored to handset.

^ Copy handset entries as backups, share information between miniSD! Memory Card-compatible handsets, or transfer entries to a newly purchased handset.

Handset to Memory Card

Main Menu

H Settings A Connectivity (F) A Memory Card A

Backup/Restore A Backup

1 Enter Handset Code and press b

2 Press N i

Offline Mode is set.

C When handset is connected to the Network, press b.

3 Select an item and press b

C Save phone book pictures as well? appears for Select All or Phone Book. Press N i or M c

C To cancel, press M 3.

Memory Card to Handset

Handset data is overwritten after restoring.

Main Menu

Settings

Connectivity (F)

Memory Card

Backup/Restore

Restore

1 Enter Handset Code and press b

2 Press N i

Offline Mode is set.

C When handset is connected to the Network, press b.

3 Select an item and press b

^ Some items may not be selected.

4 Select a file and press b

^ If there is more than one file, check the date of transfer to select.

Example: 060315XX indicates the file was transferred on 15 March 2006. (XX: 00 - 99 or aa - zz)

^ For Select All, repeat Step 4 for each item.

C To delete files on Memory Card, select one A Press N P

Select Delete

Press b

Press N i

5 Press N i

C To cancel, press M 3.

Tip

For Tasks, due dates that cannot be set on 804SH are overwritten with the restored date and time.

8-5

8-6

Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)

Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) is a standard specification for requesting prints from digital cameras.

Select images from Memory Card and specify the number of copies to print on DPOF-compatible printers, or at digital printing services.

^ DPOF does not support images obtained via Web or MMS.

^ If Memory Card capacity becomes insufficient while in use operation, a warning message appears. Delete files and try.

^ For printing procedures, see the printer manual.

Selecting Images & Prints

To specify the same number of copies for all DCF images on

Memory Card, see P.8-7.

Main Menu

Settings

Connectivity (F)

Memory Card

DPOF

Set Each Copy

1 Select a folder and press b

Thumbnails appear.

2 Use G to select an image and press N W

C To open images, select one A Press b

B Press M W to return.

3 Enter a number of copies to print (00 - 99) and

press b

C Press M W to return.

C To cancel, enter 00

Press b

4 Repeat Steps 2 - 3 for other images

5 Press M K

Note H ^ DPOF settings made on other devices are unusable; delete existing settings to create new ones on 804SH.

^ Some settings may not be supported depending on the printer or printing services.

^ Process may take a while if print settings are made for many images.

^ If image files are deleted or renamed on PCs or other devices, print settings change. Perform Reset Settings

(see P.8-7) and start over with settings.

Print Settings

Number of

Copies

Apply a number to all DCF images to print the same number of copies

K00 Copy

Main Menu

H Settings A Connectivity (F) A Memory Card A

DPOF A Settings for All A Number of Copies

Enter a number (01 - 99)

Press b

Add Date Add dates to prints

Main Menu

KOff

H Settings A Connectivity (F) A Memory Card A

DPOF A Settings for All A Add Date

Choose On or Off

Press b

Index Print Create Index Print (a print with thumbnails)

KOff

Main Menu

Settings

Connectivity (F)

Memory Card

DPOF

Settings for All

Index Print

Choose On or Off

Press b

Check Print

Setting

View current print settings

Main Menu

Settings

Connectivity (F)

Memory Card

DPOF

Settings for All

Select Check Print Setting

Press b

^ UUU may appear for Copies and Total Copies.

Reset Settings Reset DPOF settings

Main Menu

Settings

Connectivity (F)

Memory Card

DPOF

Settings for All

Select Reset Settings

Press b

Press N i

Additional Function

SD Local

Open HTML files on Memory Card to access linked Memory Card files or Mobile Internet

Contents sites

CAvailable only when HTML files are saved on Memory Card.

Main Menu

Settings

Connectivity (F)

Memory Card

SD Local Contents

Select a title

Press b

^ SD Local Contents are saved in PRIVATE/VODAFONE/Local

Contents folder when viewed on PCs.

8-7

Managing Files (Data Folder)

9-1

9-2

Data Folder

804SH files are organised in folders by file format.

Still Images

Data Folder

Pictures

DCIM

Sounds&Ringtones

Custom Screens

V-appli

IC-appli

Videos

Text Templates

Window Description

To open Data Folder from Standby, follow these steps.

Press b A Select Data Folder A

Press b

Memory Status

C To check memory usage status, open Data Folder and follow these steps.

Select Memory Status

Press b

Select

Phone Memory or Memory Card A Press b

^ Delete messages/files when memory is low. Handset performance may be affected when memory is full.

File List

In Data Folder, select a folder and press b. File list appears.

M: Handset c: Memory Card

Access Vodafone Web Menu

Saved Files

Open Options

Pictures

List appearance may differ when Memory Card is not inserted.

Major Icons

CStill Image & Animation Files

Icon y y

Format & Extension

JPEG (.jpg)

PNG (.png)

E-Animation (NEVA files)

(.nva)

Description

JPEG image

PNG image

Animation (may include sound)

CVideo Files

Icon u

Format & Extension

MPEG-4 (.3gp)

MPEG-4 or H.263

(.3gp or .mp4)

CSound Files

Icon Format & Extension

Description

3GPP video image

3GPP video image r

SMAF (.mmf)

Audio (.mp4)

Voice (.amr)

Description

Melody via Web (may include images)

Downloaded Chaku-Uta

Voice/sound recorded on

Voice Recorder

Tip

H i appears for copyright protected files. k appears for files in the public domain.

Sorting Files

Sort by name, date, size or type. This setting applies to all folders except Custom Screens, V-appli, IC-appli and Text

Templates.

Main Menu

Data Folder

1 Select a folder and press b

^ Select a folder other than Custom Screens, V-appli, IC-appli and Text Templates.

C To open a created sub folder or a sub folder in DCIM, select the sub folder A Press b

2 Press N P

^ If Get New is highlighted in file list, skip ahead to Step 4.

3 Select Advanced and press b

4 Select Sort and press b

5 Select a method and press b

Note

It may take a while to sort many files.

Tip

To reverse the order, sort by the same method again.

9-3

9-4

Opening Files

Main Menu H Data Folder

1 Select a folder and press b

File list appears.

C Use F to switch between handset and Memory Card.

C To open a created sub folder or a sub folder in DCIM, select it

Press b

2 Select a file and press b

The content plays or appears.

C Press C (up) or D (down) to adjust

File List (Pictures) volume.

C To switch sound file playback display, select a file

Press N P A Select Item Displayed A Press b A

Select File Name or Title Preferred (default)

Press b

C To zoom in on still images/animations, press N P A

Select Zoom

Press b (Repeat to zoom in more.)

B Alternatively, for images in Pictures folder, press b to zoom in. (Press repeatedly to zoom in more.)

B After maximum zoom, image appears in standard scale.

B To zoom out, press N P A

Select Zoom Out

Press b

C To view still images in full-screen, press N P

Select

Full Screen A Press b

3 Press i to return to file list

^ Press i twice to return to file list from full-screen view.

Slide Show

C All images in Pictures or DCIM folder appear sequentially.

In file list, select a file A Press N P A Select

Slide Show

Press b

B Press b to stop.

Activating Mobile Camera

C Open file list in Pictures, DCIM or Videos folder and follow these steps.

Press N P A Select Take Picture or Record

Video

Press b

B Mobile camera activates in Photo Camera mode from

Pictures and DCIM folders, or in Video Camera mode from Videos folder.

B If Get New is highlighted in file list, select a file first.

B To capture still images, perform from Step 1 on P.6-5.

B To record video, perform from Step 2 on P.6-7.

C Mobile Camera can be activated from file list only when a file is saved.

Activating Voice Recorder

C Open file list in Sounds & Ringtones folder and follow these steps.

Press N P

Select Record Voice

Press b

B If Get New is highlighted in file list, select a file first.

B To record voice/sounds, perform from Step 2 on P.11-15.

C Voice Recorder can be activated from file list only when a file is saved.

Selecting Multiple Files

Select multiple files in a folder to move, copy or delete them all at the same time.

Main Menu

Data Folder

1 Select a folder and press b

^ Select a folder other than Custom Screens, V-appli, IC-appli and Text Templates.

C To open a created sub folder or a sub folder in DCIM, select it

A Press b

2 Select a file and press N P

3 Select Advanced and press b

4 Select Multiple Select and press b

5 Select a file and press b

P appears to the right of the file name.

C To uncheck, select a file with P A Press b

6 Repeat Step 5 to select more

^ Copy, move, or delete files.

C To check all, press N P

Select Select All

Press b

C To uncheck all, press N P A Select Unselect All A

Press b

Properties

Main Menu

Data Folder

1 Select a folder and press b

^ Select a folder other than Text Templates.

C To open a created sub folder or a sub folder in DCIM, select it

Press b

2 Select a file and press N P

3 Select Details or Information and press b

^ Press D to scroll down.

^ The following information appears:

File name, type, size, last modified date, vendor, copy/forward protection and other restrictions (number of times to open, expiry term).

B Available information vary by file.

SVG Files

804SH supports SVG-T (Scalable Vector Graphics-Tiny).

View graphics in SVG files, including tables and maps.

^ For more information on SVG-T, visit http://www.sharp.co.jp/j/

(Japanese only).

^ Key Assignments:

Scroll

Zoom

Rotate

2 (Down), 4 (Right), 6 (Left), 8 (Up)

1 (Zoom Out), 3 (Zoom In), 5 (100%)

7 (Anticlockwise), 9 (Clockwise)

Key Action Mode 0

Tip H Some features may not be available depending on the

SVG file.

9-5

9-6

MMS Mail Attachments

Attach files to MMS Mail from Data Folder.

^ Use Text Templates to paste the saved text into message text.

^ Files in Custom Screens folder cannot be attached.

Main Menu H Data Folder A Open a folder

1 Select a file and press N P

2 Select Send and press b

C For files in Text Templates folder, select Send Template A

Press b

Skip ahead to Step 4

3 Select As Message and press b

C For large JPEG images, select attachment size

Press b

4 Complete other fields and send MMS Mail

(perform from Step 3 on P.14-6)

Printing Images

Connect 804SH to a printer via Bluetooth and print JPEG/

PNG images.

^ Use a Bluetooth-compatible printer.

^ Activate Bluetooth on the printer.

Main Menu

Data Folder

1 Select Pictures, DCIM or Other Documents and

press b

2 Select a still image and press N P

3 Select Print and press b

4 Select Via Bluetooth and press b

Device search starts.

5 Select a device and press b

Printing starts.

C When requested, enter passcode A Press b

C When transmission is in progress, press N i.

^ When printing completes, printer stops automatically.

C To cancel, press M 3

Press N K

Note

H ^ Images may not be printed correctly depending on the file or printer status.

^ Copy protected files cannot be printed even if printing rights are granted.

Using Files

Use Data Folder files as Wallpaper, Phone Book Picture,

Ringtone and Ringvideo.

^ Set as Wallpaper, Add to Ph.Book, as Ring Video and Set

as Ringtone can be selected only for compatible files.

^ Some files may not be used depending on the size.

Note H Some copyright protected files (s or u) cannot be used even if Set as Wallpaper, Add to Ph.Book or as Ring

Video appears.

Wallpaper

Main Menu H Data Folder

1 Select Pictures or Other Documents and press b

2 Select a file and press N P

3 Select Set as Wallpaper and press b

4 Press b

Wallpaper is set.

Saving to Phone Book

Main Menu H Data Folder

1 Select Pictures, Sounds&Ringtones or Videos

and press b

2 Select a file and press N P

3 Select Add to Ph.Book and press b

C For more, perform Step 4 in "Saving from Dialled Numbers/

Received Calls" on P.4-7.

Ringvideo & Ringtone

Assign video or sound file as Ringvideo or Ringtone for

Voice Calls. Files on Memory Card are not supported.

Ringvideo

Main Menu

Data Folder

Videos

1 Select a file and press N P

2 Select as Ring Video and press b

Ringtone

Main Menu

Data Folder

Sounds&Ringtones

1 Select a file and press N P

2 Select Set as Ringtone and press b

9-7

9-8

Editing Still Images

Changing Image Size

Resize images in Pictures folder to use for Wallpaper,

Alarm, etc.

^ Alternatively, crop image for size or enlarge/reduce portions.

(File size changes when images are resized.)

^ Images can only be resized when Picture Editor appears.

Resize to Preset Size

Main Menu

H Data Folder A Pictures A Select a file

A Options (N) A Picture Editor A Resize

1 Select from To Wallpaper to

Alarm and press b

A rectangle appears on the image

(except for To Wallpaper and Power On/

Off).

To Wallpaper

Power On/Off

W 240 x H 320 dots

For Incoming Call W 176 x H 144 dots

Alarm W 240 x H 104 dots

For Incoming Call

2 Use G to specify display area

^ Display area may be unspecifiable depending on image size.

C To start over from selecting preset size, press M W.

3 Press b

4 Press M q

5 Enter name and press b

Image is saved to Data Folder as a new entry.

Cropping Images

Main Menu

Data Folder

Options (N)

Pictures

Select a file

Picture Editor

Resize

1 Select Cut and press b

2 Use G to move W to the upper left corner of the

portion to crop and press b

3 Use G to move W to the lower right corner of the

portion to crop and press b

C To cancel, press M W

Start over from Step 1

C To enlarge/reduce, press N P A Select Resize A

Press b

Press C (enlarge) or D (reduce)

4 Use G to specify display area

^ Display area may be unspecifiable depending on image size.

C To cancel, press M W.

5 Press b

6 Press M q

7 Enter name and press b

Image is saved to Data Folder as a new entry.

Visual Effects (Retouch)

Dress up images with pre-loaded visual effects.

Apply to W 52 x H 52 dots or larger JPEG/PNG images including Continuous Shoot images.

Main Menu

Data Folder

Options (N)

Pictures

Select a file

Picture Editor

Retouch

1 Select an effect and press b

^ Retouch Effects:

Sepia

Sparkling

Ripples

Tile

Renders image in sepia tone

Adds sparkling effect to bright portions of image

Superimposes widening rings over image

Adds a brick frame around image

Emboss

Oil Painting

Renders image in black and white relief

Renders image as a blurred image

Clear Frame Adds a transparent 3D frame around image

Round Frame Adds a round, opaque frosting around image

Soft Frame Adds a soft, opaque edged frame around image

Zigzag Frame Adds a jagged edged frame around image

C To start over, press M W.

2 Press b

3 Press M q

4 Enter name and press b

Image is saved to Data Folder as a new entry.

Note

Edited images may be too large to save or send via MMS.

Adding Text & Stamps

Text/stamps can only be added when Picture Editor appears.

Main Menu

H Data Folder A Pictures A Select a file A

Options (N) A Picture Editor

1 Adding Text

1 Select Paste and press b

C To specify colour, press N P

Select Change

Colour A Press b A Select a combination A

Press b

2 Select Free Text and press b

C To enter the date, select Date A Press b A Skip ahead to Step 2

3 Enter text and press b

^ Enter up to 16 characters.

^ Scan Code feature is disabled.

C To re-enter text, press M W

Start over from

Step 2

Adding Stamps

1 Select Stamp and press b

2 Select a stamp and press b

C To change the stamp, press MW A Start over from Step 2

2 Use G to move text or stamp to target location

and press b

3 Press M q

4 Enter name and press b

Image is saved to Data Folder as a new entry.

9-9

Face Arrange

Make smiley, angry or sad faces.

^ Apply to JPEG and PNG images.

^ Use portrait images.

^ Face Arrange may not fit all images. Adjust position and size as required (see right).

^ Face Arrange can only be applied when Picture Editor appears.

Main Menu

H Data Folder A Pictures A Select a file A

Options (N) A Picture Editor A Face Arrange

1 Select a type and press b

^ Face Arrange Types:

Collage:

Right-half

Collage:

Left-half

Grin

Mad

Sad

Big Eyes

Copies right side of face onto left side

Copies left side of face onto right side

Pulls eyes down & mouth up

Pulls eyes up & mouth down

Pulls eyes & mouth down

Adds graphic eyes

Burning Eyes Adds flames in the eyes

Crying Adds tears

Aristocrat

Angry Mark

Adds a monocle and moustache

Adds a stress mark to face

C To check current positions of targets, perform Step 1 on the right.

B Press M W to return.

C To start over, press M W.

2 Press b

3 Press M q

4 Enter name and press b

Image is saved to Data Folder as a new entry.

Note

When using Face Arrange, take care not to create images that may embarrass or offend others. Always obtain permission before photographing others.

Adjusting Face Arrange Position

Change the default positions and sizes of targets to fit the image. Changes apply to the current image only.

1 In Step 1 on the left, press N P, select

Positioning and press b

2 Press N u

A rectangle appears with W in the upper left corner.

3 Set the face line b

Use G to move

W to the upper left corner

Use G to move

W to the lower right corner

C To start over, press M W.

Face line is set

9-10

4 Set the eyes and then mouth in the same way b b

Right Eye Left Eye

^ When finished, all the targets appear.

Mouth

^ To readjust targets, start over from Step 2 on P.9-10.

C To restore the original positions, press M W.

5 Press b

6 Press N i

Image is saved to Data Folder as a new entry with Face Arrange positions adjusted, and Face Arrange menu returns.

^ Complete Face Arrange. Face Arrange is applied to the adjusted positions.

Additional Picture Effects

These effects can only be applied when Picture Editor appears.

Frame Add Frame to JPEG and PNG images

Main Menu

H Data Folder A Pictures A Select a file A

Options (N) A Picture Editor A Frame

Select a frame

Press b

Press M q

Enter name

Press b

Rotate Rotate images

Main Menu

H Data Folder A Pictures A Select a file A

Options (N) A Picture Editor A Rotate

Select a type

Press b

Press M q

Enter name

Press b

File Format & Size

C Convert file format and change file size.

B Follow these steps before saving a file after applying effects with Picture Editor.

^ Converting File Format

Select Format A Press b A Select File Format A Press b

A Select a format A Press b A Press M W

B Changing file format may affect file size and image quality.

^ Changing File Size

Select Format

Press b

Select File Size

Press b

Select a size

Press b

Press M W

B Changing file size may affect image quality.

9-11

Panorama Images

Combine two still images into one.

Select two images

Panorama Image Effects:

Merge Panorama

Standard

Near View

Applicable to all kinds of shots

Best suited for close-up shots with parallax correction

Use for images with text Document

^ Use JPEG images between W 48 x H 64 and W 120 x H 160 dots/W 160 x H 120 dots.

^ Some portions may be cropped to adjust two images to the same size.

^ The result may not be satisfactory if colour tones are different between two images.

Main Menu

H Data Folder A Pictures A Select a file

Options (N) A Composite

This image appears on the left when combined.

1 Select Merge Panorama and press b

Left image is set.

^ Merge Panorama is disabled if image is too large or too small.

2 Select x and press b

3 Select another image and press b

Two images are set.

^ If the image is too large or too small, select another.

4 Select EFFECT and press b

5 Select from Standard to

Document and press b

C To check images, select either

Press b

B Press M W to return.

C To change images, select either A

Press b

Press N X

Select an image A Press b

6 Press M q

7 Press b

8 Enter name and press b

Image is saved to Data Folder as a new entry.

Merge Panorama

Window

9-12

Split Screen

Combine up to four reduced images into one.

^ Apply to JPEG and PNG images.

^ Make sure there is enough free memory.

^ Images are placed in the upper left, upper right, lower left and lower right in numerical order.

Split Image

Main Menu

H Data Folder A Pictures A Select a file

Options (N) A Composite

This image appears in the upper left when combined.

1 Select SplitPicture 240x320 or SplitPicture

120x160 and press b

Upper left image is set.

2 Select x and press b

3 Select an image and press b

Two images are set.

4 Repeat Steps 2 - 3 to add images

^ In Step 2, select y or z.

C To preview Split Picture, press N P A Select Full

Screen

Press b

B Press M W to return.

C To change images, select one

Press b A Press N X A

Select an image

Press b

Split Picture

Preview

C To delete images, select one A Press N P A Select

Remove

Press b

Press N i

5 Press M q

6 Enter name and press b

Image is saved to Data Folder as a new entry.

9-13

Text Templates

Save frequently used phrases for use in mail message, etc.

Save up to 50 entries of up to 256 characters each.

New Entry

Main Menu

H Data Folder A Text Templates A <Add New

Entry>

1 Enter text and press b

Tip

To paste saved text into text entry windows, see P.3-13

"Using Text Templates".

Alternatively, see P.9-6 to open Data Folder and paste

saved text into message text.

Opening Templates

Main Menu

Data Folder

Text Templates

1 Select a file and press b

C Press M W to return.

Editing Templates

Main Menu

H Data Folder A Text Templates A Select a file A

Options (N) A Edit

1 Edit text and press b

File is overwritten.

Deleting Templates

Delete single Text Templates.

Main Menu

Data Folder

Options (N)

Text Templates

Select a file

Delete

1 Press N i

Managing Files & Folders

Adding Folders

^ Assign different names to folders within a layer.

^ Folders cannot be added to Custom Screens, DCIM, V-appli,

IC-appli and Text Templates folders.

Main Menu H Data Folder

1 Select a folder and press b

^ Select a folder other than Custom Screens, DCIM, V-appli,

IC-appli and Text Templates.

2 Press N P

C For Other Documents folder, after Step 2, select Advanced

A Press b

B Omit these steps when Other Documents folder is empty.

3 Select Create Folder and press b

4 Enter name and press b

9-14

Changing File/Folder Name

^ File extensions do not change.

^ Assign different names to files/folders within a layer.

B Single-byte Symbols V, /, :, ;, ., <, >, |, ?, U and ” are not supported.

^ Make sure there is enough free memory.

^ Folders/files in DCIM, V-appli, IC-appli and Text Templates folders cannot be renamed.

B Text blocks that appear in Text Templates file list are initial portions of Text Templates. They are not file names and thus cannot be changed with these steps. (To change them, edit the initial portions of Text Templates.)

Main Menu

Data Folder

1 Select a folder and press b

^ Select a folder other than DCIM, V-appli, IC-appli and Text

Templates.

2 Select a file or folder and press N P

3 Select Rename and press b

4 Edit name and press b

Deleting Files & Folders

Delete files and created folders in Data Folder.

^ Delete folder contents before deleting folders.

^ To delete files in Text Templates folder, see P.9-14 "Deleting

Templates". To delete V-applications and IC-appli, see P.16-6

"Deleting V-applications".

Main Menu

Data Folder

1 Select a folder and press b

^ Select a folder other than V-appli, IC-appli and Text Templates.

2 Deleting Folders

1 Select a folder and press N P

Deleting Single Files

1 Select a file and press N P

Deleting Multiple Files

1 Perform from Step 2 on P.9-5 to select

multiple files and press N P

3 Select Delete and press b

4 Press N i

9-15

Copying/Moving Files

Copy or move files to the corresponding folder on Memory

Card or to created sub folders within the folder (handset or

Memory Card).

^ Copy or move files in DCIM folder to Pictures folder (handset or Memory Card).

^ Copy/forward protected files cannot be copied.

^ Some files may not be copied or moved.

^ Files in V-appli, IC-appli and Text Templates folders cannot be copied or moved.

Main Menu H Data Folder

1 Select a folder and press b

^ Select a folder other than V-appli, IC-appli and Text Templates.

C To open a created sub folder or a sub folder in DCIM, select it

A Press b

2 Copying/Moving Single Files

1 Select a file and press N P

Copying/Moving Multiple Files

1 Perform from Step 2 on P.9-5 to select

multiple files and press N P

^ Skip ahead to Step 4.

3 Select Advanced and press b

4 Select Copy or Move and press b

5 Open a target folder and press b

Note

H ^ Files copied or moved to Memory Card may not be usable on other Vodafone handsets, PCs or other devices.

^ If a copy protected file is included in the selected files,

Could not copy files. Please check files or Memory

Status appears; remaining files are copied.

^ Name of copied or moved file may change when the same name already exists in the folder.

9-16

Additional Settings/Connectivity

10-1

Mode Settings

Activate Normal, Meeting, Activity, Car, Headset or Manner mode to change multiple 804SH settings at one time; each mode is a basket of defaults tailored to each usage pattern.

Activating a Mode

Mode Settings Select from six modes

KNormal

Main Menu

Settings

Phone Settings (F)

Mode Settings

Select a mode

Press b

Customising Modes

Personalise

Customise volume, Ringtone/Ringvideo, system sounds, vibration and Mobile/Small

Light settings for each mode

Main Menu

Settings

Phone Settings (F)

Mode Settings

Select a mode

Press N P

Select

Personalise

Press b

Select an item

Press b

Customise settings (see P.10-10 - 10-13)

Any Key

Answer

Activate or cancel Any Key Answer (see P.2-5)

for each mode

KNormal/Meeting/Activity/Manner: Off, Car/Headset: On

Main Menu

Settings

Phone Settings (F)

Mode Settings

Select a mode A Press N P A Select

Personalise

Press b

Select Any Key Answer

Press b A Choose On (activate) or Off A Press b

Answer Phone

Activate or cancel Answer Phone for incoming calls in Manner mode

CAvailable for Manner mode only.

KOn

Main Menu H Settings A Phone Settings (F) A Mode Settings

Select Manner

Press N P

Select

Personalise

Press b

Select Answer Phone

Press b

Choose On (activate) or Off

Press b

Note

In Manner mode, Answer Phone setting in Mode Settings

takes priority over that in Tools (see P.2-8).

Reset

Set to Default Reset settings for each mode

Main Menu

Settings

Phone Settings (F)

Mode Settings

Select a mode A Press N P A Select Set to

Default

Press b

Enter Handset Code

Press b

Press N i

10-2

Display

Display Settings

Wallpaper Use Wallpaper to show an image in Standby

Main Menu

KCitrus

H Settings A Phone Settings (F) A Display A

Wallpaper

Select Preset Pictures, My Pictures or Other

Documents

Press b

Select an image

Press b twice

C To cancel, select Blank

Press b

Restoring Custom Screen Wallpaper

C When Wallpaper is set while Custom Screen is active,

Wallpaper takes priority over Custom Screen Wallpaper.

(Custom Screen remains active.)

To restore Custom Screen Wallpaper, follow these steps after opening Wallpaper menu.

Select Custom Screen

Press b twice

Note

H ^ If mail arrives while setting Wallpaper, setting may take up to 30 seconds to complete; 804SH will not accept

Voice Calls until Wallpaper setting is finished.

^ Some images may be incompatible/not appear correctly.

Tip

H ^ When a V-application is set as Screensaver, Wallpaper may not appear.

^ Using Wallpaper shortens Battery Time.

System

Graphics

Main Menu

Use images for Power On/Off, incoming calls and Alarm windows

KPower On/Power Off: Preset Animation,

Incoming Voice Call/

Incoming Video Call/Alarm: Pattern 1

H Settings A Phone Settings (F) A Display A

System Graphics

Power On/Power Off

Select Power On or Power Off

Press b

Select

Preset Animation, My Pictures or Other Documents

Press b twice

C For My Pictures and Other Documents, select an image

Press b twice

Incoming Calls/Alarm

Select Incoming Voice Call, Incoming Video Call or

Alarm

Press b

Select from Pattern 1 to Pattern 3,

My Pictures and Other Documents A Press b twice

C For My Pictures and Other Documents, select an image

Press b twice

^ Select My Pictures or Other Documents to use images in

Data Folder. If a rectangle appears, use G to specify display area and press b.

Restoring Custom Screen System Graphics

C When System Graphics are set while Custom Screen is active, System Graphics take priority over Custom Screen

System Graphics. (Custom Screen remains active.)

To restore to Custom Screen System Graphics for Incoming

Voice Call, Incoming Video Call or Alarm, follow these steps after opening the corresponding menu.

Select Custom Screen

Press b twice

10-3

Note

H ^ Ringtone and Ringvideo images for Mode Settings may take priority over System Graphics for incoming calls.

^ Ringtone, Ringvideo and Picture images for Phone

Book entries take priority over System Graphics for incoming calls with caller ID.

Font Settings Change the weight of handset fonts

KNormal

Main Menu

Settings

Phone Settings (F)

Display

Font Settings

Select a weight

Press b

Greeting

Message

Main Menu

Create a short text message to appear on

Display each time handset power is activated

KOff

Settings

Phone Settings (F)

Display

Greeting Message

Edit Message

Select Edit Message

Press b

Enter a message

Press b

^ Enter up to 10 characters.

^ To set the message to appear, choose On in Switch On/Off.

Switch On/Off

Select Switch On/Off

Press b

Choose On or

Off

Press b

Show

Operator Name

Main Menu

Show or hide the name of your service provider (Vodafone JP, etc.) in Standby

KOff

Settings

Phone Settings (F)

Display

Show Operator Name

Choose On (name appears) or Off A Press b

Language

Switch handset interface between Japanese and English

KAutomatic

Main Menu H Settings A Phone Settings (F) A 言語選択

Select Automatic, English or 日本語 A

Press b

^ For Automatic, interface language switches according to language information on USIM Card.

Custom Screens

Download and install applications that load single-themed handset Wallpaper, menu windows, indicators, Ringtones and more, all at the same time.

^ In addition to preloaded Custom Screens, use Custom

Screens downloaded via Web.

^ See P.10-6 to use preloaded Custom Screens (Calm light,

Soft square and DJ MICKEY).

^ Calm light is installed by default.

^ Custom Screen Catalogues (z) are saved in handset Data

Folder (Custom Screens).

Custom Screen Catalogues are introductory samples and cannot be set.

10-4

Downloading Custom Screens

To download Custom Screens, open handset Data Folder

(Custom Screens).

^ Some Custom Screens are fee-based.

^ To use fee-based Custom Screens, download Custom Screen

Keys to handset (see right).

^ Custom Screens and Custom Screen Keys are downloaded via Web. Make sure signal is strong.

^ Custom Screens can be downloaded via カスタモ (http:// www.custamo.com/) using a PC.

Note

Read information (Custom Screen Key price, expiry date, etc.) on Custom Screen Key download page.

Main Menu H Data Folder A Custom Screens

1 Select Get New and press b

Handset connects to the Network and download page appears.

C To download from Custom Screen Catalogues (z), select one

A Press b A Press N g A Press N i

2 Download a Custom Screen

^ Read through information on the site.

^ When using a PC, download a Custom Screen to the following directory on a Memory Card. Do not change file name, extension, etc.

B PRIVATE/VODAFONE/My Items/Themes

CPurchasing Custom Screen Keys

Main Menu

Data Folder

1 Select Custom Screens and press b

Available Custom Screens appear.

^ Types of Custom Screens and their Indicators:

Type

Fee-based

Key

Found

Not Found

Status

Active

Inactive

Active

Inactive

Active

Inactive

Indicator n i m k o

Free

N/A

N/A None

C Use F to switch between handset and Memory Card.

2 Select a Custom Screen for which to download

the Key and press N P

^ Select one with k.

3 Select Activate and press b

10-5

4 Press N i

Handset connects to the Network and download page appears.

^ Custom Screen Key download page contains the following information:

B Custom Screen Key price

B Payment method

B Terms of service

B Link to customer enquiry service

C To cancel, press M 3.

5 Read through terms of service and download

Custom Screen Key following online instructions

6 After download, press N K

7 Press N i

C To cancel setting, press M c.

8 Press N K

Custom Screen is set and Data Folder (Custom Screens) returns.

Note H Replacing USIM Card with one containing different customer information, or turning on handset without

USIM Card inserted deletes all downloaded Custom

Screen Keys; handset repairs may also delete Custom

Screen Keys. If handset number is unchanged, however, previously downloaded Keys may be re-downloaded at no charge (transmission fees apply).

Delete

Delete Custom Screen and Custom Screen

Key

Main Menu

Data Folder

Custom Screens

Select a Custom Screen

Press N P

Select

Delete

Press b

Press N i

C To delete the corresponding Custom Screen Key at the same time, press N i.

B To cancel, press M c. (Only Custom Screen will be deleted.)

^ Custom Screen Keys cannot be deleted independently.

^ Delete preloaded Custom Screen Catalogues as needed.

Web Access Access Custom Screen source sites

Main Menu

Data Folder

Custom Screens

Select a Custom Screen

Press N P

Select

Web Access

Press b

^ Web Access does not appear if source site is not available.

Custom Screen Setup

Custom Screen setup may take some time. (Pressing g does not cancel setup.)

CPreset Custom Screens

Main Menu

H Settings A Phone Settings (F) A Custom

Screens A Preset Screens

1 Select Calm light, Soft square or DJ MICKEY and

press b

10-6

CCustom Screens in Data Folder

Main Menu

Data Folder

1 Select Custom Screens and press b

Available Custom Screens appear.

(Types of Custom Screens and their Indicators: see P.10-5)

C Use F to switch between handset and Memory Card.

2 Select a Custom Screen and press b

^ Custom Screens with j cannot be set.

^ Select a Custom Screen and press N P to open properties, change file names or copy/move to other folders

(see P.9-5, P.9-15, P.9-16).

3 Press N g

4 Press N K

Custom Screen is set and Data Folder (Custom Screens) returns.

Note

H ^ Some Custom Screens may not contain files for

Wallpaper, System Graphics, Ringtones or Ringvideos; default settings apply for these functions.

^ Custom Screen setup may fail when battery is low or depending on the contents.

Tip

Once installed, Custom Screen remains active even after

Memory Card is removed or replaced with another.

Light Settings

Backlight

Main Menu

Select Display and Keypad Backlight illumination time or Display Brightness

KTime Out: 15 seconds, Brightness: Level 2

H Settings A Phone Settings (F) A Display A

Backlight

Backlight Illumination Time

Select Time Out

Press b

Select time

Press b

C To disable Backlight, choose Off

Press b

Display Brightness

Select Brightness

Press b

Use E to adjust level

Press b

Tip

Keypad light Brightness is fixed.

Display Saving

Select a period of inactivity after which Display shuts down

K2 minutes

Main Menu

Settings

Phone Settings (F)

Display

Display Saving

Select a period

Press b

10-7

External Display Settings

Switch On/Off Activate or deactivate External Display

KOn

Main Menu

H Settings A Phone Settings (F) A Display A

External Display A Switch On/Off

Choose On (activate) or Off

Press b

Backlight

Main Menu

Select Backlight illumination time for External

Display

K15 seconds

H Settings A Phone Settings (F) A Display A

External Display A Backlight

Select time

Press b

C To disable Backlight, choose Off A Press b

LCD Contrast

Adjust External Display Contrast from nine levels

KLevel: 5

Main Menu

Settings

Phone Settings (F)

Display

External Display

LCD Contrast

Use E to adjust level

Press b

Caller Display

Main Menu

Show or hide caller's number or name on

External Display

KOn

Settings

Phone Settings (F)

Display

External Display

Caller Display

Choose On (show) or Off A Press b

Viewing Images on External Devices

Use optional Video Cable to connect 804SH to a TV, VCR, etc. to view images or exportable V-applications saved on

804SH/Memory Card.

^ Exportable Sources:

B V-applications B Picture Viewer B Video Player

^ Some images and sounds will not play on external devices.

^ When V-applications, etc. are viewed on external devices, images do not appear on handset Display.

^ Not available when handset is closed.

Connecting to External Devices

Video/Audio Input of External Devices

(Yellow)

(Red)

(White)

Video Cable

AC 100V

10-8

Precautions

Observe the following when connecting TV, VCR, etc. and handset:

^ Turn off the device before connecting/disconnecting Video

Cable.

^ Connect Video Cable only to the video/audio inputs of the device and VIDEO OUT Connector of 804SH. Video Cable is designed exclusively for 804SH.

^ Plug in firmly. To disconnect, grasp the plug and pull gently.

^ Do not pull, twist or bend Video Cable to avoid damaging the cable and handset VIDEO OUT Connector.

Selecting TV System

Main Menu

H Settings A Phone Settings (F) A Display A

Video Output A TV System

1 Select NTSC or PAL and press b

Note

Use NTSC in Japan. Outside Japan, select either according to available TV system.

Activating Video Output

^ Connect 804SH to device before activating Video Output.

^ Video Output is Off by default.

Main Menu

H Settings A Phone Settings (F) A Display A

Video Output A Switch On/Off

1 Choose On and press b

C To cancel, choose Off A Press b

2 View exportable images, video, etc.

^ When exporting V-application or video images, press j to toggle display between device and handset.

B Video restarts each time display is switched.

^ Exiting Video Output:

B Press g

B Press M W (for images/video)

B Press i (for images/video)

B Close handset

10-9

Toggle Display Size

C Activate Video Output and follow these steps.

Select Display Size A Press b A Select Original

Size or Enlarge

Press b

Rotate Image

C Activate Video Output and follow these steps.

Select Rotation Setting

Press b

Select from

No Rotation to 180°

Press b

B Images in Pictures folder and V-applications cannot be rotated.

Full Screen Display

C Follow these steps while viewing images.

Press N P

Select Full Screen

Press b

^ Some images may not be supported.

Note

H ^ While Video Output is in use, control the volume on the connected device. Turn down the volume before disconnecting from handset.

^ Images may be noisy or distorted depending on the device. Images may be cropped vertically when enlarged.

Tip

Battery drains faster when Video Output is in use.

Sounds & Alerts

Customising Handset Responses

Volume Set Ringtone volume/general volume

Main Menu

Settings

Phone Settings (F)

Sounds &

Alerts

Volume

Select For Incoming Call, For New Message or

General Volume A Press b A Use G to adjust level

A Press b

^ Select from five levels. When Increasing Volume is set, volume increases every four seconds from Level 1 to Level 5.

Increasing Volume is not available for General Volume.

^ Corresponding Sounds:

For Incoming Call

For New Message

General Volume

Ringtones/Ringvideos for incoming

Voice/Video Calls

Ringtones/Ringvideos for incoming mail

System sounds, Data Folder sound file playback

Note H ^ Chaku-Uta set as Ringtone plays at Level 1 even when

Increasing Volume is set.

^ For better hearing, avoid covering handset speaker

(External Display side) and keep it up when placing handset on a table, etc.

10-10

Ringtone/

Ringvideos

Set Ringtones or Ringvideos for Voice Calls,

Video Calls and mail

Main Menu

Settings

Phone Settings (F)

Sounds &

Alerts

Ringtone/Ringvideos

Assign Tone

Select For Voice Call, For Video Call or For New

Message A Press b A Select Assign Tone A Press b

Select Preset Sounds or My Sounds

Press b

Select sound A Press N U

C For My Sounds, select a file and press b.

C To play tones in Preset Sounds, select one and press b.

B Press b to stop.

C To play files in My Sounds, select one and press N P

A Select Play A Press b

B Press M W to stop.

Assign Video

Select For Voice Call, For Video Call or For New Message

Press b

Select Assign Video

Press b

Select video

Press b

C To play video files, select one and press N P A Select

Play A Press b

B Press M W to stop.

Duration

Select For New Message

Press b

Select

Duration

Press b

Enter time (01 - 99)

Press b

Restoring Custom Screen Ringtone/Ringvideo

C When Ringtone/Ringvideo is set while Custom Screen is active, Ringtone/Ringvideo takes priority over Custom Screen

Ringtone/Ringvideo. (Custom Screen remains active.)

To restore Custom Screen Ringtone/Ringvideo, follow these steps after opening For Voice Call, For Video Call or For

New Message menu.

Select Custom Screen A Press b A Press N

Note

H ^ Some files may not be usable.

^ When files are downloading or streaming, default

Ringtone/Ringvideo may sound/play for Voice Calls.

^ V-application set as Screensaver that also responds to incoming communications may take priority.

Tip

Video files over 3 MB and 3GPP video may take up to three seconds to appear after calls/mail arrive.

Vibration Handset vibrates for incoming calls/mail

Main Menu

KOff

Settings

Phone Settings (F)

Sounds &

Alerts

Vibration

Activating/Deactivating

Select For Incoming Call or For New Message

Press b

Select Switch On/Off

Press b

Select On, Link to Sound or Off

Press b

^ Link to Sound: Handset vibrates only when Ringtone is a compatible SMAF file.

Vibration Pattern

Select For Incoming Call or For New Message

Press b

Select Vibration Pattern

Press b

Select from Pattern 1 to Pattern 5

Press b

C To check vibration patterns, select one and press N L.

B Press N C to stop.

10-11

Note

Disable vibration when charging.

Event Light

Main Menu

Select whether to illuminate Mobile Light for incoming calls/mail

KOn

Settings

Phone Settings (F)

Sounds &

Alerts

Event Light

Activating/Deactivating

Select For Voice Call, For Video Call or For New

Message

Press b

Select Switch On/Off

Press b A

Select On, Link to Sound or Off

Press b

^ Link to Sound: Mobile Light illuminates only when Ringtone is a compatible SMAF file.

Selecting Light Colour

Select For Voice Call, For Video Call or For New

Message

Press b

Select Light Colour

Press b

Select a colour

Press b

C To check colours, select one and press N L.

B Press N C to stop.

Status Light

Main Menu

Select whether to illuminate Mobile/Small Light for missed incoming calls/mail

KOn (Mobile Light)/Green

Settings

Phone Settings (F)

Sounds &

Alerts

Status Light

Activating/Deactivating

Select For Missed Call, For New Message or For

Answer Phone

Press b

Select Switch On/Off

Press b

Select On (Mobile Light), On (Small

Light) or Off

Press b

Selecting Mobile Light Colour

Select For Missed Call, For New Message or For

Answer Phone

Press b

Select Mobile Light

Colour

Press b

Select a colour

Press b

C To check colours, select one and press N L.

B Press N C to stop.

Customising System Sounds

Keypad Tones A tone sounds when a key is pressed

Main Menu

KTouch Tone

Settings

Phone Settings (F)

Sounds &

Alerts

System Sounds

Keypad Tones

Assign Touch Tone

Select Touch Tone

Press b

Assign a Pattern

Select Pattern 1, Pattern 2 or Pattern 3

Press N U

C To check patterns, select one and press b.

B Press b to return.

Disable Keypad Tones

Choose Off

Press b

10-12

Warning Tone &

Power On/Off Sound

Main Menu

Select a tone to sound for errors or when turning power on/off as well as its duration

KWarning Tone: Sound Effect 6 (0.5 seconds),

Power On/Off Sound: Sound Effect 8 (3 seconds)

H Settings A Phone Settings (F) A Sounds &

Alerts A System Sounds

Sound Pattern

Select Warning Tone, Power On Sound or Power Off

Sound

Press b

Select Tone or Sound

Press b A

Select Preset Sounds or My Sounds

Press b A

Select sound

Press N U

C For My Sounds, select a file and press b.

C To play tones in Preset Sounds, select one and press b.

B Press b to stop.

C To play files in My Sounds, select one and press N P

A Select Play A Press b

B Press M W to stop.

Duration

Select Warning Tone, Power On Sound or Power Off

Sound

Press b

Select Duration

Press b

Select/enter time

Press b

Disable Tone

Select Warning Tone, Power On Sound or Power Off

Sound

Press b

Select Tone or Sound

Press b A

Choose Off

Press b

Additional Sound Setting

Surround Activate or deactivate speaker surround

KOn

Main Menu

Settings

Phone Settings (F)

Sounds &

Alerts

Surround

Choose On, Link to Sound or Off

Press b

Note

Sounds skip when handset is opened while playing

Chaku-Uta, music or video with Surround On. This is not a malfunction.

Date & Time

See indicated pages for these items.

World Clock

See P.11-13

Alarm

See P.11-10

Set Date/Time Set the date and time

Main Menu

H Settings A Phone Settings (F) A Date & Time

A Set Date/Time

Enter the year

Enter the month

Enter the day

Enter the time (24-hour clock format)

Press b

^ The day of the week is set automatically.

Note

When removing the battery for replacement, etc., Clock settings remain. However, should the handset go without power for an extended period of time (approximately one week), Clock will need to be reset.

Tip

H ^ When Clock has not been set, --/--/-- --:-- appears for date and time.

^ To correct numbers, use F to move cursor and re-enter digits.

^ Choose a Clock type or use Calendar for Standby (see

P.10-14).

10-13

Set Time Zone/

Daylight Saving

Main Menu

Change Time Zone or activate Daylight Saving

KTime Zone: Tokyo, Daylight Saving: Off

Settings

Phone Settings (F)

Date & Time

Time Zone

Select Set Time Zone

Press b

Use F to select a Time Zone

Press b

C If your zone is not preset, press N P A Select Set

Custom Zone A Press b A Enter city name (up to 16 characters) A Press b A Use E to select + or - A Press A

A Enter time difference A Press b

Daylight Saving

Select Daylight Saving

Press b

Choose On

Press b

C To cancel, select Daylight Saving A Press b A Choose

Off A Press b

^ Activate Daylight Saving to advance handset local time by one hour.

Display

Date & Time

Main Menu

Show or hide Clock/Calendar in Standby

KClock: Large, Calendar: Off

Settings

Phone Settings (F)

Display Date & Time

Date & Time

Clock

Select Show Clock

Press b

Select Large,

Small or World Clock

Press b

C To hide Clock, choose Off A Press b

Calendar

Select Show Calendar

Press b

Select 1 month or 2 months

Press b

C To hide Calendar, choose Off

Press b

CCalendar Contents

Current Date

^ Highlighted

Scheduled Date

^ Underlined

(see P.11-2 "Calendar" for schedules)

Tip H ^ Calendar appears on Wallpaper.

^ When a V-application is set as Screensaver, Calendar may not appear.

Date/Time

Format

Main Menu

Change date/time format

KTime Format: 24 Hour, Date Format: Y/M/D

Settings

Phone Settings (F)

Date & Time

Time Format

Select Time Format

Press b

Select 24 Hour or

12 Hour

Press b

Date Format

Select Date Format

Press b

Select D.M.Y,

M-D-Y or Y/M/D

Press b

Calendar

Format

Select whether to start the week on Sunday or

Monday

KSunday-Saturday

Main Menu

Settings

Phone Settings (F)

Calendar Format

Date & Time

Select Sunday-Saturday or Monday-Sunday

Press b

10-14

Wake-up Alarm

Main Menu

Set handset to turn on automatically to announce Alarm Time

KOff

Settings

Phone Settings (F)

Wake-up Alarm

Date & Time

Choose On A Press b

C To cancel, choose Off

Press b

User Dictionary

Entries (Japanese Only)

Save frequently used words/phrases. Assign a reading

(keyword) in hiragana to each entry. In text entry windows, enter a reading and convert. Saved words/phrases appear among word suggestions.

^ Save up to 100 entries.

^ Save up to five words/phrases per reading.

New Entry Save words/phrases to User Dictionary

Main Menu

Settings

Phone Settings (F)

User

Dictionary

New Entry

Enter a word/phrase

Press b

Enter a reading

(keyword)

Press b

^ Enter up to 15 characters per word/phrase and eight characters in hiragana per reading.

Edit/Delete Edit or delete entries

Main Menu

Settings

Phone Settings (F)

User

Dictionary

Edit Dictionary

Edit

Select a word/phrase

Press N P

Select

Edit

Press b

Edit the word/phrase

Press b

Edit reading

Press b

Press N i

Delete

Select a word/phrase

Press N P

Select

Delete

Press b

Press N i

804SH Download Dictionary (Japanese Only)

Download specialised 804SH Download Dictionaries from

Sharp's Space Town Mobile Internet site (see P.15-6).

Activate up to two dictionaries at one time to improve handset character conversion. Dictionary words appear among word suggestions.

Acquire

Dictionary

Activate downloaded dictionary

Main Menu

Settings

Phone Settings (F)

User

Dictionary

Acquire Dictionary

Select Dictionary 1 or Dictionary 2

Press b

Select a dictionary

Press b

C To replace dictionaries, select one and press N P

Select Change

Press b

Select a dictionary

Press b

Note H Some dictionary files may not be usable.

10-15

Cancel Cancel dictionary

Main Menu

Settings

Phone Settings (F)

User

Dictionary

Acquire Dictionary

Select a dictionary

Press N P

Select

Cancel

Press b

Information View dictionary information

Main Menu

Settings

Phone Settings (F)

User

Dictionary

Acquire Dictionary

Select a dictionary

Press N P

Select

Information

Press b

Handset Security

For more information on PIN, see P.1-6.

PIN Entry

Select whether to require PIN every time handset is turned on (with USIM Card inserted)

KOff

Main Menu

Settings

Phone Settings (F)

Locks

PIN

Entry

Switch On/Off

Choose On or Off

Press b

Enter PIN1

Press b

PIN Lock

C PIN1 Lock or PIN2 Lock is activated if PIN1 or PIN2 is incorrectly entered three times consecutively. To cancel PIN1

Lock or PIN2 Lock, follow these steps.

Open a function requiring PIN1 or PIN2 A Enter

Personal Unblocking Key (PUK Code)

Press b

Enter new PIN1 or PIN2

Press b

Re-enter

PIN1 or PIN2

Press b

^ For information on Personal Unblocking Key (PUK Code), contact Vodafone Customer Centre, General Information

(see P.18-24).

^ If PUK Code is incorrectly entered ten times, USIM Card is locked. (Count continues even if handset power is turned off.)

^ For procedures required to unlock USIM Card, contact

Vodafone Customer Centre, General Information (see

P.18-24).

Change PIN Change PIN1 or PIN2

CActivate PIN Entry first.

Main Menu H Settings A Phone Settings (F) A Locks

PIN1

Select PIN Entry

Press b

Select Change PIN

Press b

Enter current PIN1

Press b

Enter new PIN1

Press b

Re-enter new PIN1

Press b

PIN2

Select Change PIN2

Press b

Enter current

PIN2

Press b

Enter new PIN2

Press b

Re-enter new PIN2 A Press b

10-16

Handset Locks

Handset Lock

Activate Handset Lock to require Handset

Code each time handset power is turned on

KOff

Main Menu

H Settings A Phone Settings (F) A Locks A

Handset Lock

Choose On

Press b

Enter Handset Code

Press b

C To cancel, choose Off

Press b

Enter Handset Code

Press b

Note H Emergency calls (110, etc.) are possible even when

Handset Lock is active. For more, see P.2-4 "Emergency

Calls".

Function Lock Restrict access to handset functions

Main Menu

KOff

H Settings A Phone Settings (F) A Locks A

Function Lock

Enter Handset Code

Press b

C To unlock, enter Handset Code in Standby or during a call

Press b

^ Function Lock remains active even if handset power is deactivated, then reactivated.

When Function Lock is Active

C In Standby, press g for 2+ seconds to deactivate handset power, q for 1+ seconds to activate/cancel Keypad Lock,

0 - 9 to enter Handset Code or i to edit Handset

Code entry.

C During a call, press g to end the call, N or b to show/hide

Options or switch images during Video Calls, M to mute/ unmute Microphone, f to switch between callers in Call

Waiting, 0 - 9 to enter Handset Code or i to edit

Handset Code entry.

C When a call arrives, press N to show Options. Answer calls

by pressing f or keys for Any Key Answer (see P.2-5), or

reject calls by pressing g. Press M to forward incoming calls (when No Answer is set for Diverts).

Note

Emergency calls (110, etc.) are possible even when Function

Lock is active. For more, see P.2-4 "Emergency Calls".

Phone Book

Lock

Main Menu

Protect Phone Book entries from accidental alteration and restrict access to Phone Book information

KOff

Settings

Phone Settings (F)

Locks

Phone Book Lock

Choose On

Press b

Enter Handset Code

Press b

C To cancel, choose Off

Press b

Enter Handset Code

Press b

Note H When Phone Book Lock is active, the following Phone

Book operations are disabled:

B Searching, saving, editing and dialling, including

Speed Dial (see P.4-14).

10-17

Secret Mode

Activate Secret Mode to open Secret Mode entries.

Show

Secret Data

Activate or cancel Secret Mode

KOff

Main Menu

Settings

Phone Settings (F)

Locks

Show Secret Data

Choose On

Press b

Enter Handset Code

Press b

C To cancel Secret Mode, choose Off A Press b

Note

Do not save confidential information in Phone Book/ schedule entries. Handset Code and thus Secret Mode entries may be compromised.

When Secret Mode is Off

C Phone Book Names/Picture images do not appear for incoming calls/mail from numbers/addresses in Secret Mode entries. Personal Ringtones/Ringvideos are disabled.

Names for numbers in Secret Mode entries do not appear in

Dialled Numbers, Received Calls or list of received messages.

Changing Handset Code

Change

Handset Code

Whenever necessary, change Handset Code

K9999

Main Menu

H Settings A Phone Settings (F) A Locks A

Change Handset Code

Enter current Handset Code

Press b

Enter new Handset Code

Press b

Re-enter new

Handset Code

Press b

Reset

Reset Settings

Cancel custom settings and return handset functions to their default settings

Main Menu

H Settings A Phone Settings (F) A Master Reset

A Reset Settings

Enter Handset Code

Press b

Press N i twice

^ Phone Book entries are unaffected.

^ A confirmation appears (before entering Handset Code) in the following cases. Press N i to proceed.

B V-application is active B Music Player is active

B Bluetooth is active B Infrared is active

Note H Some default settings may not be restored.

10-18

Reset All

Clear all Phone Book entries, Data Folder files, etc.

Main Menu

Settings

Phone Settings (F)

Reset All

Master Reset

Enter Handset Code

Press b

Press N i twice

^ A confirmation appears (before entering Handset Code) in the following cases. Press N i to proceed.

B V-application is active B Music Player is active

B Bluetooth is active B Infrared is active

Note

H ^ Files and records deleted by Reset All cannot be restored.

Handset Code returns to the default setting. Reset All deletes downloaded V-applications and IC-appli.

^ Preloaded Custom Screen Catalogues and

V-applications are restored.

^ Reset All is disabled if IC Card (see P.17-2) data

remains. Delete IC Card data beforehand.

Call Settings

See indicated pages for these items.

Voicemail & Diverts

Call Waiting

See P.12-3,

P.12-2

Show My Number

See P.12-5

Call Barring

See P.12-9

See P.12-6

International Call

Int'l Prefix Save frequently used international prefix

Main Menu

K0046010

Settings

Call/Video Call (F)

Call Settings

Int'l Calling

Int'l Prefix

Enter a prefix

Press b

Country Codes Change, add or delete Country Codes

Main Menu

Settings

Call/Video Call (F)

Call Settings

Int'l Calling

Country Codes

Change

Select a country

Press b

Select Change

Press b A Enter a country name A Press b A

Enter country code

Press b

Add

Select a blank entry

Press b

Enter a country name

Press b

Enter country code

Press b

Delete

Select a country A Press b A Select Delete A

Press b

Press N i

Tip H For details, contact Vodafone Customer Centre, General

Information (see P.18-24).

Auto Add Code

Main Menu

Add a preset country code automatically when placing calls

KOff/Country Code: 81 (Japan)

H Settings A Call/Video Call (F) A Call Settings

A Int'l Calling A Auto Add Code

Activating/Deactivating

Select Switch On/Off A Press b A Choose On or

Off

Press b

Set Country Code

Select Country Code

Press b

Select a country

Press b

C To enter a country code, select Enter Code in Country Code list

Press b

Enter a country code

Press b

Note

When Auto Add Code is active, preset country code is added to all phone numbers (other than emergency call numbers) unless W is included.

10-19

Additional Settings

Minute Minder Handset beeps once each minute during calls

KOff

Main Menu

H Settings A Call/Video Call (F) A Call Settings

A Minute Minder

Choose On (handset beeps) or Off

Press b

^ Handset beeps every minute.

Call Time

Counter

Main Menu

Show or hide elapsed Call Time during a call

KOn

H Settings A Call/Video Call (F) A Call Settings

A Time & Cost A Call Time Counter

Choose On (Call Time appears) or Off

Press b

Display

Call Cost

Show or hide Call Cost after each call

KOn

Main Menu

Settings

Call/Video Call (F)

Time & Cost

Display Call Cost

Call Settings

Choose On (Call Cost appears) or Off

Press b

Bluetooth

Getting Started

Bluetooth is a wireless technology that allows 804SH to communicate with other 804SH within 10 m or with other compatible devices (PCs, mobile phones, handsfree devices, etc.).

Precautions

Handset Bluetooth Specifications:

Communication System Bluetooth specification Ver. 1.2

Bluetooth Profiles

Supported

Output

Headset Profile

Hands-Free Profile

Dial-up Networking Profile

Object Push Profile

File Transfer Profile

Basic Imaging Profile

Bluetooth Power Class 2

^ Bluetooth connections are available with compatible devices supporting the same profile.

^ Bring handsets to within 10 m. Bluetooth connection/transfer rate is affected by distance between handsets, obstructions, signal conditions, handset status, etc.

^ Bluetooth operates in the 2.4 GHz unlicensed frequency band.

Depending on the status of other devices used in the spectrum, Bluetooth connection may slow down/terminate, or the range may decrease.

^ Connect 804SH to one device at a time via Bluetooth.

10-20

Note

Bluetooth connection may not be possible with some

Bluetooth devices.

^ Handset shall be connected to certified Bluetooth devices that meet the specification standards developed by Bluetooth SIG.

^ Depending on characteristics or specifications of the certified Bluetooth devices, connection or data transfers may fail, or operational procedures, display content and actual operations may differ from those described in this manual.

^ Noise may interfere with wireless or handsfree conversations depending on the status of connected devices or signal conditions.

^ For details about headset/handsfree devices, see the device manuals.

Activating Bluetooth

Activate Bluetooth before receiving files/entries or connecting handset to handsfree devices.

Bluetooth is Off by default.

Main Menu

Settings

Connectivity (F)

Bluetooth

Switch On/Off

1 Choose On and press b

Handset returns to Standby and 2 appears.

C To cancel, choose Off A Press b

B When transmission is in progress, press N i.

Note

Connection requests from other devices can only be accepted when handset is in Standby or while Main Menu is opened. Files/entries/folders can only be received when handset is in Standby.

Bluetooth Connection

Activate Bluetooth (see left) on recipient device. Connection starts when a request is received from the other device.

(Authorisation Code may be required.)

CExample

Sender Recipient

Search for devices

Activate Bluetooth

Select device

Request connection

Enter the same Authorisation Code

Connection completes

Send Receive

Authorisation Code

C Authorisation Codes (4 to 16 digits) are specific for Bluetooth connection. Pairing is possible when Authorisation Codes of both devices match.

^ Authorisation Codes are not necessary for paired devices.

10-21

Device Search & Pairing

Search for Bluetooth devices for pairing. Paired devices are automatically registered to handset.

^ Authorisation Codes are not necessary for paired devices.

^ Search for up to 16 devices at a time.

^ Device search is disabled if 32 devices are already registered.

^ Activate Bluetooth on devices to be paired with.

Main Menu

Settings

Connectivity (F)

Bluetooth

1 Select Search for Devices and press b

Found devices are listed after search. (The previous search result appears, if any.)

^ Device Indicators:

9: PC

6: Handsfree device A: Mobile phone

8: Others

7: Wireless headset @: PDA

C: Printer

C Press M 3 to cancel.

2 Select a device and press b

C When transmission is in progress, press N i.

3 Enter the same Authorisation Code (4 to 16 digits) for handset and the other device and

press b

When pairing is complete, Pairing is successful. appears and

Standby returns.

^ For handsfree devices, enter specified Authorisation Code.

^ Complete code entry within 30 seconds.

Pairing with Handsfree Devices

C Start device search with handsfree devices for pairing.

Handset receives a connection request A

Press N i

Enter Authorisation Code

Press b

^ Activate Bluetooth (see P.10-21) on handset and set

Visibility (see below) to Show My Phone.

Opening Paired Device List

Main Menu

Settings

Connectivity (F)

Bluetooth

1 Select Paired Devices and press b

List of all paired devices appears.

C To open list of handsfree devices only, press A.

C To rename paired devices, select one

Press b

Enter name (up to 16 characters) A Press b

C To delete paired devices, select one

Press N P

Select Delete A Press b A Press N i

Visibility

Allow other Bluetooth devices to find 804SH during device search.

^ Set Visibility to Hide My Phone to hide 804SH from other

Bluetooth devices.

^ Visibility is set to Show My Phone by default.

Main Menu

H Settings A Connectivity (F) A Bluetooth A

Visibility

1 Select Show My Phone or Hide My Phone and

press b

10-22

Transferring Files via Bluetooth

Transfer Options

One File Transfer

All File Transfer

Receive Folder

Transfer files/entries one by one. Received files/entries are saved to corresponding functions.

Transfer all files/entries by function

Receive a folder and its contents. Folders are saved to Data Folder. (804SH does not support sending folders.)

Note H ^ During infrared transfers or Bluetooth transmissions, handset automatically enters Offline Mode. Thus transfers are disabled while receiving calls/messages, during calls, while using Web or Media Player, while editing mail or data, etc. Offline Mode is cancelled after transfers.

^ Some entries in Phone Book, Calendar, Tasks, Text

Templates and Bookmarks may not be saved correctly.

Transferable Files

Function

Phone

Book

One File All Files

Available Available

Notes

In One File transfers, the following settings are lost:

Category, Secret and

Ringtone. All File transfer includes My Details. Picture setting may be lost depending on the image.

Function

Calendar

Tasks

One File

Available

All Files

Notes

In One File transfers, Reminder tone and Secret Mode settings are lost. Entries with start date/ time that cannot be set on

804SH are lost.

In One File transfers,

Reminder tone and Secret

Mode settings are lost.

Entries with due date/time that cannot be set on 804SH are overwritten with the date/ time of transfer.

Text

Templates

Available

Bookmarks

Data Folder

Available

Entries with the same title as the existing ones are lost. In One

File transfers, received entries are saved to Data Folder (Other

Documents) as an unknown file.

Files or sub folders in DCIM folder and copy protected files cannot be transferred

In All File transfers, Calendar and Tasks are sent together from

Appointments/Tasks.

Only receiving files/entries is supported.

Receive folders one by one into handset Data Folder.

Tip

H ^ Handset stores up to 300 entries between Calendar and Tasks. If the limit is reached during a transfer, the remaining entries will not be received.

^ Transfer files in Memory Card Data Folder one by one.

Files in DCIM folder cannot be transferred.

10-23

One File Transfer

CSending

Send one file or entry from Phone Book, Calendar, Tasks or

Data Folder (see P.10-23).

1 Select a file or entry and press N P

2 Select Send, Send Entry or Send My Card and

press b

3 Select Via Bluetooth and press b

^ When there is no entry in Paired Devices, device search starts.

C To send files/entries to unpaired devices, select More

Devices A Press b A Device search starts

4 Select a device and press b

C When transmission is in progress, press N i.

5 Prepare recipient device

6 Press b

Offline Mode is set and transfer starts.

C When requested, enter Authorisation Code A Press b

CReceiving

Main Menu

Settings

Connectivity (F)

Bluetooth

Switch On/Off

1 Choose On and press b

Bluetooth is activated and handset returns to Standby.

2 When connection is requested, Calling not

available during operation, OK? appears

C To accept connection request from unpaired devices, press N i

Enter Authorisation Code

Press b

3 Press N i

Offline Mode is set and transfer starts.

C Press M 3 to cancel.

C Press g to end.

4 Confirmation appears when file or entry is received

5 Press N i to save

C To cancel transfer, press M c A Press N i

10-24

All File Transfer

CSending

Main Menu H Settings A Connectivity (F) A Bluetooth

1 Select Send All and press b

^ When there is no entry in Paired Devices, device search starts.

C To send files/entries to unpaired devices, select More

Devices

Press b

Device search starts

2 Select a device and press b

C When transmission is in progress, press N i.

3 Press N i

Offline Mode is set.

4 Enter Handset Code and press b

5 Prepare recipient device

6 Select an item and press b

Transfer starts.

C When requested, enter Authorisation Code A Press b

C For Phone Book, Picture data in Phone Book transfer? appears. Press N i or M c.

CReceiving

Main Menu

Settings

Connectivity (F)

Bluetooth

Switch On/Off

1 Choose On and press b

Bluetooth is activated and handset returns to Standby.

2 When connection is requested, Calling not

available during operation, OK? appears

C To accept connection request from unpaired devices, press N i

Enter Authorisation Code

Press b

3 Press N i

Offline Mode is set.

4 Transfer starts and confirmation appears

C Press M 3 to cancel.

C Press g to end.

5 Adding Entries

1 Select As New Items and press b

When transfer completes, handset returns to Standby.

C Press M 3 to cancel.

C Press g to end.

Overwriting Existing Entries

1 Select Delete All & Save and press b

2 Press N i

3 Enter Handset Code and press b

When transfer completes, handset returns to Standby.

^ When Phone Book is overwritten, My Details except handset phone number is overwritten as well.

C Press M 3 to cancel.

C Press g to end.

10-25

Receiving Folders

Receive folders from compatible devices and save to handset Data Folder.

^ 804SH does not support sending folders.

^ 804SH receives folders when it can newly create a folder, or a folder with the same name already exists in the same layer as that of sender's.

^ For sender's procedures, see the device manual.

Main Menu

H Settings A Connectivity (F) A Bluetooth A

Switch On/Off

1 Choose On and press b

Bluetooth is activated and handset returns to Standby.

2 When connection is requested, Calling not

available during operation, OK? appears

C To accept connection request from unpaired devices, press N i A Enter Authorisation Code A Press b

3 Press N i

Offline Mode is set and transfer starts.

When finished, handset returns to Standby.

C If a folder with the same name already exists, press N i or M c.

C Press M 3 to cancel.

C Press g to end.

Connecting Handsfree Devices

Pair with handsfree devices beforehand (see P.10-22).

Main Menu

Settings

Connectivity (F)

Bluetooth

Paired Devices

1 Press A

List of paired handsfree devices appears.

2 Select a device and press b

The device is connected and P (checked) appears.

C When transmission is in progress, press N i.

C To disconnect, select a device A Press b

C To rename paired devices, select one

Press N P

Select Change Name A Press b A Enter name A Press b

Sound Output

C Switch sound output between handset and handsfree devices.

While talking on the phone, press N P

Select Transfer Audio

Press b

Select To

Handset or To Bluetooth

Press b

^ Select To Handset to talk on handset.

^ If To Bluetooth is selected while a handsfree device is not connected, list of paired handsfree devices appears.

10-26

Note

H ^ While talking on handsfree devices, adjust volume on the device.

^ Place calls from handsfree devices while handset is in

Standby.

Tip H ^ Devices marked with P reconnect to handset when placing or receiving calls.

^ O indicates that the device is not selected. When O is set to the connected device, a confirmation appears.

Bluetooth Settings

Device Name Specify a Bluetooth name for handset

K804SH

Main Menu

Settings

Connectivity (F)

Bluetooth Settings

Device Name

Bluetooth

Enter name

Press b

^ Enter up to 16 characters. (Pictographs are not available.)

Bluetooth

Timeout

Main Menu

Set idle time before Bluetooth is deactivated

KNo Timeout

Settings

Connectivity (F)

Bluetooth Settings

Bluetooth

Bluetooth Timeout

Select time

Press b

C To cancel, select No Timeout

Press b

Handsfree

Setting

Main Menu

Select whether to talk handsfree when placing calls from handset

KHandsfree mode

Settings

Connectivity (F)

Bluetooth

Bluetooth Settings

Handsfree Setting

Select Private mode or Handsfree mode A Press b

^ When placing calls from handsfree devices, only handsfree conversation is available regardless of the setting.

OPP

Authentication

Select whether or not to require Authorisation

Code for file transfers

KOn

Main Menu

H Settings A Connectivity (F) A Bluetooth A

Bluetooth Settings A OPP Authentication

Choose On (require) or Off

Press b

Encode

Contact

Main Menu

Encode Phone Book when sending entries

KOff

H Settings A Connectivity (F) A Bluetooth A

Bluetooth Settings A Encode Contact

Choose On or Off

Press b

My Phone

Details

Open Bluetooth-related handset properties

Main Menu

H Settings A Connectivity (F) A Bluetooth A

Bluetooth Settings

Select My Phone Details

Press b

10-27

Infrared

Getting Started

Infrared is a wireless technology that allows 804SH to communicate with other compatible devices (PCs, mobile phones, etc.).

Precautions

^ Align Infrared Ports within 20 centimetres with no obstructions between handsets.

Within 20 cm

^ Keep Infrared Ports aligned during transfer.

^ Transfers in direct sunlight, under fluorescent lighting or near infrared equipment may fail.

^ Dust/oil may impair file transfers; clean Infrared Ports with a soft cloth beforehand.

^ Infrared transfers are disabled while sending/receiving mail or using Web.

^ 804SH complies with IrMC 1.1, but some files may not be exchanged.

Tip H When transfer fails, Device not found. Reconnect? appears.

Take the precautions on the left and press N i to try again.

Authorisation Code

C Authorisation Codes (four digits) are specific for infrared transfers. All File transfers are possible when Authorisation

Codes of both devices match.

Transferring Files via Infrared

Transfer Options

One File Transfer

All File Transfer

Receive Folder

Transfer files/entries one by one. Received files/entries are saved to corresponding functions.

Transfer all files/entries by function

Receive a folder and its contents. Folders are saved to Data Folder. (804SH does not support sending folders.)

Note H ^ Transfers are disabled while using Web or Media

Player, while editing mail or files, etc.

^ Some entries in Phone Book, Calendar, Tasks, Text

Templates and Bookmarks may not be saved in whole or part.

10-28

Transferable Files

Function

Phone

Book

Calendar

Tasks

One File All Files

Available Available

Available

Notes

All File transfer includes My

Details. Picture setting may be lost depending on the image.

In One File transfers,

Reminder tone and Secret

Mode settings are lost.

Entries with start date/time that cannot be set on 804SH are lost.

In One File transfers,

Reminder tone and Secret

Mode settings are lost.

Entries with due date/time that cannot be set on 804SH are overwritten with the date/ time of transfer.

Text

Templates

Available

Bookmarks

Available

Entries with the same title as the existing ones are lost. In

One File transfers, received entries are saved to Data

Folder (Other Documents) as an unknown file.

Function

Data Folder

One File

Available

All Files

Notes

Files or sub folders in DCIM folder and copy protected files cannot be transferred.

In All File transfers, Calendar and Tasks are sent together from

Appointments/Tasks.

Only receiving files/entries is supported.

Receive folders one by one into handset Data Folder.

Tip H ^ Handset stores up to 300 entries between Calendar and Tasks. If the limit is reached during a transfer, the remaining entries will not be received.

^ Transfer files in Memory Card Data Folder one by one.

Files in DCIM folder cannot be transferred.

One File Transfer

CSending

Send one file or entry from Phone Book, Calendar, Tasks or

Data Folder (see left and above).

1 Select a file or entry and press N P

2 Select Send, Send Entry or Send My Card and

press b

3 Select Via Infrared and press b

4 Prepare recipient device

5 Press N i

Offline Mode is set and transfer starts.

When finished, file or entry list returns.

10-29

CReceiving

Main Menu

Settings

Connectivity (F)

Infrared

Switch

On/Off

1 Select On (5 min.) and press b

Infrared is activated and handset returns to Standby.

^ Acquire infrared transmission within five minutes.

2 When connection is requested, Calling not

available during operation, OK? appears

3 Press N i

Offline Mode is set and transfer starts.

C Press M 3 to cancel.

C Press g to end.

4 Confirmation appears when file or entry is received

5 Press N i to save

C To cancel transfer, press M c

Press N i

All File Transfer

CSending

Main Menu

Settings

Connectivity (F)

Infrared

1 Select Send All and press b

2 Press N i

Offline Mode is set.

3 Enter Handset Code and press b

4 Select an item and press b

5 Prepare recipient device

6 Enter Authorisation Code and press b

Transfer starts. When finished, Send All menu returns.

C For Phone Book, Picture data in Phone Book transfer? appears. Press N i or M c.

CReceiving

Main Menu

Settings

Connectivity (F)

Infrared

Switch

On/Off

1 Select On (5 min.) and press b

Infrared is activated and handset returns to Standby.

^ Acquire infrared transmission within five minutes.

2 When connection is requested, Calling not

available during operation, OK? appears

3 Press N i

Offline Mode is set.

4 Enter Authorisation Code and press b

^ Enter the same Authorisation Code as sender's.

5 Transfer starts and confirmation appears

C Press M 3 to cancel.

C Press g to end.

6 Adding Entries

1 Select As New Items and press b

When transfer completes, handset returns to Standby.

C Press M 3 to cancel.

C Press g to end.

10-30

Overwriting Existing Entries

1 Select Delete All & Save and press b

2 Press N i

3 Enter Handset Code and press b

When transfer completes, handset returns to Standby.

^ When Phone Book is overwritten, My Details except handset phone number is overwritten as well.

C Press M 3 to cancel.

C Press g to end.

Receiving Folders

Receive folders from compatible devices and save to handset Data Folder.

^ 804SH does not support sending folders.

^ 804SH receives folders when it can newly create a folder, or a folder with the same name already exists in the same layer as that of sender's.

^ For sender's procedures, see the device manual.

Main Menu

Settings

Connectivity (F)

Infrared

Switch

On/Off

1 Select On (5 min.) and press b

Infrared is activated and handset returns to Standby.

^ Acquire infrared transmission within five minutes.

2 When connection is requested, Calling not

available during operation, OK? appears

3 Press N i

Offline Mode is set and transfer starts.

When finished, handset returns to Standby.

C If a folder with the same name already exists, press N i or M c.

C Press M 3 to cancel.

C Press g to end.

Mass Storage

^ Activate Mass Storage and connect 804SH to a PC via USB

Cable to access Memory Card from the PC without removing the card from 804SH.

^ Activating Mass Storage activates Offline Mode.

^ Mass Storage is not available when battery is low (L or B).

Main Menu

Settings

Connectivity (F)

1 Select Mass Storage and press b

Calling not available during operation, OK? appears.

2 Press N i

3 Connect 804SH to a PC via USB Cable

^ If it is already connected, remove it then reconnect it.

4 Press M W to exit

5 Press N i

^ Safely remove handset (recognised as removable hardware device) on the PC, then disconnect USB Cable.

10-31

Network Settings

See P.2-15 for information on Select Service.

Select Network Select a Network to connect

Main Menu

KAutomatic

H Settings A Network Settings (F) A Select

Network

Select Manual

Press b

Select a Network

Press b

C To change Network automatically, select Automatic A

Press b

^ Use default setting unless connecting to a specific Network.

Set Preferred

Set priority of Networks to be selected when

Automatic is set in Select Network

Main Menu

H Settings A Network Settings (F) A Select

Network A Set Preferred

Inserting Network

Select a place to insert

Press b

Select Insert

Press b

Select a Network

Press b

^ Network is inserted above the selected entry.

Adding Network to the End

Press b A Select Add to end A Press b A Select a Network

Press b

Deleting Network

Select a Network

Press b

Select Delete

Press b

Add, Edit &

Delete

Add, edit or delete Networks

Main Menu

Settings

Network Settings (F)

Select

Network

Add New Network

Adding Network

Select Add

Press b

Enter a country code

Press b

Enter a Network code

Press b

Enter name

Press b

Select Select network type

Press b

Select a Network type

Press b

^ Add up to 5 Networks.

^ After selecting Add New Network and pressing b, Network list appears if Network has already been added. In this case, press b again and perform above operations.

^ Use up to 3 digits for country code and Network code, and up to 25 single-byte alphanumerics for name.

Editing Network

Select a Network

Press b

Select Change

Press b

Edit settings

^ Edit in the same manner as in "Adding Network" above.

Deleting Network

Select a Network

Press b

Select Delete

Press b

Network Info Check Network Information

Main Menu

Settings

Network Settings (F)

Select Network Info

Press b

10-32

Internet Settings

Under normal conditions, use the default settings. Create and use custom Profiles to access specific hosts.

Custom Profile Items

Web/MMS/Streaming Profiles

See P.10-34 for procedures.

CWeb Settings

Setting

Profile Name

Proxy

Use Proxy

Access Point

Home

Note

Up to 60 single-byte alphanumerics

Select from the list (available when Use

Proxy is On)

Choose On or Off

Select from the list (available when Use

Proxy is Off)

Up to 128 single-byte characters

(available when Use Proxy is Off)

CMMS Accounts

Setting

Profile Name

Proxy

Relay Server URL

Note

Up to 60 single-byte alphanumerics

Select from the list

Up to 128 single-byte characters

CStreaming Settings

Setting

Profile Name

Proxy Address

Proxy Port Number

Access Point

Note

Up to 60 single-byte alphanumerics

Up to 64 digits

1 - 65535

Select from the list

Proxy Profiles

See P.10-35 for procedures.

Setting

Proxy Name

Proxy Address

Access Point

Home

Port Number

Authentication Type

User Name

Password

Note

Up to 60 single-byte alphanumerics

Up to 64 digits

Select from the list

Up to 128 single-byte characters

1 - 65535

HTTP-BASIC or HTTP-DIGEST

Up to 16 single-byte characters

Access Point Profiles

See P.10-35 for procedures.

Setting

Access Point Name

APN

Authentication Type

User Name

Password

DNS

Linger Time

Note

Up to 60 single-byte alphanumerics

Up to 64 digits

NONE, PAP or CHAP

Up to 32 single-byte characters

Up to 16 single-byte characters

Up to 15 digits

1 - 99999 seconds

10-33

10-34

Creating & Editing Custom Profiles

Web & Streaming

See P.10-33 for available items.

Create New

Create new Profiles for Web or Streaming connections

Main Menu

Settings

Network Settings (F)

Internet Setting

Select Web Settings or Streaming Settings

Press b

Select Create New

Press b

Select an item

Press b

Enter text/select an item

Press b

Press N P

Select Set

Press b

Activate

Select a Profile to be used for Web or

Streaming connections

Main Menu

Settings

Network Settings (F)

Internet Setting

Select Web Settings or Streaming Settings

Press b

Select a Profile

Press b

Edit Edit custom Profiles

Main Menu

Settings

Network Settings (F)

Internet Setting

Select Web Settings or Streaming Settings

Press b A Select a Profile A Press N P A

Select Edit

Press b

Select an item

Press b

Edit contents

Press b

Press N P

Select Set

Press b

Press N i

Copy Copy custom Profiles

Main Menu

Settings

Network Settings (F)

Internet Setting

Select Web Settings or Streaming Settings A Press b A

Select a Profile

Press N P

Select Copy

Press b

Enter Profile Name (see P.10-33)

Press b

Delete Delete Profiles

Main Menu

Settings

Network Settings (F)

Internet Setting

Select Web Settings or Streaming Settings

Press b

Select a Profile

Press N P

Select Delete

Press b

Press N i

MMS Accounts

See P.10-33 for available items.

Create New Create new Profiles for MMS connections

Main Menu

Messaging

Mail Settings

MMS Settings

MMS Accounts

Create New

Select an item

Press b

Enter text/select an item

Press b

Press N P

Select Set

Press b

Activate

Select a Profile to be used for MMS connections

Main Menu

Messaging

Mail Settings

MMS Settings

MMS Accounts

Select a Profile

Press b

Edit Edit custom Profiles

Main Menu

Messaging

Mail Settings

MMS Settings

MMS Accounts

Select a Profile

Press N P

Select Edit

Press b

Select an item

Press b

Edit contents

Press b

Press N P

Select

Set

Press b

Press N i

Copy Copy custom Profiles

Main Menu

Messaging

Mail Settings

MMS Settings

MMS Accounts

Select a Profile A Press N P A Select Copy A

Press b

Enter Profile Name (see P.10-33)

Press b

Delete Delete Profiles

Main Menu

H Messaging A Mail Settings A MMS Settings A

MMS Accounts

Select a Profile

Press N P

Select Delete

Press b

Press N i

Proxy & Access Point

See P.10-33 for available items.

Create New Create new Proxy/Access Point Profiles

Main Menu H Settings A Network Settings (F) A Internet Setting

Select Proxy Settings or APN Settings

Press b

Select Create New

Press b

Select an item

Press b A Enter text/select an item A Press b A

Press N P

Select Set

Press b

Edit Edit custom Profiles

Main Menu H Settings A Network Settings (F) A Internet Setting

Select Proxy Settings or APN Settings

Press b

Select a Profile

Press b

Select an item

Press b

Edit contents

Press b

Press N P

Select Set

Press b

Press N i

Copy Copy custom Profiles

Main Menu

Settings

Network Settings (F)

Internet

Setting

Select Proxy Settings or APN Settings

Press b

Select a Profile

Press N P

Select Copy

Press b

Enter name (see P.10-33)

Press b

Delete Delete custom Profiles

Main Menu

Settings

Network Settings (F)

Internet

Setting

Select Proxy Settings or APN Settings

Press b

Select a Profile

Press N P

Select Delete

Press b

Press N i

Additional Settings

Re-Provisioning

When Profiles are changed, perform Retrieve

NW Info and update the settings

Main Menu

Settings

Network Settings (F)

Internet

Setting

Re-Provisioning

Retrieving Network Information

Select Retrieve NW Info

Press b

Press N i

Updating

Select Execute Pending

Press b

Select an item

Press b twice

^ If required, enter the passcode and press b.

10-35

Clear

DNS Cache

Clear Vodafone live! Sever addresses stored on handset

Main Menu

Settings

Network Settings (F)

Internet

Setting

Select Clear DNS Cache

Press b

White List

Main Menu

Create/delete White List

Messages from listed addresses are always accepted

H Settings A Network Settings (F) A Internet

Setting A White List

Creating Entries

Press N i

Enter Handset Code

Press b

Select Create New

Press b

Select SMSC

Address or SM Orig. Address

Press b

Enter address

Press b

Press N P

Select Set

Press b

^ Enter up to 18 digits for SMSC Address and SM Orig. Address.

Deleting Entries

Press N i A Enter Handset Code A Press b

A Select an entry A Press N P A Select

Delete

Press b

Press N i

LBS (Location Based Service) Settings

LBS URL

Setting

Assign LBS URLs

CRequired when accessing specific hosts from Phone Book entries containing location info.

Main Menu

H Settings A Network Settings (F) A LBS Settings

A LBS URL Setting

Select URL

Press b

C To view URL, press N P

Select Display

Press b

C To edit URL, press N P

Select Edit

Press b

Edit URL

Press b

B URL saved in w cannot be edited.

C To delete URLs, select one

Press N P

Select

Delete

Press b

Press N i

B URL saved in w cannot be deleted.

C To add URL, select a blank entry

Press b

Enter URL

Press b

Datum On/Off

Main Menu

Choose whether or not to send your location info automatically upon request

KOn

H Settings A Network Settings (F) A LBS Settings

A Datum On/Off

Choose On or Off

Press b

Enter Handset

Code

Press b

10-36

Tools

11-1

Calendar

Organise daily, weekly, monthly and yearly schedule.

Save up to 300 entries between Calendar and Tasks (see P.11-6).

Opening Calendar

^ Open Calendar in Month View or Week View.

^ Calendar appears in Month View by default.

Main Menu

Tools

1 Select Calendar and press b

Calendar of the current month opens.

C If Clock is unset, set Time Zone

Press b A Enter the date A Press b

C To open Help (Key Assignments), press N P A Select Help A

Press b

B Press N K to return.

Key q p

CKey Assignments

Calendar Window

(Month View)

Month View Week View

Open the previous month Open the previous week

Open the next month Open the next week

Toggle between Month View and Week View

Select the current date

Quick Entry (Icons) -

Select the previous/next week

Select the previous/next

Select date time block

11-2

Default View

Set to open Calendar in Month View or Week

View

KMonth View

Main Menu

Tools

Calendar

Press N P A Select Default View A Press b

Select Month View or Week View

Press b

Set Holiday Set Calendar date colour

Main Menu

KSunday: Red, Saturday: Violet, Others: Black

Tools

Calendar

By Days of the Week

Press N P

Select Set Holiday

Press b

Select By Week

Press b

Select a day

Press b

Select a colour

Press b

By Date

Select a date

Press N P

Select Set

Holiday

Press b

Select By Date

Press b

Select a colour

Press b

C To use the colour set for the day of the week, select Same

as Week A Press b

Quick Entry Create new entry quickly by entering an icon

CAvailable in Month View.

Main Menu

Tools

Calendar

Select a date

Press 8

Select a category

Press b

Tip

To edit the entry, see P.11-5.

Saving Entries

Main Menu

Tools

Calendar

1 Select a day and press b

2 Select <Add New Entry> and press b

3 Enter subject and press b

^ Enter up to 32 characters. Subject is mandatory.

4 Enter start date/time and press b

5 Select End: and press b

6 Enter end date/time and press b

7 Select Category: and press b

8 Select a category and press b

9 Select Reminder: and press b

10 Select Reminder Time: and press b

11 No Reminder

1 Select No Reminder and press b

Setting Reminder

1 Select from At Start Time to 1 hour before

and press b

C For custom Reminder Time, select Other A Press b

Enter date/time

Press b

To set tone/video and duration, see P.11-4.

12 Press M K

Repeat: see P.11-4

13 Select Location: and press b

14 Enter location and press b

^ Enter up to 16 characters.

15 Select Description: and press b

16 Enter schedule details and press b

^ Enter up to 128 characters.

Secret: see P.11-4

New Entry

Window

17 Press M q

The entry is saved.

Note H When entries are transferred to other devices, date/time or other information may appear different depending on the recipient device.

Tip

H h (Reminder set) or i (Reminder unset) appears on scheduled day. (Indicator disappears after scheduled time.)

At Reminder Time

Reminder is activated, sounding/vibrating, etc. according to related settings.

^ If 804SH is off but Wake-up Alarm (see P.10-15) is On, 804SH

turns on at Reminder Time; Reminder activates and 804SH sounds/vibrates according to related settings.

^ Image appears if System Graphics (see P.10-3) is set.

However, SMAF file images take priority over System

Graphics.

Stopping Reminder

C Press M 3, g or i.

^ When handset was off at Reminder Time, Switch Phone

On? appears. Press N i or M c.

B Handset turns off after 20 seconds of inactivity.

Opening Entries

C While Reminder is activated, press b or N ). (Entries cannot be opened when handset was off at Reminder Time.)

11-3

Tip

H ^ If Reminder Time arrives during a call, Reminder will not be announced. Press g after the call to reactivate

Reminder.

^ Active Reminder stops for incoming calls. Press g after the call. Information window opens.

Calendar Options

Follow these steps after Step 12 on P.11-3. After each

setting, New Entry window returns. Complete other settings.

Assign Tone Set a tone to sound at Reminder Time

KAlert 1

Select Reminder:

Press b

Select Assign Tone/

Video:

Press b

Select Assign Tone

Press b

Select Preset Sounds or My Sounds

(Data Folder)

Press b

Select a tone/file

Press N U

Press M K

C For My Sounds, select a file and press b A Press M K

C To play tones in Preset Sounds, select one and press b.

B Press b to stop.

C To play files in My Sounds, select one and press N P

A Select Play A Press b

B Press M W to stop.

Assign Video Set a video file to play with Reminder

Select Reminder:

Press b

Select Assign Tone/

Video:

Press b

Select Assign Video

Press b

Select a video file

Press b

Press M K

C To play video files, select one and press N P

Select

Play

Press b

B Press M W to stop.

Duration Set how long Reminder operates

K15 seconds

Select Reminder:

Press b

Select Duration:

Press b

Select time

Press b

Press M K

C For custom Duration, select Other A Press b A Enter time A Press b A Press M K

Repeat

Assign schedule type (once only, daily, weekly, monthly or yearly) for each event

KOnce Only

Once Only Schedule

Select Repeat: A Press b A Select Once Only A

Press b

Repetitive Schedule

Select Repeat:

Press b

Select from Day to

Every Year

Press b

Enter repeat time (00 - 99 times)

Press b

^ Start date and time are reflected in the items. For Month, if the day is 29, 30 or 31, entries are saved for the valid months only.

^ Repeat time is not available for Every Year; the schedule is repeated until deleted.

^ Set Repeat time to 00 to repeat until deleted.

Secret Restrict access to entries

KOff

Select Secret:

Press b

Choose On or Off

Press b

^ Activate handset Secret Mode (see P.10-18) to open/edit

Secret Mode entries.

11-4

Opening Entries

Main Menu H Tools A Calendar

1 Select a date and press b

C Alternatively, to specify date, press N P

Select Go

to A Press b A Select Enter Date A Press b A Enter date

Press b

C Alternatively, to open current date, press N P A Select

Go to

Press b

Select Today

Press b

2 Select an entry and press b

C To send the entry via MMS, press N P A Select Send

Press b

Select As Message

Press b

Create

and send message (Perform from Step 3 on P.14-6.)

3 Press M W to end

Memory Status

C After Step 1, press N P A

Select Memory Status

Press b

Searching Entries

Main Menu

Tools

Calendar

1 Press N P

2 Select Find and press b

3 Enter search text and press b

^ Enter up to 32 characters.

4 Select an entry and press b

Editing Entries

Main Menu H Tools A Calendar

1 Select a date and press b

2 Select an entry and press N P

3 Select Edit and press b

4 Select an item and press b

^ For details, see procedure for saving entries.

5 When finished editing, press M q

Deleting Entries

This Appointment/

All This Day

Delete one entry or all entries of the day

Main Menu

Tools

Calendar

One Entry

Select a date

Press b

Select an entry

Press N P

Select Delete

Press b

Select

This Appointment

Press b

Press N i

All Entries of the Day

Select a date

Press N P

Select Delete

Press b

Select All This Day

Press b

Press N i

11-5

All This Month/

All This Week

Delete all entries of the month or week

COpen Calendar in Month View for All This Month and Week View for All This Week.

Main Menu

Tools

Calendar

Month

Select a month

Press N P

Select Delete

Press b

Select All This Month

Press b

Press N i

^ All This Month appears only when there is an entry in the month.

Week

Select a week

Press N P

Select Delete

Press b

Select All This Week

Press b

Press N i

^ All This Week appears only when there is an entry in the week.

Up to Last Month/ Delete entries up to the end of the previous

Up to Last Week month or week

COpen Calendar in Month View for Up to Last Month and Week View for Up to Last Week.

Main Menu H Tools A Calendar

Up to End of Previous Month

Select a month A Press N P A Select Delete A Press b

Select Up to Last Month

Press b

Press N i

^ Up to Last Month appears only when there is an entry up to the end of the previous month.

Up to the End of Previous Week

Select a week

Press N P

Select Delete

Press b

Select Up to Last Week

Press b

Press N i

^ Up to Last Week appears only when there is an entry up to the end of the previous week.

All Appointments Delete all entries

Main Menu H Tools A Calendar

Press N P

Select Delete

Press b

Select

All Appointments

Press b

Press N i

11-6

Deleting Repetitive Entries

C A confirmation appears except for All Appointments.

To delete, press N i.

B To retain repetitive entries, press M c.

Tasks

Save event with deadlines.

^ Check completed tasks (see P.11-9).

^ Save up to 300 entries between Tasks and Calendar (see P.11-2)

Saving Entries

Main Menu

Tools

Tasks

1 Select <Add New Entry> and press b

2 Enter subject and press b

^ Enter up to 32 characters. Subject is mandatory.

3 Enter due date/time and press b

4 Select Reminder: and press b

5 Select Reminder Time: and press b

6 No Reminder

1 Select No Reminder and press b

Setting Reminder

1 Select from At Due Time to 1 hour before

and press b

C For custom Reminder Time, select Other A Press b

Enter date/time

Press b

To set tone/video and duration, see P.11-8.

7 Press M K

8 Select Description: and

press b

9 Enter task details and press b

^ Enter up to 128 characters.

Secret: see P.11-8

10 Press M q

The entry is saved.

New Entry

Window

At Reminder Time

Reminder is activated, sounding/vibrating, etc. according to related settings.

^ If 804SH is off but Wake-up Alarm (see P.10-15) is On, 804SH

turns on at Reminder Time; Reminder activates and 804SH sounds/vibrates according to related settings.

^ Image appears if System Graphics is set (see P.10-3).

However, SMAF file images take priority over System

Graphics.

Stopping Reminder Tone

C Press M 3, g or i.

^ When handset was off at Reminder Time, Switch Phone

On? appears. Press N i or M c.

B Handset turns off after 20 seconds of inactivity.

Opening Entries

C While Reminder is activated, press b or N ). (Entries cannot be opened when handset was off at Reminder Time.)

Tip H ^ If Reminder Time arrives during a call, no tone will sound. Press g after the call to reactivate Reminder.

^ Active Reminder stops for incoming calls. Press g after the call. Information window opens.

11-7

Tasks Options

Follow these steps after Step 7 on P.11-7. After each

setting, New Entry window returns. Complete other settings.

Assign Tone Set a tone to sound at Reminder Time

KAlert 1

Select Reminder: A Press b A Select Assign Tone/

Video:

Press b

Select Assign Tone

Press b

A Select Preset Sounds or My Sounds (Data Folder) A

Press b A Select a tone/file A Press N U A

Press M K

C For My Sounds, select a file and press b

Press M K

C To play tones in Preset Sounds, select one and press b.

B Press b to stop.

C To play files in My Sounds, select one and press N P

Select Play

Press b

B Press M W to stop.

Assign Video Set a video file to play with Reminder

Select Reminder:

Press b

Select Assign Tone/

Video:

Press b

Select Assign Video

Press b

Select a video file

Press b

Press M K

C To play video files, select one and press N P A Select

Play A Press b

B Press M W to stop.

Duration Set how long Reminder operates

K15 seconds

Select Reminder:

Press b

Select Duration:

Press b

Select time

Press b

Press M K

C For custom Duration, select Other A Press b A Enter time A Press b A Press M K

Secret Restrict access to entries

KOff

Select Secret:

Press b

Choose On or Off

Press b

^ Activate handset Secret Mode (see P.10-18) to open/edit

Secret Mode entries.

Opening Entries

Main Menu

Tools

1 Select Tasks and press b

C To open completed (checked) entries, use F to select c (Completed

Tasks).

C To open uncompleted (unchecked) entries, use F to select e

(Incomplete Tasks).

2 Select an entry and press b

C To send the entry via MMS, press N P A Select Send

Press b

Select As Message

Press b

Create

and send message (Perform from Step 3 on P.14-6.)

3 Press M W to end

11-8

Completed Tasks

C To mark Tasks as completed, follow these steps after Step 1 on P.11-8.

Select an unchecked entry (O) A Press b A Press b

B To cancel checks, select a checked entry (P) A Press b

Press b

Memory Status

C After Step 1 on P.11-8, press N P

A Select Memory

Status

Press b

Searching Entries

Main Menu H Tools A Tasks

1 Select an entry and press N P

2 Select Find and press b

3 Enter search text and press b

^ Enter up to 32 characters.

4 Select an entry and press b

Editing Entries

Main Menu H Tools A Tasks

1 Select an entry and press N P

2 Select Edit and press b

3 Select an item and press b

^ For details, see procedure for saving entries.

4 When finished editing, press M q

Deleting Entries

This Task Delete one entry

Main Menu

Tools

Tasks

Select an entry A Press N P A Select Delete

A Press b A Select This Task A Press b A

Press N i

All Tasks/

All Completed Tasks

Main Menu

Delete all tasks or all completed tasks

Tools

Tasks

All Tasks

Press N P

Select Delete

Press b

Select All Tasks

Press b

Press N i

All Completed Tasks

Press N P

Select Delete

Press b

Select All Completed Tasks

Press b

Press N i

^ All Completed Tasks appears only when there is a completed entry.

11-9

Alarm

Setting Alarm

Set Alarm to sound at a specific time each day or on specific days of the week. Save up to 5 Alarm settings.

Main Menu H Tools A Alarms

1 Select - - : - - and press b

2 Enter time and press b

Alarm Options: see P.11-11

3 Select Repeat: and press b

4 Daily

1 Select Every Day and

press b

Alarm Settings

Specified Day of the Week

1 Select Selected Days and press b

C To select all, press N P

Select Select All

Press b

2 Select a day of the week and press b

The day is set and P appears.

^ To cancel, highlight the selected day and press b.

3 Repeat 2 to select more

4 Press M K when finished

One Time Alarm

1 Select Once Only and press b

5 Press M q

Alarm is set.

^ For more settings, repeat Steps 1 - 5.

6 Press g to exit

Handset returns to Standby and e appears.

At Alarm Time

Alarm is activated, sounding/vibrating, etc. according to related settings.

^ If 804SH is off but Wake-up Alarm (see P.10-15) is On, 804SH

turns on at Alarm Time; Alarm activates and 804SH sounds/ vibrates according to related settings. However, if 804SH is shutting down at Alarm Time, 804SH restarts and Alarm activates within two minutes of shutdown time.

^ Image appears if System Graphics is set (see P.10-3).

However, SMAF file images take priority over System

Graphics.

11-10

Stopping Alarm

C Press M 3, g or i.

^ When handset was off at Alarm Time, Switch Phone On? appears. Press N i or M c.

B Handset turns off after 20 seconds of inactivity.

Snooze

C When Snooze (see P.11-12) is set, Alarm repeats at the set

interval.

^ When other Alarm Time arrives while Switch Phone On? appears, the other Alarm is activated.

^ Accept incoming calls (except when handset was off at

Alarm Time). After each call, press g to reactivate

Snooze.

^ If other Alarm Time arrives while Snoozing, the other Alarm is activated only after Snooze is cancelled.

C To cancel Snooze, follow these steps while Alarm is activated or Snoozing.

Press M 3, g or i A Press N i

^ When handset was off at Alarm Time, Switch Phone On? appears. Press N i or M c.

B Handset turns off after 20 seconds of inactivity.

^ Snooze is cancelled automatically 60 minutes after initial

Alarm Time.

Tip

H ^ If Alarm Time arrives during a call, no tone will sound.

Press g after the call to reactivate Alarm.

^ In Manner mode, volume depends on Manner settings

(Silent by default).

^ If Auto Power On Time and Alarm Time are the same,

Alarm is activated after handset turns on.

^ When handset turns on at Alarm Time with PIN Entry

(see P.10-16) On, tone is fixed to Alert 1 except when a

tone in Preset Sounds is assigned.

^ When battery is removed and reinstalled after Alarm is set, handset may not turn on at Alarm Time. To prevent this, turn handset on and then off.

Alarm Options

Follow these steps after Step 2 on P.11-10. After each

setting, Alarm settings window returns. Complete other settings.

Assign Tone Set a tone to sound at Alarm Time

KAlert 1

Select Assign Tone/Video:

Press b

Select

Assign Tone

Press b

Select Preset Sounds or

My Sounds (Data Folder)

Press b

Select a tone/file

Press N U

C For My Sounds, select a file and press b.

C To play tones in Preset Sounds, select one and press b.

B Press b to stop.

C To play files in My Sounds, select one and press N P

A Select Play A Press b

B Press M W to stop.

11-11

Assign Video Set a video file to play with Alarm

Select Assign Tone/Video:

Press b

Select

Assign Video

Press b

Select a video file

Press b

C To play video files, select one and press N P

Select

Play

Press b

B Press M W to stop.

Set Alarm to activate at set intervals after initial

Snooze

Alarm Time

KEvery 5 minutes

Select Snooze:

Press b

Select an interval

Press b

C For custom intervals, select Other

Press b

Enter interval

Press b

Alarm Volume Set volume from seven levels

KLevel 5

Select Alarm Volume:

Press b

Use G to adjust level

Press b

Duration Set how long Alarm operates

K10 seconds

Select Duration:

Press b

Select duration

Press b

C For custom Duration, select Other A Press b A Enter time

Press b

Vibration Set handset to vibrate at Alarm Time

KOn

Select Vibration:

Press b

Select On, Link to

Sound or Off

Press b

^ For details on Link to Sound, see P.10-11 "Vibration".

Cancelling & Reactivating Alarm

Switch Off Cancel Alarm and retain the settings

Main Menu

Tools

Alarms

Select an entry A Press N P A Select Switch

Off A Press b

^ e disappears.

^ Reactivate Alarm to use the same settings.

Switch On

Reactivate Alarm with the same settings, or change current settings

Main Menu

Tools

Alarms

Select an entry A Press N P A Select Switch

Press b

C To change settings, select an entry

Press N P

Select Edit

Press b

Edit settings

B For details, see procedure for saving entries.

Deleting Alarm

Reset Alarm Delete Alarm settings one by one

Main Menu H Tools A Alarms

Select an entry

Press N P

Select Reset

Alarm

Press b

Press N i

Clear All Delete all Alarm settings

Main Menu H Tools A Alarms

Select Clear All

Press b

Press N i

11-12

Auto Power On

Use Auto Power On to activate handset power automatically at a specific time each day. Auto Power On is Off by default.

Main Menu H Tools A Auto Power On A Switch On/Off

1 Choose On and press b

C To cancel Auto Power On, choose Off A Press b (Omit the next steps.)

2 Select Set Time and press b

3 Enter time and press b

Note H When Auto Power On time arrives while handset is turned on for Alarm, handset does not turn on completely until

Alarm stops or Snooze is cancelled.

Tip

When battery is removed and reinstalled after Auto Power

On is set, handset may not turn on at Auto Power On

Time. To prevent this, turn handset on and then off.

World Clock

Display local date/time (see P.10-13) and the date/time of

another area in the world.

^ Select from preset Time Zones or specify a new one; enter area name and time difference between new and local areas.

^ To set World Clock to appear in Standby, see P.10-14 "Display

Date & Time" (Show Clock).

^ Time Zone is set to Tokyo by default.

Setting Time Zone & Daylight Saving

Activate Daylight Saving to advance the selected area's time by one hour.

Main Menu H Tools A World Clock A Edit (N)

1 Time Zone

1 Select Set Time Zone and press b

2 Use F to specify an area and press b

C To add Time Zone, in Time Zone setting window, press N P A Select Set Custom Zone A

Press b

Enter city name (up to 16 characters)

Press b A Use E to select + or - A Press A A Enter time difference

Press b

Daylight Saving

1 Select Daylight Saving and press b

2 Choose On and press b

C To cancel, choose Off

Press b

11-13

Opening World Clock

Main Menu H Tools

1 Select World Clock and press b

Local Time Zone

World Time Zone

Tip H

^ To change local Time Zone, see P.10-14.

^ To set World Clock to appear in Standby, select World Clock

for Show Clock (see P.10-14 "Display Date & Time).

Calculator

Use Calculator for basic arithmetic (up to 12 digits) and percentage calculation, or currency conversion (Money Converter).

Key Assignments:

+ (Add)

- (Subtract) x (Multiply)

÷ (Divide)

= (Equal)

C.CE (Clear)

D b i

Not available when result is 0.

CM (Clear Memory)

RM (Recall Memory)

M+ (Add Memory)

. (Decimal)

+/- (Switch)

% (Percent)

Press N P and select %.

j f

M 1 q p

N 2

Main Menu H Tools

1 Select Calculator and press b

Calculator opens.

^ Use Keypad to enter digits, and the keys in the table on the left for calculation.

C Shortcut: Enter digits in Standby

Press C

C To copy the result, press N P

Select Copy A Press b

2 Press g to exit

Tip

H ^ Entered numbers, results and numbers saved in Memory are not affected by incoming calls. End the call to return.

^ Clear Memory before starting Memory calculations.

^ Numbers saved in Memory remain even if Calculator is closed, but are cleared when handset power is turned off.

Money Converter

C To change exchange rate, open Calculator and follow these steps.

Press N P

Select Money Converter

Press b

Select Exchange Rate

Press b

Select Domestic or Foreign A Press b A Enter rate A Press b

^ Exchange rate is 1 for both conversions by default.

C To convert foreign currencies, follow these steps.

Enter amount of money and press N P

Select Money Converter

Press b

Select to

Domestic or to Foreign A Press b

^ Conversion is based on the preset exchange rate.

11-14

Voice Recorder

Use handset microphone to record short voice memos and save files on handset or Memory card; record and save longer recordings on Memory Card.

^ Modes:

For Message

Extended Voice

Recording Time

Up to three minutes

(attachable to MMS)

Up to approximately

10 hours

Storage Media

Handset or

Memory Card

Specify storage media before recording, or set 804SH to ask each time; when set to ask, always record with Memory Card inserted.

Insert Memory Card to record in Extended Voice mode.

^ For Message is set by Default.

Preparation

^ When battery is low (L or B), Voice Recorder will not record.

If battery runs low while recording in Extended Voice mode,

Low Battery appears and Voice Recorder shuts off.

^ Conversations during calls cannot be recorded.

^ If incompatible microphone is connected, recording may fail.

Recording

Main Menu H Tools

1 Select Voice Recorder and

press b

C To switch mode, press N P A

Select Record Time

Press b

Select For Message or Extended

Voice A Press b

To switch storage media, see P.11-16.

2 Press b

Recording starts.

3 For Message

1 Press b to stop

^ Recording stops automatically when maximum recording time is reached.

C To play the recording, select Playback A Press b

B Press N V to pause.

B Press M W to return.

C To start over without saving, press M 3

Repeat from Step 2

C To send via MMS, select Save and Send A Press b A

Create and send message (Perform from Step 3 on P.14-6.)

B When Ask Each Time is selected in Save Rec. to setting, select To Phone Memory or To Memory

Card A Press b

2 Select Save and press b

Recording is saved to handset or Memory Card.

C When Ask Each Time is selected in Save Rec. to setting, select To Phone Memory or To Memory Card A Press b

Extended Voice

1 Press b to stop

Recording is saved to Memory Card.

11-15

Note

H ^ Avoid shocks to 804SH; may cause noise or skipping.

^ Recording window may take longer to open as more

Voice files are saved on Memory Card.

Tip

H ^ Alarm is disabled while recording, and starts after Voice

Recorder stops/closes.

^ Attach saved Voice file or record voice directly from Mail

Composition windows (see P.14-9).

Playback

Play sounds from handset speaker, or use LCD Remote/Mic

with Headphones (see P.7-8).

Main Menu H Tools A Voice Recorder

1 Press N P

2 Select My Sounds and press b

C Use F to toggle between handset and Memory Card.

3 Select a file and press b

Playback starts.

C Use C (up) or D (down) to adjust volume.

Deleting Files

C Follow these steps after Step 2 on the left.

Select a file A Press N P A Select Delete A

Press b

Press N i

Editing File Names

C Files are named automatically. To rename, follow these steps after Step 2 on the left.

Select a file A Press N P A Select Rename

Press b

Enter name

Press b

Incoming Calls/Mail during Playback

C Playback stops for incoming calls or Alarm.

C An icon appears for incoming mail without interrupting playback.

Recording Setting

Save Rec. to Select storage media for For Message

KHandset

Main Menu

Tools

Voice Recorder

Press N P

Select Save Rec. to

Press b

Select Phone Memory, Memory Card or Ask Each

Time

Press b

^ Set to Ask Each Time to select media after every recording.

11-16

Barcode

Scan printed barcodes with mobile camera or download QR

Codes via Web or MMS.

^ Scan UPC (JAN) or QR Codes. Handset automatically detects code type and reads data.

^ In Continuous mode, scan up to 50 UPC (JAN) or 16 QR

Codes at one time. In some cases, continuous scans may be disrupted depending on barcode data or data size.

^ Zoom is not available.

Note H ^ Scan may fail if the barcode is dirty or unclear.

^ Use Mobile Light when scanning barcodes indoors.

^ Capture one barcode at a time; otherwise scan may fail.

Tip H ^ A UPC (Universal Product Code) or JAN (Japanese

Article Number) is a series of varying width vertical lines (bars) and spaces. Bars and spaces together are elements, combinations of which represent different numbers. 804SH cannot read other one-dimensional barcodes (ITF Code, Code39, Codabar/NW-7, etc.).

^ A QR (Quick Response) Code is a matrix symbology consisting of an array of nominally square cells, which allows omni-directional reading of up to 7,366 alphanumerics and byte data, as well as kanji and kana.

Main Menu H Tools A Barcode A Scan Barcode

1 Frame barcode in the centre of

Display

^ Hold handset approximately 10 cm away from barcode.

^ Slide Portrait/Macro Selector

(see P.6-4) to Macro (o).

C Use F to adjust brightness.

C Press p to use Mobile Light.

C To activate or cancel Continuous mode, press N P A Select Continuous Scan A

Press b

Choose On or Off

Press b

2 Press b

Mobile camera scans the barcode.

^ If recognition takes time, move handset slowly and adjust the distance from barcode.

C Press M 3 to stop scan

Start over from Step 1

3 Barcode recognition tone sounds and scan results appear

Using Scan Results: see P.11-18

C To start over, press M W

Press

N i A Perform from Step 1

11-17

Continuous Mode

C After scanning, Scan completed. Scan new? appears.

To scan next code, press N i A Frame the code on Display

Press b

To exit, press M c

Scan results appear

Split Data

C After scanning, Split data. Scan next symbol? appears.

To scan next code, press N i

Frame the code on Display A Press b

To cancel, press M c

Press N i

C Data will not be saved until all split data is scanned.

C The scanning status appears on the first line of Display. For example, b indicates that 1 of 4 codes has been scanned.

CUsing Scan Results

Place Calls

Send Mail

Quote &

Send Mail

Save to

Phone Book

1, 3

Select a number starting with TEL:

2 A Press b

The number appears

Press f

Select a mail address including @

Press b

A Complete and send message (perform from

Step 6 on P.14-7.)

Press N P

Select Send Message

Press b A Press b A Create and send

message (perform from Step 3 on P.14-6.)

B To use a part of text, press N P in Send

Message window

Select Cut

Press b

Select the first character of text A Press b A

Select the end of text

Press b

Select a number starting with TEL:

or a mail address including @ A Press N P A

Select Save to Ph.Book

Press b

Perform Step 4 on P.4-7

Select a URL starting with http:// or rtsp:// A

Press b (Handset connects to the Network.)

Access Mobile

Internet Sites

Save to Data

Folder (Images

& Melodies)

Select an image or melody file

Press N P

A Select To Data Folder A Press b

Available when text is in TEL: U format.

Text strings of 10 to 32 digits starting with 0 are recognised as phone numbers.

Available when text is in U @ U format.

Available when text is in http:// U or rtsp:// U format.

^ U represents one or more alphanumerics.

11-18

Saving

Copy

Text

URL

Mail

Address

Phone

Number

Use for System

Graphics

Wallpaper

Press N P

Select Save

Press b

^ Save up to 10 messages.

^ To open saved items, see P.11-20 "Scanned

Results".

Press N P A Select Copy A Press b

Select the first character of text

A Select the end of text A Press b

Press b

Select a URL starting with http:// or rtsp:// A

Press N P

Select Copy URL

Press b

Select a mail address including @

Press N P A Select Copy Address A

Press b

Select a number starting with TEL:

2 A

Press N P A Select Copy Telephone

Press b

Select an image

Press N P

Select

As System A Press b A Select an item A

Press b

Select an image

Press N P

Select

As Wallpaper A Press b A Press b

Open Images or

Play Melodies

Select an image or melody file A Press b

Open Properties

Select an image or melody file

A Select Property A Press b

Press N P

Available when text is in TEL: U format.

Text strings of 10 to 32 digits starting with 0 are recognised as phone numbers.

Available when text is in U @ U format.

Available when text is in http:// U or rtsp:// U format.

^ U represents one or more alphanumerics.

Tip

When MEMORY: or MAILTO: appears in scan results, press b to enter the items underlined with a dotted line automatically in Phone Book Details or SMS/MMS messages. However, text after an invalid character is not underlined and is not copied.

Scanning during

Text Entry

Scan barcodes during text entry and insert scan results into current cursor position

In a text entry window, press N P A Select Scan

Press b

Select Scan Code

Press b

Frame barcode in the centre of Display A Press b twice

C To use a part of text, press N P

Select Cut

Press b

Select the first character of text

Press b

Select the end of text

Press b

Note H Barcodes/text cannot be scanned when:

^ Entering text during a call

^ Entering text in Reading window (E-Book)

^ V-application is active

^ Entering URL for streaming

11-19

Open Barcode Read saved barcode images in Data Folder

Main Menu

Tools

Barcode

Open Barcode

Select a barcode image

Press b

C For split data, press N i to scan next code.

B To cancel, press M c A Delete all information,

OK? appears A Press N i

C When scanning fails, press N i A Select next barcode image manually A Press b

Note

H ^ Resized QR Codes may be invalid.

^ When invalid, This data may be incorrect. appears.

Scanned

Results

Open files saved in Scanned Results

Main Menu

Tools

Barcode

Scanned Results

Select a file A Press b

^ Opened results cannot be re-saved.

^ Some files such as large images may not open.

Create QR Codes

Create QR Codes from entered text, Phone Book, Pictures,

Sound & Ringtones, and Text Templates.

^ Save up to 513 digits, 131 kanji or the data equivalent thereof within a single QR Code.

^ Large items are divided into maximum of 16 QR Codes.

^ Created QR Codes are saved to Data Folder (Pictures). To

open them, see P.9-4.

Phone Book

Encode name, reading, phone numbers, mail addresses and note

Main Menu

H Tools A Barcode A Create QR Code A Phone

Book

Select an entry

Press b

QR Code appears

Press b

^ Only name, reading, phone numbers, mail addresses and note are encoded.

Text Input Enter and encode text

Main Menu

H Tools A Barcode A Create QR Code A Text

Input

Enter text

Press b

QR Code appears

Press b

11-20

Data Folder

Encode melody/image files or Text Templates in Data Folder

Main Menu

Tools

Barcode

Create QR Code

Data

Folder

Select a folder

Press b

Select an item

Press b

QR Code appears

Press b

Switching Storage Media

C While created QR Code appears, press N P A

Select Save To A Press b A Select Handset or Memory

Card

Press b

Attaching to MMS Mail

C While created QR Code appears, press N P A

Select Send As

Press b

See P.14-6

Incoming Calls while Creating QR Code

C Contents are temporarily saved. End the call to return.

Text Scanner

Scan text (URLs, mail addresses, phone numbers or roman letters) with mobile camera.

^ Scan up to 256 characters continuously.

^ Scan up to 60 single-byte characters within 3 lines. Scanning over 35 characters at one time may yield poor results.

^ Some symbols may not be read.

^ Text mode is set to Auto each time Text Scanner is activated.

Change the mode if text is distorted in Auto (such as white text in black background).

^ Zoom is not available.

Note

H ^ Text Scanner will not activate if music is playing; when

Stop music? appears, press N i to proceed.

^ Text Scanner will not activate if a V-application is active.

^ When handset is too hot, Heat warning: camera

temporarily disabled. appears and mobile camera remains off. If 804SH becomes too hot while in use,

Temperature is high. Closing camera... appears and scanning ends.

11-21

Main Menu H Tools A Barcode A Scan Text

1 Frame text on Display

^ Adjust to frame text in [ ]. Letters at the ends may be distorted.

^ Hold handset approximately 10 cm away from text.

^ Slide Portrait/Macro Selector (see

P.6-4) according to text size.

C Use F to adjust brightness.

C Press p to use Mobile Light.

C To switch text mode, press N P

A Select Reversed Text A

Press b

Select Auto, Normal or

Reversed A Press b

2 Press b

Text Scanner reads the text.

C Press i to stop scan

Start over from Step 1

3 Use E to select a line and

press b

^ Text Scanner reads one line per scan.

Focus Adjustment Bar

(Better focus in darker blue)

4 Scan results appear

804SH automatically registers scan results as a URL, Email

Address, Phone Number or Text; if incorrect, change mode.

^ If text exceeds limit, results appear with overage truncated.

C To change mode, press N P

Select Change Mode

A Press b A Select a type A Press b (Scan results and alternatives list change accordingly.)

C To edit, press N P A Select Select/Edit A Press b

Select the character to edit

Select an alternative from the list or enter the correction directly from Keypad

C To start over, press M W

Press N i

Repeat from Step 1

5 Press b

^ To use scan results, see P.11-18.

Scanning More Text

C After Step 5, press N P A Select Continue Part or

Scan More

Press b

^ Continue Part

Select Continue Part to enter additional text. (Mode remains the same.)

^ Scan More

Select Scan More to enter text after a line break.

C Continue Part and Scan More are disabled once 256 characters have been scanned.

11-22

Scanning during

Text Entry

Scan text during text entry and insert scan results into current cursor position

In a text entry window, press N P

Select

Scan

Press b

Select Text Scanner

Press b

Frame text in the centre of Display

Press b

Select a line

Press b twice

^ To change mode or edit scan results, see Step 4 on P.11-22.

Stopwatch

Record elapsed time for up to 24 hours (23 hours 59 minutes 59.9 seconds) in 0.1-second increments.

Use lap time feature to segment elapsed time.

^ Save times (including the last four lap times) to handset Text

Templates.

^ Stopwatch is disabled when battery is low (L or B).

Stopwatch ends when battery is low.

Main Menu H Tools A Stopwatch

1 Press b

Stopwatch starts.

C To record Lap times, press N ,.

B The last four Lap times are recorded. The records are deleted when Stopwatch is cancelled.

2 Press b to stop

C To save the records to Text Template, press N P

Select Save to Template A Press b

B To check saved records, open Text Templates (see P.9-14).

C Press b to resume.

C To clear the records, press N P

Select Reset

Press b

3 Press M W then N i to exit

Tip

H ^ Records are deleted when Stopwatch is cancelled.

Save records to Text Templates.

^ Stopwatch setting is not affected by incoming calls.

Press g after the call to return to Stopwatch.

^ Alarm is disabled while Stopwatch window is open, but is reactivated automatically when handset returns to

Standby.

Countdown Timer

Set Countdown Timer up to 60 minutes in 1-second increments. Alarm Tone sounds and Small Light flashes when set time elapses.

Main Menu H Tools A Countdown Timer

1 Enter time (00:01 - 60:00) and press b

^ To edit entered time, use F to move cursor and enter correct time. If b is already pressed, follow the steps below.

^ When times over 60 minutes (60:00) are entered, the last set time returns.

C To change time, press N P A Select Edit A Press b

Enter time

Press b

2 Press b

Countdown starts.

11-23

3 Press b to stop countdown

C Press b to resume.

C To reset, stop countdown and press N P

Select

Reset A Press b

4 Press M W then N i to exit

Countdown Timer End

C Timer Expired appears. Tone sounds according to General

Volume setting.

^ Alarm stops automatically after 60 seconds. Press M 3 to stop manually.

^ In Manner mode, Manner settings take priority.

^ When the set timer time has elapsed during a call, Timer

Expired appears after g is pressed to end the call.

Tip

H ^ Countdown is not affected by incoming calls. Press g after the call to return to Countdown Timer window.

^ Alarm is disabled while Countdown Timer window is open, but is reactivated automatically when handset returns to Standby.

Expenses Memo

Use Expenses Memo to add expenses, such as travel expenses.

^ Enter up to 30 entries (up to 29,999,999.70 yen in total,

999,999.99 yen per entry).

^ Entries cannot be saved during a call.

Add New

Expense

Enter monetary figure and categorise it

Main Menu

Tools

Expenses Memo

Add New Expense

Enter amount

Press b

Select a category

Press b

C Shortcut: In Standby, enter amount A Press D A Press b

A Select a category A Press b

^ The entry date and figure are saved.

^ If Clock is unset, entry date and time will be saved as --/--/-- --:--.

Totals Check entries

Main Menu

Tools

Expenses Memo

Select Totals

Press b

C Use E to scroll through entries.

C To change category, select an entry A Press N P A

Select Change Category A Press b A Select a category

A Press b

B To enter custom category name, select Other in category list A Press b A Enter name (up to14 characters) A

Press b (Preset category names are not affected.)

C To change entry amount, select an entry A Press N P

A Select Change Amount A Press b A Edit A Press b

C To delete an entry, select one A Press N P A Select

Delete Item A Press b A Press N i

C To delete all entries, select an entry A Press N P A

Select Delete All A Press b A Press N i

Edit Category Rename categories

Main Menu

Tools

Expenses Memo

Select Edit Category

Press b

Select a category

Press b

Edit

Press b

^ Enter up to 14 characters.

11-24

E-Books

Read XMDF or Text format E-Books from Memory Card.

^ E-Book dictionaries turn 804SH into an electronic dictionary.

^ Download titles via Sharp's Space Town (see P.15-6).

^ Adjust Text Code for E-Books in other languages (see

P.11-26).

^ 804SH may not support some embedded sounds/images.

^ E-Book folder cannot be accessed during Synchronisation.

^ E-Books cannot be opened while Music Player is active or a

V-application is paused.

Reading Content

Main Menu

Tools

1 Select E-Book and press b

Book contents list appears. (When you press g to close

Reading window, the same page will open next time.)

C To read E-Books saved in other folders, press N P

Select Switch Folders

Press b

Select a folder

Press b

B Selected item appears next time E-Book is selected.

2 Select an E-Book and press b

^ !% indicates location of the current page.

C If the E-Book is password protected, enter password A

Press b

Reading window opens

C To see the title, author, etc., press N P A Select

Property

Press b

B Press N K to exit.

3 Press g to close

^ The last page opened will appear next time.

Note

H ^ E-Books automatically close for incoming calls, outgoing transmissions, Alarm Time, low battery, five minutes of inactivity, or Memory Card removal.

^ Only zbf, zbk, txt or text files appear in contents list.

^ Revised E-Books are not supported.

Key Assignments

C Operations vary by writing style as follows.

Lateral

C Scroll up (by line)

D Scroll down (by line)

B Backward (by page)

A Forward (by page)

Vertical

Backward (by page)

Forward (by page)

Scroll left (by line)

Scroll right (by line)

11-25

Text Operations

C Jump to the first or last page.

In Reading window, press N P A Select Jump

to Top or Jump to Bottom

Press b

C Move to a specific location.

In Reading window, press N P A Select Shift

Press b

Enter location by percentage (00 -

99%)

Press b

C Select a chapter when a table of contents is contained.

In Reading window, press N P

Select

Contents

Press b

Select a chapter

Press b

C Move back to link source or open link again.

Press N P

Select Back or Next

Press b

C Return to E-Book list.

Press N P A Select Back to List A Press b

C See P.11-27 to use Bookmarks.

Using Linked Info/Copying Text

C Use linked numbers, addresses or URLs to place calls, send

MMS or open Mobile Internet sites.

Select an item

Press N P

Select Jump to

Link A Press b A Press N i

^ Some linked information may not be usable.

C Copy text (up to 20 characters).

In Reading window, press N P

Select Copy

Press b

Perform from Step 3 in "Copy/Cut &

Paste" on P.3-12

B Dictionary index text and search results cannot be copied.

B Images and ruby annotations cannot be copied.

Reading Window Settings

C In Reading window, press N P A

Select Display

Settings A Press b A Select an item A Press b A

Change the setting

Press b

Item

Font Size

Description

Select Tiny, Small, Standard or

Standard Plus

Default

Standard

Text

Orientation

Ruby

Read text vertically or horizontally Vertical

Show ruby annotations Off

Text Code

Set encoding to Shift-JIS, Latin-1 or Latin-9

^ Above settings are not available for some content.

Shift-JIS

Mask & Jump

C Some E-Books may contain hidden text or images (masked info) or links (jump links).

^ Select masked info and press b to see the text or image.

Press b again to hide.

^ Select a jump link and press b to jump to the specified page. Press M W to return.

11-26

Folders and Files in E-Book Folders

C Adding Folders

In E-Book list, press N P A Select New Folder

Press b

Enter folder name

Press b

C Editing Folder/File Names

In E-Book list, select a folder/file A Press N P

Select Change Name

Press b

Edit

Press b

C Deleting Folders/Files

In E-Book list, select a folder/file

Press N P

Select Delete

Press b

Press N i

C Moving Files

In E-Book list, select a file

Press N P

Select Move

Press b

Select a location

Press b twice

Tip H The above operations are not available for E-Books in

Data Folder (handset/Memory Card). For managing

folders/files on handset, see P.9-14.

Bookmark

Add bookmarks to return to the pages easily.

Use two bookmarks per E-Book (for up to five E-Books).

1 Press N P

2 Select Bookmark and press b

3 Select Bookmark1 or Bookmark2 and press b

Bookmark is added.

Auto Bookmark

C When you close Reading window, Auto Bookmark 1 is added to the last page opened. The next time you close the same

E-Book, Auto Bookmark 1 is replaced with Auto Bookmark 2, and added to the new last page.

^ Up to two Auto Bookmarks can be stored per E-Book, and will be deleted older first when another is added.

^ E-Books automatically close and Auto Bookmark 1 is added when incoming calls arrive while reading E-Books.

Opening Bookmarked Page

C In Reading window, press N P A

Select Move to

Bookmark A Press b A Select Bookmark1,

Bookmark2, Auto Bookmark1 or Auto Bookmark2

Press b

Using E-Book Images

Save as

Wallpaper

Save images as Wallpaper

Main Menu H Tools A E-Book A Open E-Book

Select an image

Press N P

Select Save as

Wallpaper

Press b twice

^ Some images may not be usable.

11-27

Embedded

Information

Use information contained in images

Main Menu

Tools

E-Book

Open E-Book

Select an image

Press N P

Select Jump

to Link, Toggle Mask or Play Animation

Press b

Jump to Link

Select jump information to move to other pages. Use linked information to send MMS messages or access Mobile Internet sites

(E-Book will close).

See P.11-26 "Using Linked Info/Copying

Text".

Toggle Mask Hidden text or images appear

Play Animation Flip animation plays

Using a Dictionary

Look Up Word

Use downloaded E-Book dictionaries to look up word definitions, etc.

Main Menu

Tools

E-Book

Select a dictionary A Press b A Select an entry field

Press b

Enter a word

Press b

^ Select an entry and press b to view its definitions.

^ Key Assignments: see P.11-25

Compass

Find magnetic north and calculate other directions from your current position. Adjust Motion Control sensor (see

P.11-29) before using Compass for the first time.

Main Menu

Tools

1 Select Compass and press b

^ Compass indicator points towards magnetic north.

Note

H ^ Built-in sensors detect handset orientation and Earth's magnetic field. Compass calculates the direction of magnetic north based on the readings of these sensors and does not support the Global Positioning System

(GPS). Actual direction may differ from that shown on

Compass. Use Compass only as a rough guide.

^ Actual direction of magnetic north may differ when:

B Aboard trains or in vehicles

B Near metal objects such as desks and shelves

B In steel-framed buildings

B Near or inside lifts

B Near sources of magnetic fields

^ Keep handset Display as level as possible.

Tip H When directions do not appear correctly, adjust Motion

Control sensor (see P.11-29). In Compass window,

press N n and follow onscreen instructions.

11-28

Motion Control Sensor

Adjust Motion Control sensor before using Compass for the first time or when it does not work correctly.

Main Menu H Settings A Phone Settings (F)

1 Select Motion Control and press b

^ Follow onscreen instructions.

^ If interrupted by incoming call, etc., press i to redo.

Note

H ^ Avoid adjusting Motion Control sensor when:

B Near sources of magnetic fields, including speakers, refrigerators, doors, handbags, accessories, magnet therapy items, etc.

B Aboard trains or in vehicles

B Near metal objects such as desks and shelves

B In steel-framed buildings

^ Motion Control sensor may need to be readjusted for changes in ambient temperature.

Phone Help

Learn when/how to use Keypad functions/shortcuts.

Main Menu

Tools

1 Select Phone Help and press b

Phone Help window opens.

Handset Status and

Key Press Method

Target Key

Function

2 Use E to toggle guides

3 Press N K to exit 11

11-29

Optional Services

12-1

Optional Services Overview

^ When S appears, access services from a touch-tone landline.

^ For details, contact Vodafone Customer Centre, General

Information (see P.18-24).

Call

Forwarding

When you know you won't be able to receive calls made to 804SH, automatically divert incoming calls to another phone number (see right)

Voice Mail

Set 804SH to forward all or all unanswered calls to

Voice Mail Centre. Access caller messages from

804SH in service area or from a touch-tone phone

anywhere (see P.12-3).

Call

Waiting*

Call Waiting alerts you to incoming calls when the line is already engaged. After the tone, place the current call on hold and answer the second, or

alternate between calls (see P.12-5).

Conference

Call

Open a second line while the first is engaged.

Switch back and forth between two lines or talk on both simultaneously. Add other parties to an existing conversation and talk on up to five lines

simultaneously (see P.12-5).

Call

Barring

Restrict incoming/outgoing calls depending on

conditions (see P.12-6)

Caller ID

Show or hide your own number when placing calls

(see P.12-9)

An additional contract is required.

Call Forwarding

Set forwarding condition and forwarding number beforehand to divert incoming calls to a specified number.

^ Call Forwarding and Voice Mail cannot be used at the same time. (Activating Call Forwarding cancels Voice Mail.)

^ Call Forwarding is not available when All Outgoing Calls or

All Incoming Calls in Call Barring is active.

Call

Forwarding

Initiate Call Forwarding

Main Menu

Settings

Call/Video Call (F)

Call Settings

Voicemail & Diverts

Diverts

Direct Entry

Select Always or No Answer

Press b

Select

Enter Phone Number

Press b

Enter a phone number

Press b

C For No Answer, select ring time A Press b

^ Include dialling code for landline numbers.

Phone Book

Select Always or No Answer

Press b

Select an entry

Press b twice

C For entries with multiple numbers, select an entry

Press b

Select a number

Press b twice

C For No Answer, select ring time

Press b

Incoming Calls while Call Forwarding is Active

C To answer calls, press f while handset is ringing/vibrating.

^ When Always is set, handset does not ring/vibrate for calls.

12-2

Note

Phone Numbers Beginning with the Following

Numbers Cannot be Saved:

^ 1 (Public Service Numbers: 110, 119, 118, etc.)

^ 00 (International call numbers: 001, 0041, etc.)

^ 0120 (Toll-free numbers)

^ 0990 (Fee-based services: Dial Q2, etc.)

Forwarding Video Calls

Video Calls are forwarded only to Video Call-compatible devices that comply with 3G-324M.

Tip

Adjust ring time to set the response priority when using

Call Forwarding together with Answer Phone (see P.2-8).

Example: Ring time for Call Forwarding: 10 seconds

Ring time for Answer Phone: 9 seconds

In this example, Answer Phone responds first. (Priority may change depending on signal conditions.)

Cancel All Cancel Call Forwarding

Main Menu

Settings

Call/Video Call (F)

Voicemail & Diverts

Call Settings

Select Cancel All

Press b

Press N i

^ Cancel All also cancels Voice Mail.

Status Check Call Forwarding status

Main Menu

Settings

Call/Video Call (F)

Call Settings

Voicemail & Diverts

Status

Select Always or No Answer

Press b

^ Call Forwarding status appears.

C Press b to return.

Voice Mail

Transfer incoming calls to Voice Mail Centre.

^ Calls are transferred to Voice Mail Centre using Call

Forwarding function. Therefore, Voice Mail and Call

Forwarding cannot be used at the same time.

^ For details, contact Vodafone Customer Centre, General

Information (see P.18-24).

^ Voice Mail is not available when All Outgoing Calls or All

Incoming Calls in Call Barring is active.

Voice Mail Initiate Voice Mail

Main Menu

H Settings A Call/Video Call (F) A Call Settings

A Voicemail & Diverts A Voicemail A Activate

Select Always or No Answer

Press b

C For No Answer, select ring time A Press b

Incoming Calls while Voice Mail is Active

C To answer calls, press f while handset is ringing/vibrating.

^ When Always is set, handset does not ring/vibrate for calls.

12-3

Tip

Adjust ring time to set the response priority when using

Voice Mail together with Answer Phone (see P.2-8).

Example: Ring time for Voice Mail: 10 seconds

Ring time for Answer Phone: 9 seconds

In this example, Answer Phone responds first. (Priority may change depending on signal conditions.)

Cancel All Cancel Voice Mail

Main Menu

Settings

Call/Video Call (F)

Voicemail & Diverts

Call Settings

Select Cancel All

Press b

Press N i

^ Cancel All also cancels Call Forwarding.

Status Check Voice Mail status

Main Menu

Settings

Call/Video Call (F)

Call Settings

Voicemail & Diverts

Status

Select Always or No Answer

Press b

^ Voice Mail status appears.

C Press b to return.

Play Voice Mail Check Voice Mail messages

Press 1 for 1+ seconds.

^ Follow the voice guidance for further operations after handset connects to Voice Mail Centre.

^ Alternatively, follow these Steps in Standby.

B Press b A

Select Phone Book

Press b

Select Call

Voicemail

Press b

B Press b A

Select Settings

Press b

Video Call

Press b

Select Call/

Select Voicemail & Diverts

Press b

Select Voicemail

Press b

Select Call

Voicemail

Press b

Tip H g appears when new messages are recorded, and disappears after they are checked from handset.

VM Centre

Number

Main Menu

Change Voice Mail Centre numbers

KVM Centre Number: 09066517000

Mailbox Numbers: Home Mailbox No. 1416,

Roam Mailbox No. +819066514170

H Settings A Call/Video Call (F) A Call Settings

A Voicemail & Diverts A Voicemail A Settings

VM Centre Number

Select VM Centre Number

Press b

Enter

Centre Number

Press b

Mailbox Numbers

Select Access Voicemail

Press b

Select Home

Mailbox No. or Roam Mailbox No.

Press b

Enter Mailbox No.

Press b

12-4

Call Waiting

An additional contract is required.

Call Waiting

On/Off

Activate or cancel Call Waiting

Main Menu

H Settings A Call/Video Call (F) A Call Settings

A Call Waiting

Choose On or Off

Press b

Status Check Call Waiting status

Main Menu

H Settings A Call/Video Call (F) A Call Settings

A Call Waiting

Select Status

Press b

^ Call Waiting status appears.

C Press b to return.

Incoming Calls Place Line 1 on hold to answer Line 2

When a tone sounds during a call, press f.

^ Press f to switch between two lines.

Ending a Call while Someone is on Hold

C Press g or close handset. All lines are disconnected.

Line 1 Ends while Line 2 is on Hold

C Short beeps sound. Press M e to talk with party on hold.

Tip

H ^ Handset does not ring or vibrate for incoming calls while a line is engaged. A tone sounds from Earpiece and Call Waiting appears.

^ When Voice Mail or Call Forwarding is active, unanswered calls are transferred to Voice Mail Centre or the forwarding number. When active service is set to

Always Call Waiting is disabled.

Conference Call

An additional contract is required.

Dial New

Open another line during a call

Number

Enter a phone number during a call

Press f

^ Line 2 is open. Line 1 is placed on hold.

^ Press D to select a number from Phone Book or press f for

1+ seconds to select from Call Log (All Calls).

Switch Line Switch between two open lines

During a call, press f.

^ The line switches. The other line is placed on hold.

12-5

Closing Handset while Someone is on Hold

C All lines are disconnected.

Pressing g while Someone is on Hold

C The active line ends, then short beeps sound. Press M e to talk with party on hold.

Line 1 Ends while Line 2 is on Hold

C Short beeps sound. Press M e to talk with the party on hold.

Conference

Call

Use up to five lines simultaneously

Press N P while switching between two lines

Select Multi Party

Press b

Select

Conference All

Press b

Ending Calls during Conference Call

C Press g or close handset. All lines are disconnected.

Some Lines End during Conference Call

C Other lines remain connected.

Call Barring

Restrict incoming/outgoing Voice Calls, Video Calls or SMS messages.

Following restrictions are available:

All Outgoing Calls Restrict all non-emergency calls

International Calls

Only Local & Home

Allow only domestic calls

Restrict all international calls except to Japan

All Incoming Calls Reject all calls

Bar if Abroad Reject calls when outside Japan

Example: During a stay in the United Kingdom, only calls within the country are possible.

Example: During a stay in the United Kingdom, both calls within the country and to Japan are possible.

Reject incoming calls according to phone numbers, or reject incoming calls without Caller ID.

Rejected Numbers Reject calls from designated numbers

Withheld Call Reject incoming calls without Caller ID

12-6

Note

H ^ Network Password selected at initial subscription (see

P.1-24) is required to change Call Barring settings.

^ If Network Password is incorrectly entered three times,

Call Barring settings are locked. To resolve, Network

Password and Centre Access Code must be changed.

For details, contact Vodafone Customer Centre,

General Information (see P.18-24).

^ All Outgoing Calls and All Incoming Calls are disabled when Call Forwarding or Voice Mail is active.

(Call Forwarding or Voice Mail takes priority.)

Tip H If call is attempted when Call Barring is active, Call

Barred. appears. It may take longer to appear in some areas. Check Call Barring settings if the message does not appear.

Restricting Outgoing Calls

Set/Cancel

Restriction

Set or cancel restriction of outgoing calls

Main Menu

Settings

Call/Video Call (F)

Call Settings

Call Barring

Outgoing Calls

Each Restriction & Service Type

Select restriction

Press b

Select a service type

Press b

Choose On (set) or Off

Press b

Enter Network Password

Press b

Cancelling All Restrictions

Select Cancel All

Press b

Enter Network

Password

Press b

Tip

Emergency calls (110, etc.) are possible even when

outgoing calls are restricted. For more, see P.2-4

"Emergency Calls".

Status Check Call Barring status for outgoing calls

Main Menu

H Settings A Call/Video Call (F) A Call Settings

A Call Barring A Outgoing Calls

Select restriction

Press b

Select a service type

Press b

Select Status

Press b

^ Call Barring status appears.

C Press b to return.

12-7

Restricting Incoming Calls

Set/Cancel

Restriction

Set or cancel restriction of incoming calls

Main Menu

Settings

Call/Video Call (F)

Call Settings

Call Barring

Incoming Calls

Each Restriction & Service Type

Select restriction

Press b

Select a service type

Press b

Choose On (set) or Off

Press b

Enter Network Password

Press b

Cancelling All Restrictions

Select Cancel All

Press b

Enter Network

Password

Press b

Status Check Call Barring status for incoming calls

Main Menu

H Settings A Call/Video Call (F) A Call Settings

A Call Barring A Incoming Calls

Select restriction

Press b

Select a service type

Press b

Select Status

Press b

^ Call Barring status appears.

C Press b to return.

Rejecting Calls

Designate phone numbers to reject, then set Switch On/Off to On.

Set Reject

Number

Designate phone numbers to reject

Main Menu

Settings

Call Barring

Call/Video Call (F)

Call Settings

Rejected Numbers

Set Reject

Number

Adding Numbers

Select ----------

Press b

Enter a number

Press b

C To select from Phone Book, select ---------- A Press N P

A Select Ph.Book list A Press b A Select an entry A

Press b A Select a number A Press b

B Name appears for numbers saved from Phone Book.

C To select from Call Log, Select ---------- A Press N P

A Select From Call Log A Press b A Use F to select a type A Select a record A Press b

Editing Numbers

Select an entry

Press N P

Select Edit

Press b

Edit the number

Press b

Deleting Numbers

Select an entry

Press N P

Select Delete

Press b

Press N i

Switch On/Off Reject calls from designated numbers

Main Menu

KOff

H Settings A Call/Video Call (F) A Call Settings A

Call Barring A Rejected Numbers A Switch On/Off

Choose On (reject) or Off

Press b

12-8

Rejecting Calls without Caller ID

Withheld Call Reject incoming calls without Caller ID

KOff

Main Menu

H Settings A Call/Video Call (F) A Call Settings

A Call Barring A Withheld Call

Choose On (reject) or Off

Press b

Changing Network Password

Change N/W

Password

Change Network Password

Main Menu

H Settings A Call/Video Call (F) A Call Settings

A Call Barring A Change N/W Password

Enter current Network Password

Press b

Enter new Network Password

Press b

Enter new Network Password again

Press b

Caller ID

Show or hide your own phone number when placing calls.

Regardless of this setting, sending or blocking Caller ID can be selected for each call. Enter the following numbers/

Symbols before a phone number when placing a call.

Send

Block

186 or q31p

184 or p31p

Show Your

Number

Main Menu

Send or block Caller ID

KOn

H Settings A Call/Video Call (F) A Call Settings

A Show My Number

Choose On (send) or Off

Press b

Status Check Caller ID status

Main Menu

H Settings A Call/Video Call (F) A Call Settings

A Show My Number

Select Status

Press b

^ Caller ID status appears.

12-9

Vodafone live! Basics

13-1

Vodafone live! Services

Use Vodafone live! services to exchange text/multimedia messages with compatible handsets, PCs and other devices; download text, sounds, images and V-applications; browse the Mobile Internet via Web.

^ For more information concerning Vodafone live! services, contact Vodafone Customer Centre, General Information (see P.18-24).

^ To use Vodafone live! services, first perform Re-Provisioning to update Network information (see P.1-19).

CMessaging

Use Short Message Service (SMS) and Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) for messaging (see P.14-2). These

messaging services are also available outside Japan.

SMS

Use this basic Vodafone live! messaging service to exchange short text messages of up to 160 alphanumerics with Vodafone handsets.

This service is the ideal solution for fast and short text messaging!

MMS

Exchange text messages of up to 30,000 alphanumerics with MMS- compatible Vodafone handsets, email-compatible mobiles, PCs and other like devices. Attach images/sounds for multimedia messages.

Text

Sounds

Images

13 vFiles

Service Centre

An additional contract is required to use MMS and receive e-mail from PCs, etc.

CWeb (Vodafone Web)

Access the Mobile Internet. Browse for image or sound files as well as information (see P.15-2).

Vodafone Web Main Menu

Access Vodafone live!-compatible Mobile

Internet sites via Vodafone Web Main

Menu; download news/info as well as files for use on handset.

Images

Text

Sounds

(Mobile) Internet

Enter Mobile Internet site URL to view a specific site/page directly; use Access

History to access previously viewed sites/ pages while online.

An additional contract is required to use Web service.

13-2

Mobile Internet

Access

CV-applications

Download V-applications, including games and graphics (see P.16-2).

Web Downloads

Search for and download a wide variety of useful and entertaining V-applications via

Vodafone Web.

Network V-applications

A number of V-applications let you enjoy network gaming or even access real-time news/info.

Download

Scores

Games

Real Time

Stock Prices

Screensaver

Use this entertaining function to set a

V-application that activates when handset enters Standby.

Screensaver

^ Download and use 804SH-compatible V-applications.

^ Separate subscriptions are required for V-applications downloaded via Web.

13-3

Messaging

14-1

Basics

Use SMS and MMS for messaging.

SMS (Short

Message Service)

MMS (Multimedia

Messaging

Service)

Use this basic Vodafone live! service to exchange short text messages (of up to 160 alphanumerics) with all Vodafone handsets.

Exchange long text messages (of up to

30,000 alphanumerics) with all

MMS-compatible Vodafone handsets, as well as email-compatible mobiles, computers and other such devices. Attach images/sounds for multimedia messages.

Messaging Folder

Messages are organised in folders by type.

Received

Unclassed

Folder 1 - 19

Drafts

Sent

Unsent

Templates

Received messages

Appear when Received Box View

(see P.14-23) is set to Folder View.

Incomplete/unsent messages

Sent messages

Undelivered/cancelled/failed mail

Messages saved as templates

When unread, unsent or draft messages are saved, the corresponding Messaging folder names appear in bold with the number of those messages.

Window Description

Messaging Folder Contents

Select a Messaging folder and press b. To select a different

view for Received, see P.14-23 "Received Box View".

Message Type/Status

^ Message Status: o Unread/Unsent H Read q Sent r Failed

D Unread Delivery Report E Read Delivery Report

Indicators for message types/settings below appear at the same time.

^ Message Type/Settings: x MMS Mail 1

6 Attachments m Priority (High)

W SMS Mail o Protected p Priority (Low)

Q MMS Notice 2 Q Delivery Report requested

3 n SMS Mail on

USIM Card

Appears when MMS is subscribed.

Appears in Received.

Appears in Sent.

Message Number

Subject or Message Text; Sent or Received Date & Time

^ Subject appears for MMS, and message text appears for SMS.

Sender or Recipient

^ Number, address or name appears.

Tip

Follow these steps to sort messages.

Press N P A Select Advanced A Press b A

Select Sort

Press b

Select an option

Press b

14-2

Message Contents

Select a message and press b to open it.

Received or Sent Date & Time

Sender or Recipient

^ Number, address or name appears.

Subject (MMS Mail only)

Message Text

Customising Handset Address

Change alphanumerics before @ of the default handset mail address.

Default

Tip H ^ To activate Display Backlight, press 0 - 9.

^ Press p to open previous message (older one), or press q to open next one (newer one).

Memory Status

C Press b A Select Messaging A Press b A Select

Memory Status

Press b

B Press M W to return.

^ Delete messages/files when memory is low. New messages are not received or handset performance may be affected when memory is full.

Account Name Domain Name

Custom

Entered Account Name

$ varies by subscription area.

If you have further questions, please contact Vodafone Customer

Centre, General Information (see

P.18-24

^ Handset must connect to the Network to customise handset address.

^ Perform Re-Provisioning (see P.1-19) before customising

handset address.

^ Customising handset mail address helps reduce spam.

^ Default Account Name is random alphanumerics.

Main Menu H Vodafone live! A Vodafone live!

1 Select My Vodafone and press b

2 Select

各種変更手続き

and press b

3 Select

オリジナルメール設定・各種メール設定

and press b

4 Select the text entry field below

暗証番号を入力し

14-3

5 Enter Centre Access Code and press b

Centre Access Code: see P.1-24

6 Select OK and press b

7 Select

1. 各種メール設定

and press b

8 Select

1. メールアドレス編集

and press b

9 Select the text entry field below

ご希望のｱｶｳﾝﾄを

10 Enter an address and press b

11 Select OK and press b

Note

This procedure may change without prior notice. For further information, contact Vodafone Customer Centre,

General Information (see P.18-24).

Sending Text Messages

Basics

Available entry items vary by Message Type.

SMS

MMS

Recipient

Available

Subject

N/A

Available

Message

Available

Attachments

N/A

Available

Message Type changes to MMS automatically when subject is entered, a file is attached, etc.

Attach

Files

Create

Slide

Recipient is

Mail Address

Enter

Subject

Entry Limit

Exceeded

SMS converts to MMS

SMS messages are converted to MMS messages when:

^ Recipient's Vodafone handset number is over 20 digits

^ Font Colour is not Black

^ Font Size is not Standard

^ Priority is not Normal

^ Delivery Time is not No delay

14-4

Tip

MMS messages may not convert back to SMS messages even after deleting subject or changing settings.

In this case, perform Steps 1 - 2 in "Setting Message

Type" on P.14-12.

(Handset can be set to send SMS messages only.)

Character Entry Limits

Character entry limits vary by Message Type.

SMS 160 single-byte alphanumerics

MMS Approximately 30,000 single-byte alphanumerics

^ Send up to 300 KB including message text via MMS. Message text character limit differs by attachment size or number of recipients.

^ Approximate mail size appears in Mail Composition window

(see P.14-6).

Mail Composition Overview

SMS MMS

Enter Recipient

Enter Subject

Compose Message

Image

Attach Files

Sound Video vFile Etc.

Send Message

14-5

Media Console

Media Console appears in Mail Composition window for mail-related functions.

Media Console

Send

Add recipients; convert Message

Type; view message; save message as draft or template; or use option settings.

Picture

Attach still images.

Sound

Attach melody files.

Video

Attach video files.

Others

Attach files including Phone Book/ schedule entries; view message/ attachments; convert Message Type; save message as draft or template; or use option settings.

Media Console Operations

C When r appears on Media Console, use F to select an item

Press b

C If r is not on Media Console, press D until it appears A

Select an item

Press b

Tip

In this manual, most messaging operations are described for use with Media Console.

Creating & Sending a Message

^ Read through the basic information on P.14-4 - 14-6 beforehand.

^ Save Signature to enter into message text (see P.14-23 "Edit

Signature").

^ Create Contact Groups beforehand to send the same

message to multiple recipients at one time (see P.4-12).

^ Save frequently used numbers/addresses to Speed Mail List

(see P.14-22).

1 Press b, select Messaging and press b

^ Alternatively, press N Y in Standby.

2 Select Create Message and

press b

Mail Composition window opens.

3 Select recipient field and press b

Select Address window opens.

Entering Recipients (MMS): see P.14-8

Mail Composition

Window

Select Address

Window

14-6

4 Phone Book

1 Select From Phone Book and press b

2 Select a recipient and press b

To search Phone Book, see Steps 2 - 3 on P.4-8.

C When multiple items are saved, select one A Press b

Contact Groups (see P.4-12)

1 Select Select Group and press b

2 Select a Group and press b

C Press M W to return. Omit this step when only one member is saved.

C To add recipients (when multiple members are saved), select Add Contact A Press b A Repeat Step 4 A

Press M W

Sent Mail Record

1 Select a recipient and press b

^ Sent mail records are names, phone numbers or mail addresses with the corresponding indicators (P, etc.).

Speed Mail List (see P.14-22)

1 Press N P

2 Select Speed Mail List and press b

3 Select a recipient and press b

Direct Entry

1 Select Enter Phone No. or Enter Email and

press b

2 Enter recipient's Vodafone handset number

or mail address and press b

5 Press D (for SMS) or b (for MMS)

^ When sending an SMS message, skip ahead to Step 7.

To edit recipients, see P.14-8 "Entering Recipients".

6 Enter subject and press b

^ Enter up to 40 single-byte alphanumerics (13 single-byte katakana or 13 double-byte characters).

7 Enter a message

Entering Characters: see P.3-5

C To enter Signature, press N P

Select Advanced

Press b A Select Signature A Press b

C To change font colour, press N P A Select Advanced

Press b

Select Font Colour

Press b

Select a colour

Press b

C To change font size, press N P A Select Advanced A

Press b A Select Font Size A Press b A Select a size

Press b

8 Press b

^ When sending an SMS message or to proceed without attaching files, skip ahead to Step 10.

C To edit the message, select message text field and press b

A Edit A Press b

C To delete the message, select message text field A

Press N P

Select Remove Text

Press b

9 Attach files or create slides

Attaching Files: see P.14-9

Creating Slides: see P.14-10

10 Select n (Send) on Media

Console and press b

Send Options window opens.

C To view the message, select Preview

Message

Press b

To edit recipients, see P.14-8

"Entering Recipients".

Setting Message Type: see P.14-12

Additional Settings: see P.14-11

Saving to Drafts: see P.14-12

Creating Templates: see P.14-13

11 Select Send Message and press b

^ Messages are sent even if handset is closed.

Send Options

Window

14-7

Sending from Phone Book Entries

C Open a Phone Book entry and follow these steps:

^ Phone Numbers

Select a number

Press b

Select Create

Message

Press b

Perform from Step 5 on

P.14-7

^ Mail Addresses

Select a mail address

Press b

Perform from

Step 5 on P.14-7

Incoming Calls while Creating Message

C Content is saved temporarily. End the call to return.

When Recipient Handset is Off or Out-of-Range

C Messages are stored at the Centre, and delivered when recipient handset detects signal.

^ To select storage period, see P.14-11 or P.14-24 "Expiry

Time".

Messages are deleted if not received by the specified

Expiry Time.

Delivery Failure

C Information window opens (m appears) for delivery failure.

To send unsent messages, press b A Select

Messaging A Press b A Select Unsent A

Press b

Select a message

Press N P

Select Re-send

Press b

C Activate Automatic Resend (see P.14-23) to reattempt to

send unsent messages automatically up to two times.

^ If messages are not sent after two Automatic Resend attempts, follow the above steps to send manually.

^ Automatic Resend may send the same message twice.

14-8

Entering Recipients

C Follow these steps to add recipients:

In Mail Composition window/Send Options window, select recipient field A Press b A Select Add

Contact A Press b A

Perform Step 4 on P.14-7

B Press M W to return.

^ Enter up to 20 recipients in total.

C Follow these steps to change recipient status to Cc (carbon copy) or Bcc (blind carbon copy):

In Mail Composition window/Send Options window, select recipient field A Press b A Select a recipient A Press N P A Select Change to

TO, Change to CC or Change to BCC A Press b

^ Other recipients cannot see numbers/addresses set to Bcc.

C To change/edit, open Mail Composition window/Send

Options window and follow these steps:

Select recipient field

Press b

Select a recipient

Press N P

Select Edit

Recipients A Press b A Edit address A Press b

B Press M W to return.

C To delete, open Mail Composition window/Send Options window and follow these steps:

Select recipient field

Press b

Select a recipient

A Press N P A Select Remove A Press b

B Press M W to return.

Note H When a mail address is entered, do not use single-byte katakana or Pictographs in message text and subject.

They may not appear properly on recipient devices.

Tip

Shortcut to Send Options window (see P.14-7): Press f

in Mail Composition window.

Attaching Files

Attach images, melody files, vFiles, etc. to MMS messages.

^ Attach up to 300 KB including message text.

^ Confirm compatibility with recipient handsets (file format, services, etc.) before sending files.

^ Follow these steps after Step 9 on P.14-7. Mail Composition

window returns after a file is attached.

1 Image Files

1 Select y (Picture) on Media Console and

press b

2 Select Saved Pictures and press b

C To capture an image, select Take Picture

Press b

A Press b to shoot A Press b (Omit the next step.)

B When confirmation for save location appears, select a location A Press b

3 Select a file and press b

C Resize for Sending appears for JPEG images too large to send. Select a smaller file size to attach the image A Press b

Melody Files

1 Select r (Sound) on Media Console and

press b

2 Select Saved Sounds and press b

C To record sound, select Record Voice

Press b

Press b to start recording A Press b to stop A Select

Accept

Press b

Select To Phone Memory or To

Memory Card A Press b (Omit the next step.)

3 Select a file and press b

C To play sounds, select a file

Press N P

Select Play A Press b

Video Files

1 Select u (Video) on Media Console and

press b

2 Select Saved Videos and press b

C To record video, select Record Video A Press b A

Press b to start recording

Press b to stop

Select Accept A Press b A Select To Phone

Memory or To Memory Card

Press b (Omit the next step.)

3 Select a file and press b

C To play video, select a file A Press N P A

Select Play

Press b

Phone Book Entries

1 Select 0 (Others) on Media Console and

press b

2 Select Attach Ph.Book and press b

3 Select an entry and press b

Selected entry is saved to Data Folder (Other

Documents) and attached. (6 appears next to message size indication.)

Schedule Entries

1 Select 0 (Others) on Media Console and

press b

2 Select Attach Appt. and press b

3 Select a date with schedule and press b

4 Select an entry and press b

Selected entry is saved to Data Folder (Other

Documents) and attached. (6 appears next to message size indication.)

14-9

Attaching Other Files

1 Select 0 (Others) on Media Console and

press b

2 Select Attach File and press b

3 Select a folder and press b

4 Select a file and press b

6 appears next to message size indication.

Changing/Deleting Attachments (Picture/Sound/Video)

C To change, follow these steps in Mail Composition window.

Select a file A Press N P A Select Replace

Picture, Replace Sound or Replace Video

Press b

Select a file

Press b

C To delete, follow these steps in Mail Composition window.

Select a file

Press N P

Select Remove

Picture, Remove Sound or Remove Video

Press b

Opening/Deleting Attachments (Others)

C To open, follow these steps in Mail Composition window.

Select 0 (Others) on Media Console A Press b A

Select View Attachments A Press b A Select a file

Press b

C To delete, follow these steps in Mail Composition window.

Select 0 (Others) on Media Console A Press b A

Select View Attachments

Press b

Select a file

Press N P

Select Delete

Press b

^ To delete all, press N P in View Attachments window

A Select Delete All A Press b A Press N i

Creating Slides

Combine message text with image/sound or video to create a slide. Multiple slides in a message appear sequentially in numerical order on MMS-compatible recipient devices.

^ Alternatively, attach multiple files to a message. Slides are created automatically.

^ Set display time for each slide in Step 5 on P.14-11.

^ Slides appear as standard message text and attachments on incompatible recipient devices.

^ Attach one file (or one image and one sound file) per slide.

^ Follow these steps after Step 9 on P.14-7. Mail Composition

window returns after a slide is attached.

Attach a file (see P.14-9)

2 Select 0 (Others) on Media Console and press b

3 Select Add Slide and press b

4 Select Add Slide After and

press b

Message text and the attached file are set as the first slide. Another message text field appears for the next slide.

^ To create a slide and insert another message text field (slide) before it, select Add Slide Before and press b.

14-10

5 Enter text/attach a file

^ To add slides, repeat Steps 2 - 5.

C To set display time, select a slide number

Press N P

A Select Slide Duration A Press b A Select time A

Press b

B To enter display time, select Custom Time A Press b twice

Enter time (1 - 60 seconds)

Press b

Press N P A Select OK A Press b

C To delete slides, select a slide number

Press N P

Select Remove Slide A Press b

B The last remaining slide returns to standard message text and an attachment.

Additional Settings

SMS/MMS Send Options

^ Settings are valid for one message.

^ Follow these steps after Step 10 on P.14-7; after Mail

Composition window returns, complete and send message.

Delivery

Report

Confirm SMS/MMS delivery (see P.14-14)

CAvailable only when messaging Vodafone handsets.

KOff

Select Settings

Press b

Select Delivery

Report

Press b

Choose On or Off

Press b

C Press M W to return to Mail Composition window.

Expiry Time

Set a time limit to store sent messages at the

Centre

KMaximum

Select Settings

Press b

Select Expiry Time

Press b

Select a limit

Press b

C Press M W to return to Mail Composition window.

MMS Send Options

^ Settings are valid for one message.

^ SMS messages are converted to MMS messages when an

MMS Setting is applied. These MMS messages may not convert back to SMS even after restoring the setting to default.

^ Follow these steps after Step 10 on P.14-7; after Mail

Composition window returns, complete and send message.

Priority Set priority when sending mail

KNormal

Select Settings

Press b

Select Priority

Press b

Select priority

Press b

C Press M W to return to Mail Composition window.

^ Priority setting does not affect delivery speed.

Delivery Time Set time delay for message delivery

KNo delay

Select Settings

Press b

Select Delivery Time

Press b

Select time

Press b

C Press M W to return to Mail Composition window.

14-11

Setting Message Type

^ SMS converts to MMS when subject is entered/file attached.

^ Automatic is set when creating a message.

^ Follow these steps after Step 10 on P.14-7; after Mail

Composition window returns, complete and send message.

1 Select Message Type and press b

2 Select Automatic, SMS or MMS and press b

Using Drafts

Saving to Drafts

^ When memory is full, delete messages (see P.14-19) before

creating new ones.

^ Follow these steps after Step 10 on P.14-7.

1 Select Save to Drafts and press b

Message is saved to Drafts folder.

Note H Recipient status (To/Cc/Bcc) or the order in which attachments appear may change when saving MMS messages.

Sending from Drafts

Main Menu

Messaging

1 Select Drafts and press b

Saved messages appear.

C To open properties, select a message A Press N P A

Select Message Details

Press b

B Press D to scroll down.

B Press M W to return.

C To delete draft messages, select one A Press N P A

Select Delete

Press b

Press N i

2 Select a message and press b

Mail Composition window opens with some fields filled in.

3 Edit/send the message

^ For details, see procedures for creating a message

(see P.14-6 - 14-7).

^ Sent messages are deleted from Drafts.

14-12

Using Templates

Creating Templates

Save created messages as templates.

Follow these steps after Step 10 on P.14-7.

1 Select Save as Template and press b

2 Press b, enter a name and press b

^ Alternatively, press a key (0 - 9, q or p) instead of b to enter the first character.

3 Press N P

4 Select Save and press b

Creating a Message from Templates

Main Menu H Messaging

1 Select Templates and press b

C To open properties, select a template A Press N P A

Select Message Details

Press b

B Press M W to return.

2 Select a template and press b

Mail Composition window opens.

Complete and send message (see P.14-6 - 14-7)

Incoming Text Messages

Opening New Messages

1 Delivery Notice appears and

Information window opens

(k appears) for new mail

^ If closed, open 804SH for new mail to see Delivery Notice appear and

Information window open.

2 Select Message and press b

Received opens.

^ Alternatively, press b while Delivery

Notice appears.

C When folders appear in Received

(see P.14-23 "Received Box View"),

select one A Press b

3 Select a message and press b

Message window opens.

C To retrieve complete MMS messages,

see P.14-14.

Using Messages: see P.14-15 - 14-16

Information

Received

(List View)

Message Window

14-13

Delivery Report

C When messages are sent with Delivery Report On (see

P.14-11, P.14-24), handset receives a Delivery Report from

the Centre. Open Delivery Reports in the same manner as standard messages.

New Mail Out of Standby

C Information window opens when handset returns to Standby.

Tip

When no Delivery Notice or Information window appears

open from Received (see P.14-15 "Checking Messages").

Retrieving Complete MMS Messages

Centre sends initial portion of MMS message when:

B The message was sent to multiple recipients

B Files are attached to the message

Q (MMS Notice) appears for MMS messages in Received when the remaining portion is at the Centre.

Tip H

^ To retrieve complete MMS via Mail List, see P.14-15.

^ To always retrieve complete MMS automatically, set

Home Download (Japan) or Roaming Download

(Abroad) to Always Download (see P.14-24).

Main Menu H Messaging

1 Select Received and press b

C When folders appear in Received, select one A Press b

2 Retrieving a Selected MMS Message

1 Select a message with Q and press N P

Retrieving Selected MMS Messages

1 Select messages (perform from Step 2 in

"Selecting Multiple Messages" on P.14-16)

and press N P

^ When more than one message is selected, some may not be retrieved.

3 Select Download and press b

Download starts.

^ After download, Received opens.

C To cancel download, press M 3 A Press N i

Note H Messages up to 300 KB can be retrieved.

Acquire Mail List

Retrieve a list of messages stored at the Centre (Server Mail).

Main Menu H Messaging

1 Select Server Mail Box and press b

C To open retrieved Mail Lists, select Mail List A Press b

C To retrieve all Server Mail, select Retrieve All Mails

Press b

C To delete all Server Mail, select Delete All Mails A Press b

Press N i

B It may take some time to delete all Server Mail

(approximately two to three minutes for 20 messages).

14-14

2 Select Acquire Mail List and press b

After retrieval, Mail List appears.

^ When Mail List has already been retrieved, it is refreshed.

C To cancel retrieval, press M 3 A Press N i

C Using Mail List: see below

Server Status

C To check Server status, follow these steps after Step 1 in

"Acquire Mail List" on P.14-14.

Select Server Mail Volume

Press b

B Press M W to return.

B To update Server Mail Volume, press N h A

Press N i

Using Mail List

Download Retrieve complete MMS messages

Select a message

Press N P

Select

Download

Press b

^ Downloaded messages are deleted from Mail List and saved to

Received.

Remote Forward Server Mail directly to other Vodafone

Forward handsets, PCs, etc.

Select a message

Press N P

Select Remote

Forward

Press b

Select To:

Press b

Enter

recipients (perform Step 4 on P.14-7)

Select Send

Message

Press b

Delete Delete Server Mail

Select a message

Press N P

Select Delete

Press b

Press N i

Using Messages

Reply/forward messages, or use contained information to place calls, send messages or access Mobile Internet sites.

To sort received messages automatically by sender or

subject, see P.14-21 "Sorting by Text String".

Checking Messages

Main Menu

Messaging

1 Select Received, Drafts, Sent, Unsent or

Templates and press b

Messages appear.

C While Delivery Notice appears, press b to open Received.

C When folders appear in Received, select one A Press b

C To open properties, select a message

Press N P

Select Message Details A Press b

B Press D to scroll.

B Press M W to return.

14-15

2 Select a message and press b

^ When an image is attached, press b to open it. Images may not appear if file size is too large.

^ Slides play automatically.

^ Mail Composition window (see P.14-6) opens after opening

messages in Drafts or Templates.

C Use E to scroll.

C To replay slides, press N P A Select Slide View A

Press b

B To mute/unmute sounds, press N P A Select Mute or Unmute

Press b

B To stop, press N P A Select Pause A Press b

C To copy message contents, press N P

Select Copy

Press b A Select From, To, Subject or Body A Press b

B For Body, use G to move cursor before the first character of text A Press b A Use G to select the end of text A

Press b

B To paste text into the same window or another, see P.3-12

"Copy/Cut & Paste".

Note

H ^ Attached text file contents may not appear correctly.

^ Messages in Drafts, Sent, Unsent or Templates may not open if attached files are deleted from Data Folder.

Editing Sent/Unsent Messages

C Select Sent or Unsent and press b in Step 1 on P.14-15

and follow these steps.

Select a message A Press N P A Select Edit

& Send or Edit

Press b

Perform from Step 5

on P.14-7

Selecting Multiple Messages

Select multiple messages to protect, delete or change status for all at one time.

Templates must be selected one at a time.

Main Menu H Messaging

1 Select a Messaging folder and press b

C When folders appear in Received, select one A Press b

2 Press N P

3 Select Advanced and press b

4 Select Multiple Select and press b

5 Select a message and press b p appears on the right of selected message.

C To unselect, select a message with o A Press b

6 Repeat Step 5 to select all the necessary messages

C To select all, press N P A Select Select All A Press b

C To unselect all, press N P

Select Unselect All

Press b

Switch to Read/Unread

Change received message status to read or unread.

Main Menu

Messaging

1 Select Received and press b

C When folders appear in Received, select one

Press b

14-16

2 Switching Status of a Message

1 Select a message and press N P

Switching Status of Selected Messages

1 Select messages (perform from Step 2 in

"Selecting Multiple Messages" on P.14-16)

and press N P

^ Skip ahead to Step 4.

3 Select Advanced and press b

4 Select Switch to Unread or Switch to Read and

press b

Replying to Messages

Main Menu

Messaging

1 Select Received and press b

C When folders appear in Received, select one

Press b

2 Select a message and press b

3 Press N P

4 Select Reply or Reply All and press b

^ Select Reply All to send the same message to the sender and up to 19 recipients (To/Cc) of the original message at one time. Reply All may not appear for some messages.

5 Select Reply or Reply with Hist. and press b

Mail Composition window opens.

^ Select Reply with Hist. to quote the original message text when replying.

6 Complete and send message (perform from Step

5 on P.14-7)

Tip

For Reply All, your handset may be included in recipients.

Forwarding Messages

Main Menu

Messaging

1 Select Received or Sent and press b

C When folders appear in Received, select one

Press b

2 Select a message and press b

3 Press N P

4 Select Forward and press b

Mail Composition window opens.

5 Select recipient field and press b

Select Address window opens.

6 Enter recipients and press b

To enter a recipient, perform Step 4 on P.14-7.

7 Select n (Send) on Media Console and press b

8 Select Send Message and press b

^ Files attached to the original message are automatically attached to forwarded messages.

14-17

Linked Info

Saving Linked Info to Phone Book

Save a linked phone number/mail address from within message text or sender's/recipient's number/address to

Phone Book. In message text, available numbers/addresses turn red when selected.

Main Menu

Messaging

1 Select Received or Sent and press b

C When folders appear in Received, select one

Press b

2 Select a message and press b

3 Saving Sender's/Recipient's Address

1 Press N P

2 Select Save Address and press b

3 Select a phone number or mail address and

press b

Saving Linked Info

1 Select a phone number or mail address and

press b

2 Select Save to Phone Book or Save and

press b

4 Select As New Contact and press b

Number or address is entered in corresponding Phone Book

field. Complete other fields and save (see P.4-4).

C To save to an existing Phone Book entry, open one

Press b

A Press M q

Using Linked Info

Use linked numbers, addresses or URLs (http://, https:// or

rtsp://) within message text to place calls, send messages or open Mobile Internet sites. Available numbers/addresses/

URLs turn red when selected.

Main Menu

Messaging

1 Select Received or Sent and press b

C When folders appear in Received, select one

Press b

2 Select a message and press b

3 Phone Numbers

1 Select number and press b

2 Select Call or Video Call and press b

Mail Addresses

1 Select number or address and press b

2 Select Create Message or Message and

press b

C To complete and send message, perform from Step 5

on P.14-7.

B Message is sent and handset returns to Standby.

URLs

1 Select a URL and press b

Handset connects to the Network.

^ Video/sound plays for rtsp:// URLs (see P.15-10

"Streaming").

14-18

Protecting Messages

Protect important messages in Received/Sent or Templates from unintentional deletion.

^ Protected messages cannot be deleted.

^ Templates must be selected one at a time.

Main Menu

Messaging

1 Select Received, Sent or Templates and press b

C When folders appear in Received Box, select one

Press b

2 Protecting a Message

1 Select a message and press N P

^ To protect messages in Templates, skip ahead to Step 3.

^ To cancel protection, select a message with o.

2 Select Advanced and press b

Protecting Selected Messages

1 Select messages (perform from Step 2 in

"Selecting Multiple Messages" on P.14-16)

and press N P

3 Select Lock or Unlock and press b o appears for protected messages.

Deleting Messages

^ Protected messages cannot be deleted.

^ Templates must be selected one at a time.

Selecting Messages to Delete

Main Menu H Messaging

1 Select Received, Drafts, Sent, Unsent or

Templates and press b

C When folders appear in Received Box, select one

Press b

2 Deleting a Message

1 Select a message and press N P

Deleting Selected Messages

1 Select messages (perform from Step 2 in

"Selecting Multiple Messages" on P.14-16)

and press N P

3 Select Delete and press b

4 Press N i

^ It may take some time to delete messages (approximately three seconds per message).

14-19

Delete All

Main Menu

Messaging

1 Select Received, Drafts, Sent, Unsent or

Templates and press b

C When folders appear in Received, select one

Press b

2 Press N P

^ To delete messages in Templates, skip ahead to Step 4.

3 Select Advanced and press b

4 Select Delete All and press b

5 Press N i

Saving Attachments to Data Folder

Save message attachments (images, sounds, vFiles, etc.) to Data Folder.

Main Menu

Messaging

1 Select Received or Sent and press b

C When folders appear in Received, select one

Press b

2 Select a message and press b

3 Select a file and press N P

C To open properties, select Details

Press b

B Press M W to return.

4 Select Save Item and press b

5 Select storage media and press b

^ To proceed without changing file name, skip ahead to Step 7.

6 Enter a file name

7 Press b

Message window returns.

^ When memory is full, a confirmation appears. Delete files

(see P.9-15) and try again.

Mail Folders

Received messages are saved to Unclassed. Sort messages to one of 19 folders by sender or subject.

Folder Name

Set Received Box View (see P.14-23) to Folder View

beforehand.

Main Menu

Messaging

Received

1 Select a folder and press N P

2 Select Rename and press b

C If selected folder is protected, enter Handset Code

Press b

14-20

3 Enter name and press b

^ Enter up to 30 single-byte alphanumerics (10 single-byte katakana or 10 double-byte characters).

Protect/Unprotect Folders

C To protect folders, perform Step 1 in "Folder Name" on

P.14-20 and follow these steps.

Select Lock Folder

Press b

Enter Handset

Code A Press b

^ Handset Code is required to open a protected folder.

C To cancel protection, perform Step 1 in "Folder Name" on

P.14-20 and follow these steps.

Select Unlock Folder

Press b

Enter Handset

Code A Press b

Moving Messages

Incoming linked messages cannot be moved.

Main Menu H Messaging

1 Select Received and press b

C When folders appear in Received, select one A Press b

2 Select a message and press N P

3 Select Advanced and press b

4 Select Move to Folder and press b

5 Select a folder and press b

Sorting by Text String

Sort received messages automatically by phone number, mail address or subject.

^ Create up to 20 Distribution Rules per folder.

^ Distribution Rules in folders with smaller numbers have higher priority.

Main Menu

Messaging

Mail Settings

My Folders

1 Select a folder and press b

C If selected folder is protected, enter Handset Code

Press b

2 Select a number and press b

C To delete Distribution Rules, select a number A Press N P

Select Remove or Delete All

Press b

3 Sort by Number/Address

1 Select Address and press b

2 Enter a recipient (see Step 4 on P.14-7)

C To change recipients, select one A

Press N P

Select Replace

Press b

Perform Step 4 on P.14-7

Sort by Subject

1 Select Subject and press b

2 Enter text and press b

^ Enter up to 40 single-byte alphanumerics (13 single-byte katakana or 13 double-byte characters).

14-21

Additional Functions

Speed Mail List

Save up to 10 frequently used numbers/addresses here to use Speed Mail; add recipients from Speed Mail List anytime.

Main Menu H Messaging A Mail Settings A Speed Mail List

1 Select a number and press b

C To change entries, select one A Press N P A Select

Re-Assign

Press b

Edit number/address

Press b A Press N i

C To delete entries, select one

Press N P

Select

Delete or Clear All A Press b A Press N i

2 Phone Book

1 Select From Phone Book and press b

2 Select an entry and press b

To search Phone Book, see Steps 2 - 3 on P.4-8.

C When multiple items are saved, select one

Press b

Direct Entry

1 Select Enter Phone No. or Enter Email and

press b

2 Enter recipient's Vodafone handset number

or mail address and press b

Adding to Speed Mail List while Creating Message

C Add numbers/addresses from Mail Composition window.

Select recipient field A Press b A Press N P

Select Speed Mail List

Press b

Select a number

Press b

Press N i

Perform

Step 2 on the left

Speed Mail

Create mail from Standby using addresses saved to Speed

Mail List.

1 In Standby, press the assigned number with

Keypad (1 - 9 and 0)

2 Press N A

Mail Composition window opens with the recipient entered.

3 Complete and send message (perform from Step

5 on P.14-7)

14-22

Using Automatic Resend

Activate Automatic Resend to send unsent messages (failed due to out-of-range, etc.) automatically when signal returns.

^ Resend is attempted up to two times for each message.

^ Messages are sent in the same order they were created.

^ Automatic Resend is Off by default.

Main Menu

Messaging

Mail Settings

Automatic Resend

General Settings

1 Choose On and press b

C To cancel, choose Off

Press b

B Remaining failed messages will not be sent automatically.

Note H Automatic Resend is available while roaming, however, message delivery may incur higher charges.

General Settings

Received Box

View

Toggle Received display layout between List

View and Folder View

KList View (folders are hidden)

Main Menu

H Messaging A Mail Settings A General Settings

A Received Box View

Select List View or Folder View

Press b

C When there is a protected folder, enter Handset Code

Press b

Perform the above steps

Edit Signature Save a name, etc. to insert into message text

Main Menu

H Messaging A Mail Settings A General Settings

A Edit Signature

Enter/edit signature

Press b

^ Insert signature into message text in Step 7 on P.14-7.

Auto Delete

Main Menu

Automatically delete oldest received/sent messages to make room for new ones

KSent

H Messaging A Mail Settings A General Settings

A Auto Delete

Select Received, Sent or Both

Press b

C To cancel, choose None A Press b

^ When Received/Sent memory is full, oldest received/sent messages are automatically deleted. Protect important items

against deletion (see P.14-19 "Protecting Messages").

14-23

Message List

View

Main Menu

Select style in which messages appear in lists

KOne-line View

Messaging

Mail Settings

Message List View

General Settings

Select One-line View or Two-line View A Press b

Delivery

Report

Main Menu

Confirm SMS/MMS delivery (see P.14-14)

CAvailable only when messaging Vodafone handsets.

KOff

H Messaging A Mail Settings A General Settings

A Delivery Report

Choose On (request) or Off

Press b

^ If On, reports arrive for all messages to Vodafone handsets.

To confirm the delivery of single messages, see P.14-11.

Expiry Time

Set a time limit to store sent messages at the

Centre

KMaximum

Main Menu

Messaging

Mail Settings

Expiry Time

General Settings

Select a limit

Press b

Roaming

Download

Main Menu

Set complete MMS retrieval to auto or manual

CAdjust this setting when using 804SH outside Japan.

KAlways Defer

H Messaging A Mail Settings A General Settings

A Roaming Download

Select Always Download or Always Defer

Press b

Home

Download

Main Menu

Set complete MMS retrieval to auto or manual

CAdjust this setting when using 804SH in Japan.

KAlways Defer

H Messaging A Mail Settings A General Settings

A Home Download

Select Always Download or Always Defer

Press b

SMS Settings

Message

Centre

Set SMS Centre Number

K+819066519300

Main Menu

Messaging

Mail Settings

SMS Settings

Message Centre

Enter SMS Centre Number

Press b

Note

Do not change Centre Number unless instructed to do so.

Text

Optimisation

Set 804SH to render non-roman characters in their nearest roman character equivalents

KOn

Main Menu

Messaging

Mail Settings

SMS Settings

Text Optimisation

Choose On (replace) or Off

Press b

14-24

Connection

Type

Main Menu

Set GSM network connection type for SMS delivery

KCSD Preferred

Messaging

Mail Settings

SMS Settings

Connection Type

Select GPRS Preferred or CSD Preferred A Press b

Note H Do not change Connection Type unless instructed to do so.

MMS Settings

For MMS Account settings, see P.10-34.

Delivery Rep.

Allow

Main Menu

Select whether to send delivery status to senders requesting MMS Delivery Report

KOn

H Messaging A Mail Settings A MMS Settings A

Delivery Rep. Allow

Choose On (send delivery status) or Off

Press b

^ If sender requests Delivery Report for received SMS, Report is sent

regardless of this setting (see P.14-11, P.14-24).

Slide Duration Set the initial display time for slides

Main Menu

K3 seconds

H Messaging A Mail Settings A MMS Settings A

Slide Duration

Enter time

Press b

Max Message

Size

Main Menu

Limit outgoing message size to 30, 100 or 300 KB

K300 KB

Messaging

Mail Settings

MMS Settings

Max Message Size

Select a size A Press b

Creation Mode

Main Menu

Restrict attachment types and message formats to increase compatibility with mobiles outside Japan

KFree

H Messaging A Mail Settings A MMS Settings A

Creation Mode

Select Free or Restricted

Press b

14-25

Web

15-1

Getting Started

Access the Mobile Internet via Vodafone Web (see P.13-2).

^ Browse for image or sound files as well as information.

^ Perform Re-Provisioning (see P.1-19) before using Web.

^ Web appears as Vodafone live! on handset.

Tip

Address questions about Vodafone Web to Vodafone

Customer Centre, General Information (see P.18-24).

Web Content

Sample Web information page:

Scroll Bar (see P.15-5)

Cursor (see P.15-5)

Cache Memory

C Cache Memory temporarily holds copies of retrieved pages; when full, oldest are deleted to make room for new ones.

^ Previously viewed pages may load from Cache Memory.

^ Cached items with expiry dates are deleted upon expiry.

CSSL

Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) is an encryption protocol for secure Internet transmissions of important/sensitive information such as credit card numbers. Electronic

certificates are saved on handset (see P.15-14 "Root

Certificates").

Disclaimer

C When a security notice appears, subscribers must decide for themselves whether or not to open the page. Opening secure pages constitutes agreement to the terms of usage.

Vodafone, VeriSign Japan, Baltimore Technologies Japan and Entrust Japan cannot be held liable for any damages associated with the use of SSL.

Content

Note H Requested pages may not appear due to transmission conditions/Server status.

15-2

Using Web

Opening Vodafone Web Menu

Select topics from Vodafone Web Menu to access sites.

Main Menu

Vodafone live!

1 Select Vodafone live! and press b

Vodafone Web Main Menu appears.

^ Shortcut: In Standby, press M [

^ Vodafone Web Main Menu is subject to change.

2 Highlight a menu item

3 Press b

Handset connects to the Network.

^ Handset remains connected to the Network even if it is closed.

C To disconnect, press i.

4 Repeat Steps 2 - 3 to open additional links

Basic Operations: see P.15-5

5 Press g then N i to exit

Page Jump

C Press M W to see the previous page.

B To return to the initial page, press N P A Select

Forward

Press b

Opening Secure Pages

C Entering secure area. OK? appears for secure pages.

Press N K to open the secure page.

^ X appears for secure connections.

^ To disable confirmations, see P.15-14 "Secure Prompt".

When Authentication is Required

C Some pages require user authentication for access. If requested, enter user ID or password and press b.

Tip H Previously retrieved pages may open directly from Cache

Memory without connecting to the Network.

15-3

Using Access History

Open previously viewed pages. Access History stores up to

10 domains and up to 30 pages for each; when full, oldest are deleted to make room for new ones.

Main Menu H Vodafone live! A Access History

1 Select a domain folder and press b

2 Select an item and press b

C To open properties, select an item

Press N P

Select Details A Press b

B Press M W to return.

C To send URLs via SMS/MMS, select an item A Press N P

Select Send Page

Press b

Create and send message

(Perform from Step 3 on P.14-6.)

3 Press g then N i to exit

Deleting Access History

C Open Access History and follow these steps.

Select a domain folder or item within (Skip this step for Delete All.) A Press N P A Select Delete or Delete All

Press b

Press N i

^ Delete All clears the entire domain folder when performed for an item inside.

Entering URLs Directly

Enter URLs directly to access Mobile Internet sites.

To use Access History, see left.

Main Menu H Vodafone live!

1 Select Enter URL and press b

C Press D to enter www..

C To enter address prefix (http://, https:// or file://), press N P A Select Advanced A Press b A Select an item

Press b

2 Press b

3 Enter URL and press b

C To enter .co.jp, .ne.jp, etc., press q

Select an item

Press b

4 Press N P

5 Select OK and press b

Information appears.

6 Press g then N i to exit

Note H Some sites may not be accessible via 804SH; site images and layouts, etc. may differ from those viewed via

PC.

15-4

Basic Operations

Using Cursor

Use cursor to select underlined menu items.

Use E to scroll through items.

Cursor

Use F to move left and right when multiple items are listed in one row. Cursor does not appear for unselectable items.

Scrolling Pages

Scroll bar appears on the right when page content continues beyond view.

Slider indicates current page position.

Use E to scroll; slider moves accordingly.

Scroll Bar

Text Entry & Item Selection

Enter text or select items to send information.

Text Entry Field

^ Highlight , and press b. Text entry window opens. Enter text and press b.

Check-box

^ Highlight O (check-box) and press b.

The box changes to P, indicating that the item is selected.

^ In addition to O, ! may also appear as selection indicators.

Menu List

^ Highlight the field and press b to select an item.

Command Button

^ Use to send, reset, etc.

^ Highlight , and press b to execute the indicated command.

15-5

15-6

Input Memory

C Entered text (except Security Code) is saved to Input

Memory. Use saved text in other applications.

C Up to 20 entries are saved. When full, oldest entries are deleted to make room for new ones.

Using Input Memory

C In a text entry window, press N P A

Select Advanced

A Press b A Select Input Memory A Press b A Select text

Press b

Advanced Features

Bookmarks & Saved Page

Bookmark sites or save page content to Saved Page.

Item

Bookmarks

Saved Page

Description

Save links to Mobile Internet sites. 804SH connects to the Network to access the site.

^ Create folders to organise Bookmarks.

^ Sharp Space Town Mobile Internet site

(Japanese Only) is bookmarked by default.

Visit Sharp Space Town to download

Wallpaper, games, Dictionary files, etc.

Save page content; 804SH opens saved pages without connecting to the Network.

^ Save frequently used items to Saved Page.

Saving Bookmarks & Pages

Main Menu

Vodafone live!

Open a page

1 Press N P

^ Mark Page or Save This Page appears only for savable pages.

2 Bookmarks

1 Select Mark Page and press b

2 Check name, etc. and press b

C When Enter title. appears, press b

Enter title

Press b A Press N P A Select OK A Press b

C If the same title exists, press b

Change title

Press b A Press N P A Select OK A Press b

Saved Page

1 Select Save This Page and press b

2 Enter title and press b

C If the same title exists, press b

Change title

Press b

Saving URLs to Bookmarks

C Enter URLs directly to save site references to Bookmarks.

Press b

Select Vodafone live!

Press b

Select Bookmarks A Press b A Press N P

Select New

Press b

Select Bookmark

Press b

Enter URL

Press b

Press N P

Select OK

Press b

Enter title A Press b A Press b

Opening Bookmarks & Saved Page

Main Menu

Vodafone live!

1 Bookmarks

1 Select Bookmarks and

press b

C To send URLs via MMS/SMS, select a title

Press N P

A Select Send Page A Press b

Create and send message

(Perform from Step 3 on P.14-6.)

C To open properties, select a title

A Press N P A Select

Details

Press b

B Press M W to return.

Saved Page

1 Select Saved Page and

Bookmarks

press b

C To update items, press N P

Select Update

Press b

B 804SH connects to the Network to update page content.

C To show or hide date, select a title

Press N P

Select Show Date or Hide Date

Press b

Saved Page

C To open properties, select a title A Press N P A

Select Details

Press b

B Press M W to return.

2 Select a title and press b

15-7

Opening Bookmarks & Saved Page Online

C Bookmarks

Press N P A Select Bookmarks A Press b

Select a title

Press b

C Saved Page

Press N P A Select Advanced A Press b A

Select Saved Page

Press b

Select a title

Press b

Editing Bookmarks & Saved Page

Open Bookmarks or Saved Page first (see P.15-7).

Bookmarks

Folder

Sort Bookmarks into folders

Creating a Folder

Press N P

Select New

Press b

Select

Folder

Press b

Enter a name

Press b

Moving to Folder

Select a title

Press N P

Select Move

Press b

Select a folder

Press b

^ Move can only be selected when there is a folder.

C To move back from folders, select Bookmarks as the destination A Press b

Rename Edit title or Bookmarks folder name

Select a title or folder A Press N P A Select

Rename

Press b

Enter title

Press b

Delete Delete entries

Select a title or folder

Press N P

Select

Delete or Delete All

Press b

Press N i

^ Before deleting a folder, delete all the titles in the folder.

Edit URL

Edit URLs in Bookmarks

(Bookmarks)

Select a title

Press N P

Select Edit URL

Press b

Enter URL

Press b

Press N P

Select OK

Press b

Saving to Data Folder

Save images, sounds, etc. to Data Folder.

Save Items

Main Menu H Vodafone live! A Vodafone live! A Open a page

1 Press N P

2 Select Save Items and press b

C To open files, select a file A Press N P A Select View

Press b

B Press N to enlarge.

B Press M W to return.

C To open properties, select a file A Press N P A Select

Details

Press b

B Press M W to return.

C To send files via MMS, select one

Press N P

Select Send A Press b A Create and send message

(Perform from Step 3 on P.14-6.)

B Files can be sent only when Send appears.

15-8

3 Select a file and press b

Data Folder opens.

C Use F to switch between handset and Memory Card.

C To save to a sub folder, select folder A Press b

4 Select Save here and press b

^ To accept the default title (file name), skip ahead to Step 6.

5 Enter title (file name)

6 Press b

File is saved to Data Folder.

^ When memory is full, notification appears. Delete files and try

again (see P.9-15).

Linked Files

In some pages, files may be downloaded from links.

Main Menu H Vodafone live! A Vodafone live! A Open a page

1 Select a link and press b

File details appear.

2 Press b

Download starts. Upon completion a confirmation appears and file is saved to Data Folder.

C To cancel, press M 3.

3 Press b

The content plays or appears.

C Press M W to return.

Using Linked Info

Use linked numbers (TEL:), addresses or URLs (http://,

https:// or rtsp://) to place calls, send MMS or open Mobile

Internet sites.

^ Available only when number, address or URL is underlined.

^ Words may serve as a linked number, address or URL.

Main Menu

Vodafone live!

1 Open a page containing a linked phone number, mail address or URL

15-9

2 Phone Numbers

1 Highlight number and press b

2 Select Call or Video Call and press b

804SH dials the number.

Mail Addresses

1 Highlight number or address and press b

2 Select Create Message and press b

C To complete and send message, perform from Step 5

on P.14-7.

URLs

1 Highlight a URL and press b

Handset connects to the Network.

^ Video/sound plays for rtsp:// URLs (see right).

Save to Phone Book

C To save as new entry, open page and follow these steps.

Select a phone number or mail address A Press b

Select Save to Phone Book

Press b

Select As New Contact

Press b

See P.4-4

C To save as new item, open page and follow these steps.

Select a phone number or mail address

Press b

Select Save to Phone Book

Press b

Select an entry

Press b

Press M q

Streaming

Enjoy audio visual media while it downloads.

^ Only compatible files support streaming.

^ Downloaded content cannot be saved.

Main Menu H Vodafone live! A Vodafone live! A Open a page

1 Select a file and press b

Streaming begins. (Playing Music/Video: see P.7-8, P.7-12.)

C To pause a stream, press b.

B Press b to resume.

B Streaming requires a continuous Network connection.

C To stream media via a URL, while streaming, press b A

Press N P

Select Enter URL

Press b

Enter URL A Press b

C To save the source URL to Favourites, while streaming, press b A Press N P A Select Favourites A

Press b

Select Add Current

Press b

Backlight

C Adjust streaming Backlight while streaming.

Press N P

Select Settings

Press b

Select Backlight

Press b

Select Always On,

Always Off or Normal Settings A Press b

^ Selecting Normal Settings applies Display Backlight

setting (see P.10-7).

15-10

Incoming Calls/Mail while Streaming

C Streaming pauses for incoming calls.

Answer or reject calls while handset is ringing/vibrating.

Press N P

Select Answer or Reject Call

Press b

^ After the call, source Mobile Internet site returns. When streaming was initiated from Media Player (see right), handset returns to Standby.

^ To resume streaming from pause point press N i.

B To play back from the beginning, press M c.

C h appears for incoming mail.

Changing Display Size

C Press 0 to toggle Display Size for current stream.

B Display Size toggles as follows: Enlarge % Full Screen

(no indicators) % Full Screen (with indicators) %

Original Size

B Display Size cannot be changed while stream is paused.

^ Display Size may not change depending on file/stream.

C Change Display Size setting for streaming while streaming.

Press N P

Select Settings

Press b

Select Display Size

Press b

Select Original Size,

Enlarge or Full Screen A Press b

Note

H ^ Closing 804SH stops an active stream.

^ Paused streams stop after five minutes of inactivity.

Tip H Up to 10 previously accessed URLs are saved.

When full, oldest URLs are deleted to make room for new ones.

Streaming from

Media Player

Access the Mobile Internet from Media Player

Main Menu

Media Player

Streaming

Resuming the File Played Last

Select Last Played

Press b

^ File plays from where it stopped.

^ Last Played can only be selected when Streaming was paused

(see left).

Entering URLs

Select Enter URL

Press b

Enter URL

Press b

^ Enter up to 1,024 single-byte alphanumerics.

Using Favourites

Select Favourites A Press b A Select an entry A

Press b

15-11

Using Access Log

Select Access Log

Press b

Select an entry

Press b

C To open properties, select Access Log A Press b A Select an entry A Press N P A Select Detail A Press b

B Press M W to return.

C To edit and access URLs, select Access Log A Press b

A Select an entry A Press N P A Select Edit URL

A Press b A Edit URL A Press b

Accessing Files for Streaming

C Open video-related links from Vodafone Web Menu.

Press b

Select Media Player

Press b

Select Streaming

Press b

Select Streaming

Link

Press b

Tip H

^ For playback operations, see P.15-10 - 15-11.

^ Select Settings in Streaming menu and press b to set

Backlight and Display Size (see P.15-10, P.15-11).

Additional Functions

Sub Menu Settings

Access Option menu settings from an open page.

Home Open Vodafone Web Main Menu

Press N P

Select Home

Press b

Enter URL Enter URL directly to access Mobile Internet sites

Press N P

Select Enter URL

Press b

Perform Steps 2 - 5 in "Entering URLs Directly" on P.15-4

15-12

Access History Previously visited Mobile Internet site links

Press N P

Select Access History

Press b

Perform Steps 1 - 2 in "Using Access

History" on P.15-4

Reload Page Update page content

Press N P

Select Reload Page

Press b

Send Page Send URLs via SMS/MMS

Press N P

Select Advanced

Press b

Select Send Page

Press b

Create and send

message (Perform from Step 3 on P.14-6.)

Properties Open information details

Press N P

Select Advanced

Press b

Select Details

Press b

C Press M W to return.

Browser Data Clear Cache, Cookies or Access History

Press N P

Select Advanced

Press b

Select Browser Data

Press b

Select Clear

Cache, Clear Cookies or Clear History

Press b

^ Deleted Items:

Cache Temporarily saved information in Cache Memory

Cookies Information sent by a server for user identification

History URLs of previously accessed Mobile Internet sites

Search This

Page

Search current page or jump to page top or bottom

New Search

Press N P

Select Advanced

Press b

Select Search This Page A Press b A Select

Search A Press b A Press b A Enter text to search

Press b

Press N ]

^ First search result is highlighted; press b to jump to next.

C To cancel, press N P

Select Cancel

Press b

Jump to Page Top or Bottom

Press N P

Select Advanced

Press b

Select Search This Page

Press b

Select Jump

to Top or Jump to Bottom

Press b

Copy Text Copy text

Press N P

Select Copy Text

Press b

Perform from Step 3 in "Copy/Cut & Paste" on P.3-12

Certificates View electronic certificates for a secure page

Press N P

Select Browser Settings

Press b

Select Security

Press b

Select

Certificates

Press b

C Press M W to return.

C To open certificate, press N w

Restart

Browser

Refresh Vodafone Web without exiting completely

Press N P

Select Advanced

Press b

Select Restart Browser

Press b

^ Vodafone Web Main Menu appears.

About Open browser details

Press N P

Select Advanced

Press b

Select About

Press b

C Press M W to return.

Uploading

Files

Upload images or other Data Folder files to the

Centre via Mobile Internet sites

COpen compatible site first.

Select Browse...

Press b

Select a file (see

P.9-4)

Press b

Select Send

Press b

^ Example above is for reference only. Follow site instructions for specific procedure.

^ Files are uploadable only via pages supporting uploads.

Basic Settings

Font Size Change character size

KMedium

Main Menu H Vodafone live! A Browser Setting A Font Size

Select a size

Press b

Scroll Step Select from three scroll units

KSingle Line

Main Menu

Vodafone live!

Browser Setting

Scroll Step

Select a unit

Press b

Send Referrer

Select whether or not to allow access to referrer information

KAllow

Main Menu H Vodafone live! A Browser Setting A Send Referrer

Select Allow or Don't allow

Press b

15-13

Cookies

Enable or disable cookies (see P.15-12)

KEnabled

Main Menu

Vodafone live!

Browser Setting

Cookies

Select Enabled or Disabled

Press b

Downloads

Select whether to download images and sounds on Mobile

Internet sites automatically or to open text information only

KShow images/Play sounds/Download objects

Main Menu

Vodafone live!

Browser Setting

Downloads

Images

Select Images

Press b

Select Show images or

Don't show images

Press b

Sounds

Select Sounds

Press b

Select Play sounds or

Don't play sounds A Press b

Select Objects

Press b

Select Download

objects or Don't download objects

Press b

^ Objects are files other than images and sounds.

Manufacture

Number

Select whether or not to send handset manufacture number automatically for authentication

KOff

Main Menu

Vodafone live!

Browser Setting

Manufacture Number

Choose On (send) or Off A Press b

Location

Main Menu

Choose whether or not to send location info automatically

KConfirm with the user

H Vodafone live! A Browser Setting A Location A

Location Prompt

Press b

Enter Handset Code

Press b

Press N K

Select Confirm with the user,

Send or Not Send

Press b

^ When Datum On/Off in LBS Settings (see P.10-36) is set to

Off, location info is not sent.

15-14

Download to

Select whether to save downloaded files on handset (Handset Memory) or Memory Card

(Memory Card Pref.)

KMemory Card Pref.

Main Menu H Vodafone live! A Browser Setting A Download to

Select Handset Memory or Memory Card Pref.

Press b

^ Even when Memory Card Pref. is set, downloaded files are saved to handset if Memory Card is full or not inserted.

^ Some files may not be saved to Memory Card.

Security

Secure Prompt

Main Menu

Show or hide confirmations before entering

and exiting secure pages (see P.15-2)

KShow

Vodafone live!

Browser Setting

Security

Secure Prompt

Select Show or Don't show A Press b

Root

Certificates

Open electronic certificates issued by

Certificate Authorities saved on handset

Main Menu H Vodafone live! A Browser Setting A Security

Select Root Certificates

Press b

C To open certificates, select one A Press N w

C Press M W to return.

Authentication

Previously entered user ID or password is entered automatically for authentication

KOn

Main Menu

Vodafone live!

Browser Setting

Security

Authentication

Choose On or Off

Press b

V-applications

16-1

Getting Started

Download V-applications, including games.

^ Enjoy Network games or real time information (Network

V-applications: see right).

^ Download and use 804SH compatible V-applications.

^ Separate subscriptions are required for V-applications downloaded via Web.

Tip H Address questions about V-applications to Vodafone

Customer Centre, General Information (see P.18-24).

V-appli Library

Open V-appli Library to access V-applications saved on handset or Memory Card.

Main Menu H V-appli

1 Select V-appli and press b

C Use F to switch between handset and Memory Card.

Opening Java! License Information

C Press b A Select V-appli A Press b A Select Information

Press b

IC-appli

C IC-appli, a V-application required to use Vodafone live! FeliCa,

is preloaded on handset (see P.17-2). IC-appli settings and

usage patterns resemble those of other V-applications.

Network V-applications

Network V-applications require a network connection.

Before using a Network V-application, a message appears indicating that a network connection is required. To skip this

confirmation, see P.16-7.

V-applications on Memory Card

Synchronise Memory Cards used on other Vodafone handsets, PCs and other devices to update V-appli Library.

Perform Re-Provisioning beforehand (see P.1-19).

Main Menu

V-appli

Settings

Synchronisation

1 Press N i

Note H V-applications saved to Memory Cards from your 804SH are exclusively for use on 804SH with your USIM Card or a newly purchased Vodafone handset.

Tip

It may take some time to update V-appli Library depending on the number of files saved, etc.

16-2

Video Output

Connect 804SH to a TV, VCR, etc. with Video Cable to view

V-applications on the target device.

^ Use Video Output with compatible V-applications; confirm

compatibility in Video out in properties (see P.16-5).

^ Before performing the steps below, connect Video Cable to

804SH and device, and activate Video Output (see P.10-9).

Main Menu

V-appli

1 Select a V-application and press b

V-application appears on the device.

C Press j to toggle display between the device and handset.

B To toggle device Display Size, see P.10-10.

Note

H ^ For eye safety, avoid playing V-applications on an external device for long periods.

^ V-applications started from Screensaver do not support

Video Output.

Downloading V-applications

^ Perform Re-Provisioning beforehand (see P.1-19).

^ Some V-applications can be downloaded to Memory Cards.

^ Make sure signal is strong.

Main Menu

V-appli

More V-Appli

1 Open a Mobile Internet site offering

V-applications

2 Select a V-application and press b

Properties appear.

C When a V-application is paused (K appears in grey), press N i.

3 Press b

Download starts.

^ Download may take time.

C Press M W to cancel.

4 Downloaded V-application is automatically saved and a confirmation appears

^ When you download a new version of V-application set as

Screensaver (see P.16-6), Screensaver may be cancelled.

5 Press N i

Web closes and V-appli Library opens.

C To return to the site, press M c.

Starting V-applications: see P.16-4

Tip H Some V-applications require Centre Access Code or

Permission setting. Follow onscreen prompts to use the

V-application (may only be available in Japanese).

16-3

Properties

Check V-application properties before completing download.

Title

Download Size

Memory Used

Cancel Download (Press M)

Start Download (Press b)

Memory Status

C Press b A Select Data Folder A Press b A Select

Memory Status

Press b

Select Phone Memory or

Memory Card A Press b

Using V-applications

Starting V-applications

Main Menu H V-appli

1 Select V-appli and press b

V-appli Library opens (see P.16-2).

C When a V-application is paused (K appears in grey), press b.

2 Select a V-application and press b

V-application starts (K appears).

^ For operations, refer to the source Mobile Internet site, etc.

^ If the V-application cannot be used, V-appli Library returns.

Tip H V-applications automatically pause for incoming

transmissions. To set 804SH to ignore them, see P.16-8

"Calls & Alarms".

Starting Network V-applications

C If a network connection confirmation appears after Step 2:

Choose Yes or No A Press b A V-application starts

^ To skip confirmation, see P.16-7.

C Some V-applications require permission settings (see P.16-7).

16-4

Exit, Pause & Resume

Exiting or Pausing V-applications

1 Press g while using a V-application

2 Exiting V-application

1 Select End and press b

K disappears and V-appli Library returns.

Pausing V-application

1 Select Suspend and press b

Handset returns to Standby with K (grey).

^ V-application resumes from pause point.

Resuming V-applications

1 While a V-application is paused, press b in

Standby

^ K (grey) appears while a V-application is paused.

2 Select Resume and press b

C To end the V-application, select End

Press b

C To open Main Menu and the V-application paused, select

Cancel

Press b

Managing V-applications

Opening V-application Properties

Main Menu

V-appli

1 Select a V-application and press N P

2 Select Information and press b

Title Title of the V-application

Vendor

Version

Description

Save Size

Recorded

Screensaver

Profile

Link

Video out

Certification

Name of the distributor (or supplier/manufacturer)

Version of the V-application

Description of the V-application

Downloaded file size

Record game scores, etc. up to this size

Compatibility with Screensaver

Versions: VSCL (Overseas)/JSCL (Domestic)

Link to source Mobile Internet site

Cert. Subject

Compatibility with Video Output

Trusted/Untrusted

Authority of Certification (Common Name,

Country and Organization)

Motion Sensor Compatibility with Motion Control

Push

IC Support

Compatibility with automatic network connection

Compatibility with IC-appli

C Press D to scroll down.

C Press M W to return.

16-5

Moving V-applications to Memory Card

Main Menu

V-appli

1 Select a V-application and press N P

2 Select Move to Card and press b

C When an older version of the V-application is saved, press N i or M c.

B Press N i to overwrite.

Note H ^ V-applications cannot be moved to Memory Card when the same V-application is already saved or when

Memory Card memory is low. Cancel Screensaver to move a V-application set as Screensaver.

^ Some V-applications cannot be moved to Memory

Card.

Deleting V-applications

Main Menu H V-appli A V-appli

1 Select a V-application and press N P

2 Select Delete and press b

If the V-application is set as Screensaver, V-appli Library returns. To proceed, cancel Screensaver and retry.

3 Press N i

^ Preloaded V-applications can be deleted.

^ Handset Code may be required.

Screensaver

Activating/Cancelling Screensaver

Set a V-application to activate when handset enters

Standby. Screensaver is Off by default.

Main Menu

V-appli

Settings

Screensaver

Switch On/

Off

1 Choose On and press b

C To cancel, choose Off

Press b

Setting Screensaver

^ Only one compatible V-application can be set for Screensaver.

^ Screensaver cannot be set when another V-application is paused (K appears in grey).

^ IC-appli and V-applications on Memory Card cannot be set.

Main Menu

V-appli

1 Select a V-application and press N P

2 Select Set as Screensaver and press b

^ Set as Screensaver appears for compatible V-applications.

16-6

Activation Time

C Enter time delay before Screensaver activates in Standby.

Press b A Select V-appli A Press b A Select

Settings

Press b

Select Screensaver

Press b

Select Activation Time

Press b

Enter time (01-10 seconds)

Press b

^ Activation Time is 03 seconds by default.

Suspend Time

C Set run time after which Screensaver pauses.

Press b A Select V-appli A Press b A Select

Settings

Press b

Select Screensaver

Press b

Select Suspend Time

Press b

Select time

Press b

^ Suspend time is Off by default.

Note H ^ Screensaver does not start when LCD Remote/Mic with

Headphones is connected. Connecting Headphones

(with Memory Card inserted) cancels an active

Screensaver.

^ Screensaver may not start when an external device

(hands free kit, etc.) is connected to handset.

^ Screensaver which responds to incoming transmissions may cancel out selected Mode Settings profile.

Setting Permissions

Customise the method of confirmation, etc. for each

V-application operation below.

^ Settings:

Phone Call Place Voice Calls

Network Access Connect to the Network

Messaging Send/receive messages

Autorun Execute Autorun files

Local Connection Connect to other devices

Read User Data

Write User Data

Access Phone Book, Calendar, etc.

Edit Phone Book, Calendar, etc.

Use Multimedia Use Media Player

Location Access Send location info

^ These settings are also available for V-applications on Memory Card.

^ Permission settings may not be available for some V-applications.

Main Menu

V-appli

1 Select a V-application and press N P

2 Select Permission and press b

3 Select an item and press b

4 Select an option and press b

^ Some options may not appear.

Session Confirmation appears every time the V-application starts

Ask Once Confirmation appears before the specific operation

Blanket No confirmation

No Reject the operation

16-7

Resetting Permission Settings

C Follow these steps after Step 2 on P.16-7.

Select Reset A Press b A Press N i

Additional Functions

V-application Operational Settings

The following settings apply to IC-appli as well.

Volume Adjust the volume of V-application sounds

Main Menu

KLevel 3

V-appli

Settings

Application Volume

Use G to adjust the volume A Press b

^ In Manner mode, volume set in Manner settings applies.

Backlight Select a Backlight status for V-applications

KNormal Settings

Main Menu H V-appli A Settings A Backlight A Switch On/Off

Select from Always On to Normal Settings

Press b

Always On

Always Off

Backlight remains on while V-applications runs

Backlight remains off while V-applications runs

Normal Settings Applies Display Backlight setting (see P.10-7)

Blink

Main Menu

When activated, Backlight flashes while compatible V-applications play

KOn

V-appli

Settings

Backlight

Blink

Choose On (Backlight flashes) or Off A Press b

Vibration

When activated, handset vibrates while compatible V-applications play

KOn

Main Menu H V-appli A Settings A Vibration

Choose On (handset vibrates) or Off

Press b

^ In Manner mode, vibration set in Manner settings applies.

Calls & Alarms

Select a handset response to incoming calls, etc. while a V-application is active

KCall/Message/Alarm Priority

Main Menu H V-appli A Settings A Calls & Alarms

Select from Voice Call to Alarm

Press b

Select a handset response

Press b

Call/Message/

Alarm Priority

V-application pauses for incoming call/mail

Call/Message/

Alarm Notice

A message appears for incoming calls, mail, etc. For example, (W090392XXXX1) appears. Press f to answer the call.

^ Regardless of the setting, a message appears for

V-applications started from Screensaver.

16-8

Surround Set surround effect for V-applications

KOn

Main Menu

V-appli

Settings

Surround

Choose On or Off A Press b

Reset

Set to Default Reset V-application settings

Main Menu H V-appli A Settings A Set to Default

Enter Handset Code

Press b

Press N i

^ The settings affected by Set to Default:

Application Volume

Switch On/Off

Backlight

Blink

Vibration

Surround

Level 3

Normal Settings

Calls & Alarms

Voice Call

Video Call

Call Priority

Incoming Message Message Priority

Alarm

Switch On/Off

Alarm Priority

Off

Screensaver Activation Time

Suspend Time

03 seconds

Off

Memory All

Clear

Restore V-appli Library to default setting

Main Menu

V-appli

Settings

Memory All Clear

Enter Handset Code

Press b

Press N i

Note

H ^ Memory All Clear deletes downloaded V-applications and IC-appli. However, Memory All Clear is disabled if

IC Card data remains. Delete IC Card data beforehand

(see P.17-2).

^ Preloaded V-applications are restored.

16-9

Vodafone live! FeliCa

17-1

17-2

Basics

Vodafone live! FeliCa encompasses a range of IC

Card-based services available via FeliCa-compatible

Vodafone handsets.

804SH supports Vodafone live! FeliCa. To use services such as e-money, e-ticketing and reward point systems, simply hold handset over a compatible reader/writer at a shop or restaurant, etc.

FeliCa

C A contactless IC card technology enabling wireless data transmissions with compatible reader/writer terminals

IC Card

C The FeliCa chip embedded in FeliCa-compatible handsets

C Holds information required to use Vodafone live! FeliCa

IC-appli

C V-Applications required to use Vodafone live! FeliCa

^ Edy e-money IC-appli is preloaded on 804SH.

B Edy is a prepaid e-money service run by bitWallet Inc.

Note H IC Card data content varies by service and usage history.

Procedures to delete IC Card data vary by IC-appli; contact the service provider for details.

Service Usage Outline

Download IC-appli

Download IC-appli via Mobile Internet site.

^ IC-appli is saved to IC-appli folder.

Complete Registration/Set Up

Activate IC-appli, complete registration/customise settings.

^ Charge accounts, check balance or payment records, etc.

Use Service

To use Vodafone live! FeliCa at shops, restaurants,

and locations, centre m logo side over reader/writer.

^ Use e-money/e-tickets to shop/travel and earn reward points.

Note H ^ IC-appli registration and usage vary; contact the service provider for details.

^ Vodafone is not liable for damages resulting from accidental loss/alteration of IC Card data/settings.

^ Keep service passwords/customer service contact information, etc. in a separate place.

Starting IC-appli

To use Vodafone live! FeliCa, activate a service IC-appli and complete service registration, setup, charge, balance check, etc.

Main Menu H IC-appli

1 Select IC-appli and press b

C To download an IC-appli, select More IC-appli A Press b

2 Select an application and press b

IC-appli starts.

C To end the IC-appli, press g.

Note H IC-appli cannot be started during calls or when another

V-application is active.

Tip H IC-appli settings and usage patterns resemble those of

other V-applications (see P.16-5 - 16-9).

However, IC-appli cannot be set as Screensaver.

Using Vodafone live! FeliCa

Follow these steps to conduct a transaction.

Example: making an electronic payment:

^ Complete registration, setup and charge in advance.

^ Complete transactions without activating an IC-appli.

1 Centre m logo side over reader/writer

Place Vodafone logo over reader/writer

^ Reader/writer will scan FeliCa IC Card even during calls or

Vodafone live! transmissions.

^ Confirm scan results on reader/writer display.

^ If recognition is slow, move handset around slightly.

^ When placed over sensor, 804SH may display a message, vibrate or activate a V-application for some

services. To disable response, see P.17-7 "Interface

Settings".

17-3

17-4

When Handset Power is Off

C Transactions possible; IC-appli do not start automatically.

^ After installing/reinstalling battery, always turn on handset power to use Vodafone live! FeliCa.

When Battery is Low

C Vodafone live! FeliCa is not available. Charge it beforehand.

Tip H ^ Align handset parallel to reader/writer.

^ Foreign articles can block/hamper recognition.

Vodafone live! FeliCa Settings

IC Card Status

Main Menu H IC-appli A IC Card Settings

1 Select IC Card Status and press b

C If IC Card lock is set, press N i A Enter Handset

Code

Press b

C Press b to exit.

IC Card Lock

Use this function to restrict access to/prevent unauthorised use of Vodafone live! FeliCa on 804SH.

^ Activate IC Card Lock remotely (see P.17-5 "Remote Lock").

^ IC Card Lock is Off by default.

Main Menu H IC-appli A IC Card Settings A IC Card Lock

1 Enter Handset Code and press b

2 Choose On and press b

C To cancel, choose Off A Press b (Omit the next step.)

3 Press N i

Remote Lock

Send mail with specified subject (Mail Remote Lock) or call from a specified phone (Call Remote Lock).

Preparation on Handset

CMail Remote Lock Password/Address

Save a password for Mail Remote Lock, and set mail address to send IC Card Lock notice to.

Main Menu H IC-appli A IC Card Settings A Remote Lock

1 Enter Handset Code and press b

2 Select Mail Remote Lock and press b

3 Select Remote Lock PW and press b

4 Enter a password and press b

^ Enter between 5 and 16 alphanumerics.

5 Select Email Lock Notice and press b

6 Select From Phone Book, Enter Phone Number

or Enter Email Address and press b

7 Select/enter mail address or Vodafone handset

number and press b

8 To save settings without enabling Mail Remote

Lock, press M q

^ To enable Mail Remote Lock, after Step 7, perform from Step 3

in "Remote Lock Setup" on P.17-6 and choose On in Step 4.

CCall Remote Lock Number/Count for Lock

Save up to two phone numbers from which to call handset, and set Missed Call count required to activate IC Card Lock

(default count is 3 times).

Enable Remote Lock activation via public phones.

Main Menu

IC-appli

IC Card Settings

Remote Lock

1 Enter Handset Code and press b

2 Select Call Remote Lock and press b

3 Select Phone No. to Lck 1 and press b

C To enable activation via public phone, select Set Public

Phone

Press b

Choose On

Press b

C To disable activation via public phone, choose Off.

4 Select From Phone Book or Enter Phone Number

and press b

5 Select/enter a phone number and press b

C To save second phone number, select Phone No. to Lck 2

Press b

Repeat Steps 4 - 5

6 Select Count for Lock and press b

^ 3 times is set by default.

7 Enter Missed Call count (3 - 10 consecutive times) required to activate IC Card Lock and

press b

8 To save settings without enabling Call Remote

Lock, press M q

^ To enable Call Remote Lock, after Step 7, perform from Step 3

in "Remote Lock Setup" on P.17-6 and choose On in Step 4.

17-5

17-6

Remote Lock Setup

Activate or cancel Mail Remote Lock/Call Remote Lock.

Both Remote Locks are Off by default.

Main Menu

IC-appli

IC Card Settings

Remote Lock

1 Enter Handset Code and press b

2 Select Mail Remote Lock or Call Remote Lock

and press b

3 Select Switch On/Off and press b

4 Choose On and press b

C To cancel, choose Off A Press b

B Saved mail address and phone numbers remain.

Reactivate Remote Lock to use the same setting.

5 Press M q

Activating Remote Lock

CVia Mail

1 Use MMS/e-mail to send password to handset

^ Enter password as subject; leave other fields blank.

^ To confirm IC Card Lock status, send a message via phone or

PC with specified mail address (see P.17-5).

After Handset Receives Message

C IC Card Lock is set and notice is sent from handset to specified mail address.

Note H If 804SH cannot receive mail IC Card Lock is not set.

CVia Phone

1 Using one of the specified phones, call handset

2 End the call

The call is recorded as a Missed Call on your handset.

^ Within three minutes, repeat Steps 1 - 2 until the specified number of Missed Calls are recorded.

^ Payphones can be used for this function if Set Public Phone is activated beforehand.

^ Send Caller ID when placing calls from specified phone.

(Caller ID is not required for payphones.)

After Specified Number of Missed Calls

C IC Card Lock is set; a message announces Remote Lock activation.

Note H Missed call count is reset by incoming calls from numbers not saved for this function. If series is interrupted, start over from the beginning.

Interface Settings

Set 804SH response to reader/writer commands: Choose

On for V-appli to activate V-application, Browser to access the Mobile Internet, Messaging to activate mail, Vibration to vibrate handset, and Pop-up Message to open pop-up message. Interface Settings is On for all items by default.

Main Menu

IC-appli

IC Card Settings

Interface Settings

1 Enter Handset Code and press b

2 Select from V-appli to Pop-up Message and

press b

3 Choose On or Off and press b

Resetting Defaults

Cancel custom settings and return Vodafone live! FeliCa settings to their defaults.

Main Menu

IC-appli

IC Card Settings

Set to Default

1 Enter Handset Code and press b

2 Press N i

Tip

H ^ Set to Default does not affect downloaded IC-appli.

^ Memory All Clear (see P.16-9)/Reset All (see P.10-19)

return IC-appli settings to defaults and delete downloaded IC-appli. Memory All Clear and Reset All are disabled if IC Card data remains.

17-7

Appendix

18-1

18-2

Function Menu

Main Menu

V-appli

Vodafone live!

Media Player

Messaging

Camera

Sub Menu

V-appli

Settings

Information

Vodafone live!

Enter URL

Bookmarks

Saved Page

Access History

Browser Setting

Music

Videos

Streaming

Create Message

Received

Drafts

Sent

Unsent

Templates

Server Mail Box

Mail Settings

Memory Status

P.15-4

P.15-13

P.7-11

P.7-13

P.15-10

P.14-6

P.14-15

P.14-12

Refer to

P.16-2

P.16-6

P.16-2

P.15-3

P.15-4

P.15-6

P.14-15

P.14-13

P.14-14

P.14-22

P.14-3

P.6-2

Tools

Main Menu

Data Folder

Sub Menu

Pictures

DCIM

Sounds&Ringtones

Custom Screens

V-appli

IC-appli

Videos

Text Templates

Troubleshooting

Problem

804SH won't turn on

Possible Cause

^ Did you press g for 2+ seconds?

^ Battery may need to be charged.

^ Battery may not be properly installed.

^ Is Switch On/Off in PIN Entry On?

804SH won't respond

^ USIM Card may not be properly inserted.

Insert USIM Card appears in Standby and

804SH is unresponsive

^ The correct USIM Card may not be inserted.

Keypad won't respond

Cannot place call from

Phone Book

S appears in Standby and call won't connect

^ There may be debris on IC chip/terminals.

^ Keypad Lock may be active. (b appears)

^ Function Lock may be active. (l appears)

^ The number may be saved as Secret Mode entry.

^ Phone Book Lock may be active.

^ 804SH may be outside the service area or otherwise beyond signal transmission range.

Solution

^ Press g for 2+ seconds.

^ Charge battery or install a charged battery.

^ Install battery properly.

^ If On, PIN1 is required. Enter PIN1 according to

onscreen instructions. For more, see P.10-16.

^ Make sure USIM Card is properly inserted. If the message still appears, USIM may be damaged.

^ Make sure the correct USIM Card is inserted.

The inserted USIM Card may not be valid.

^ Clean relevant parts with a dry cloth and re-insert.

^ Cancel Keypad Lock (see P.1-20).

^ Cancel Function Lock (see P.10-17).

^ Activate Secret Mode (see P.10-18).

^ Cancel Phone Book Lock (see P.10-17).

^ Move to a place where signal is strong and retry.

Problem

Call won't connect and there's a beeping tone

Call is choppy or cut off

Possible Cause

^ Did you include the dialling code or the first 0?

^ 804SH may be out-of-range. (S appears)

^ 804SH Offline mode may be active. (U appears)

^ Network signal may be weak.

^ Battery may need to be charged or replaced.

Solution

^ Dial the number including the dialling code or 0.

^ Move to a place where signal is strong and retry.

^ Cancel Offline Mode (see P.2-19).

^ Move to a place where signal is strong and retry.

^ Charge battery or install a charged battery.

Line is noisy during calls ^ Network signal may be weak or unstable.

Battery won't charge

^ AC Charger may not be properly connected to 804SH or Desktop Holder.

^ AC Charger may not be firmly plugged in to outlet.

^ Battery may not be properly installed.

^ 804SH may not be properly inserted into Desktop

Holder.

^ There may be debris on terminals: (804SH, battery or

Desktop Holder); connector (AC Charger);

Connection Terminal (Desktop Holder); External

Device Connector.

^ Battery may not charge outside 5]C to 35]C.

^ Battery may be terminally exhausted or defective.

Battery charges quickly ^ Remaining charge shortens charging time.

804SH/Charger/Desk- top Holder feels warm

^ During charging, AC Charger or Desktop Holder normally becomes warm; 804SH may feel warm to the touch during extended periods of use.

Battery Time seems shorter than usual

^ Environmental factors (temperature, charging/signal conditions), usage or settings can affect Battery

Time.

^ Make sure connector is securely inserted and try again.

^ Remove plug from outlet, re-insert and try again.

^ Open 804SH, install battery properly and try again.

^ Remove 804SH and re-insert correctly.

^ Clean all terminals with a cotton swab and try again.

^ Charge within an ambient temperature of 5]C - 35]C.

^ Replace battery with a new one.

^ Unless 804SH/accessories become very hot to the touch, this should be considered normal; regardless, avoid prolonged skin contact which could cause burn

injuries (see P.xxii).

^ For more on Battery Time, usage factors and ways to

extend Battery Time, see P.1-12 - 1-13.

18-5

18-6

Problem

Display flickers

Chaku-Uta, music or video sound skips

Display went dark

Possible Cause

^ Display may flicker under fluorescent lights.

^ When Surround is on, opening 804SH while Chaku-

Uta, music or video play causes a momentary delay in playback by design; this is not a malfunction.

^ Leaving 804SH open with no key presses for a preset period cancels Backlight (Time Out) then panel (Display Saving); this is not a malfunction.

Solution

^ Press any key to reactivate Display backlight.

Tip H

For repairs and after-sales services, contact Vodafone Customer Centre, Customer Assistance (see P.18-24).

Warning Signs

C S appears

Handset is out-of-range.

Move for a better signal.

CRecharge battery. appears and short beeps sound

Battery is low (see P.1-14).

Charge or replace battery immediately.

Cb appears

Keypad Lock is active (see P.1-20).

Cancel to use Keypad. Press keys for Any Key Answer (see

P.2-5) to answer calls.

C l appears

Function Lock is active (see P.10-17).

Cancel to place calls, etc.

Press keys for Any Key Answer (see P.2-5) to answer calls.

V-application Display Messages

Display

Application suspended. End application?

Application is suspended.

Download to Handset

Download Size:

XXKB

Save Size:

XXKB

Download?

Battery low. Donwloa d may not be complet ed.

Cause

^ A V-application is paused.

^ Download may fail due to low battery.

Not Enough Memory in Handset.

Download to

Memory Card

Download Size:

XXKB

Save Size:

XXKB

Download?

^ Memory is full.

Solution

^ Close application and try again.

^ Charge battery then try again.

^ Press b to download or M W to cancel.

18-7

18-8

Display

Exceeds limit.

Cannot save.

New Version Found

Continue Download?

Cause

^ 100 V-applications are already saved.

(The message disappears automatically.)

Solution

^ Delete applications (see P.16-6) and try again.

^ An older version of the same V-application is saved.

^ Press N i to download or M c to cancel.

Tip

V-applications cannot be downloaded when the following messages appear:

^ Improper data cannot download application. ^ Application size too large. Cannot download.

Messaging Mishaps

CWhen MMS is not delivered as sent

Causes include the following. For details, contact Vodafone

Customer Centre, General Information (see P.18-24).

^ Recipient is not subscribed to MMS, Super Mail or Long

Mail.

^ Recipient handset is not MMS-compatible.

B The maximum size of messages/attachments recipient handsets can receive varies by make and model.

^ Recipient handset is not JPEG-compatible.

B Some Long Mail-compatible handsets may only be able to process PNG images; convert JPEG files to PNG, then

attach and send (see P.9-11).

CWhen handset memory is insufficient

New messages cannot be delivered (Y, Y or X appears in red). Undeliverable mail is saved at the Centre.

^ Delete messages to free memory for new ones (see P.14-19).

When memory is available, new messages are delivered automatically.

^ Delete unprotected messages automatically to receive new

ones (see P.14-23).

^ Even if memory is not full, handset cannot receive new messages larger than remaining memory.

Character Code List

031

032

033

034

035

036

037

038

039

040

041

042

043

044

045

046

010

011

012

013

014

015

016

017

018

019

020

021

022

023

024

First Three

Digits

Last Digit

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

(スペース) 、。，．・：；？

！゛゜ ´ ｀ ¨ ＾￣＿ヽ

ヾゝゞ〃仝々〆〇ー ―

‐ ／＼ ∼ ‖ ｜ … ‥‘ ’

“ ”（）〔〕［］｛｝

〈〉《》「」『』【】

＋ − ± × ÷ ＝ ≠ ＜＞ ≦

≧ ∞ ∴ ♂ ♀ ° ′ ″ ℃ ￥

＄￠￡％＃＆＠ § ☆

★ ○ ● ◎ ◇

◆ □ ■ △ ▲ ▽ ▼ ※ 〒

→ ← ↑ ↓ 〓

∈ ∋ ⊆ ⊇

⊂ ⊃ ∪ ∩

∧ ∨ ￢ ⇒ ⇔ ∀ ∃

026

027

028

029

∠ ⊥ ͡ ∂ ∇ ≡ ≒ ≪ ≫ √

∽ ∝ ∵ ∫ ∬

Å ‰ ♯ ♭ ♪ † ‡ ¶

⃝

First Three

Digits

047

048

060

061

062

063

064

065

4 5 6 7 8 9

0 1 2 3

ＡＢＣＤＥＦＧ

ＨＩＪＫＬＭＮＯＰＱ

ＲＳＴＵＶＷＸＹＺａｂｃｄｅｆｇｈｉｊｋｌｍｎｏｐｑｒｓｔｕｖｗｘｙｚ

ぁあぃいぅうぇえぉ

おかがきぎくぐけげこ

ごさざしじすずせぜそ

ぞただちぢっつづてで

とどなにぬねのはばぱ

ひびぴふぶぷへべぺほ

ぼぽまみむめもゃやゅ

050

051

052

053

054

055

056

057

058

070

071

072

073

074

075

076

077

078

080

081

082

083

160

Last Digit

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

ゆょよらりるれろゎわ

ゐゑをん

ァアィイゥウェエォ

オカガキギクグケゲコ

ゴサザシジスズセゼソ

ゾタダチヂッツヅテデ

トドナニヌネノハバパ

ヒビピフブプヘベペホ

ボポマミムメモャヤュ

ユョヨラリルレロヮワ

ヰヱヲンヴヵヶ

Α Β Γ Δ Ε Ζ Η Θ Ι

Κ Λ Μ Ν Ξ Ο Π Ρ Σ Τ

Υ Φ Χ Ψ Ω

α β γ δ ε ζ η

θ ι κ λ μ ν ξ ο π ρ

σ τ υ φ χ ψ ω

А Б В Г Д Е Ё Ж З

И Й К Л М Н О П Р С

Т У Ф Х Ц Ч Ш Щ Ъ Ы

Ь Э Ю Я а б в г д е ё ж з и й к л м н о п р с т у ф х ц ч ш щ ъ ы ь э ю я

─ │ ┌ ┐ ┘ └ ├ ┬ ┤

┴ ┼ ━ ┃ ┏ ┓ ┛ ┗ ┣ ┳

┫ ┻ ╋ ┠ ┯ ┨ ┷ ┿ ┝ ┰

┥ ┸ ╂

あ

亜唖娃阿哀愛挨姶逢

First Three

Digits

161

162

163

164

165

166

167

168

169

170

171

172

173

174

175

176

177

178

179

180

181

182

183

184

185

186

187

Last Digit

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

葵茜穐悪握渥旭葦芦鯵

梓圧斡扱宛姐虻飴絢綾

鮎或粟袷安庵按暗案闇

鞍杏

い

以伊位依偉囲夷委

威尉惟意慰易椅為畏異

移維緯胃萎衣謂違遺医

井亥域育郁磯一壱溢逸

稲茨芋鰯允印咽員因姻

引飲淫胤蔭

院陰隠韻吋

う

右宇烏羽

迂雨卯鵜窺丑碓臼渦嘘

唄欝蔚鰻姥厩浦瓜閏噂

云運雲

え

荏餌叡営嬰影映

曳栄永泳洩瑛盈穎頴英

衛詠鋭液疫益駅悦謁越

閲榎厭円園堰奄宴延怨

掩援沿演炎焔煙燕猿縁

艶苑薗遠鉛鴛塩

お

於汚甥

凹央奥往応

押旺横欧殴王翁襖鴬

鴎黄岡沖荻億屋憶臆桶

牡乙俺卸恩温穏音

か

下化

仮何伽価佳加可嘉夏嫁

家寡科暇果架歌河火珂

禍禾稼箇花苛茄荷華菓

蝦課嘩貨迦過霞蚊俄峨

我牙画臥芽蛾賀雅餓駕

198

199

200

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

188

189

190

191

192

193

194

195

196

197

207

208

209

210

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

221

222

First Three

Digits

Last Digit

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

介会解回塊壊廻快怪悔

恢懐戒拐改

魁晦械海灰界皆絵芥

蟹開階貝凱劾外咳害崖

慨概涯碍蓋街該鎧骸浬

馨蛙垣柿蛎鈎劃嚇各廓

拡撹格核殻獲確穫覚角

赫較郭閣隔革学岳楽額

顎掛笠樫橿梶鰍潟割喝

恰括活渇滑葛褐轄且鰹

叶椛樺鞄株兜竃蒲釜鎌

噛鴨栢茅萱

粥刈苅瓦乾侃冠寒刊

勘勧巻喚堪姦完官寛干

幹患感慣憾換敢柑桓棺

款歓汗漢澗潅環甘監看

竿管簡緩缶翰肝艦莞観

諌貫還鑑間閑関陥韓館

舘丸含岸巌玩癌眼岩翫

贋雁頑顔願

き

企伎危喜器

基奇嬉寄岐希幾忌揮机

旗既期棋棄

機帰毅気汽畿祈季稀

紀徽規記貴起軌輝飢騎

鬼亀偽儀妓宜戯技擬欺

犠疑祇義蟻誼議掬菊鞠

吉吃喫桔橘詰砧杵黍却

客脚虐逆丘久仇休及吸

宮弓急救朽求汲泣灸球

究窮笈級糾給旧牛去居

巨拒拠挙渠虚許距鋸漁

禦魚亨享京

供侠僑兇競共凶協匡

卿叫喬境峡強彊怯恐恭

挟教橋況狂狭矯胸脅興

18-9

238

239

240

241

242

243

232

233

234

235

236

237

243

244

245

246

247

248

249

250

251

252

253

254

255

256

First Three

Digits

223

224

225

226

227

228

229

230

231

232

Last Digit

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

蕎郷鏡響饗驚仰凝尭暁

業局曲極玉桐粁僅勤均

巾錦斤欣欽琴禁禽筋緊

芹菌衿襟謹近金吟銀

く

九

倶句区狗玖矩苦躯駆駈

駒具愚虞喰空偶寓遇隅

串櫛釧屑屈

掘窟沓靴轡窪熊隈粂

栗繰桑鍬勲君薫訓群軍

郡

け

卦袈祁係傾刑兄啓圭

珪型契形径恵慶慧憩掲

携敬景桂渓畦稽系経継

繋罫茎荊蛍計詣警軽頚

鶏芸迎鯨劇戟撃激隙桁

傑欠決潔穴結血訣月件

倹倦健兼券剣喧圏堅嫌

建憲懸拳捲

検権牽犬献研硯絹県

肩見謙賢軒遣鍵険顕験

鹸元原厳幻弦減源玄現

絃舷言諺限

こ

乎個古呼固

姑孤己庫弧戸故枯湖狐

糊袴股胡菰虎誇跨鈷雇

顧鼓五互伍午呉吾娯後

御悟梧檎瑚碁語誤護醐

乞鯉交佼侯候倖光公功

効勾厚口向

后喉坑垢好孔孝宏工

巧巷幸広庚康弘恒慌抗

拘控攻昂晃更杭校梗構

江洪浩港溝甲皇硬稿糠

紅紘絞綱耕考肯肱腔膏

航荒行衡講貢購郊酵鉱

砿鋼閤降項香高鴻剛劫

261

262

263

264

265

266

267

268

269

270

271

272

273

284

285

286

287

288

289

290

291

292

273

274

275

276

277

278

279

280

281

282

283

First Three

Digits

257

258

259

260

261

Last Digit

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

号合壕拷濠豪轟麹克刻

告国穀酷鵠黒獄漉腰甑

忽惚骨狛込

此頃今困坤墾婚恨懇

昏昆根梱混痕紺艮魂

さ

些

佐叉唆嵯左差査沙瑳砂

詐鎖裟坐座挫債催再最

哉塞妻宰彩才採栽歳済

災采犀砕砦祭斎細菜裁

載際剤在材罪財冴坂阪

堺榊肴咲崎埼碕鷺作削

咋搾昨朔柵窄策索錯桜

鮭笹匙冊刷

察拶撮擦札殺薩雑皐

鯖捌錆鮫皿晒三傘参山

惨撒散桟燦珊産算纂蚕

讃賛酸餐斬暫残

し

仕仔伺

使刺司史嗣四士始姉姿

子屍市師志思指支孜斯

施旨枝止死氏獅祉私糸

紙紫肢脂至視詞詩試誌

諮資賜雌飼歯事似侍児

字寺慈持時

次滋治爾璽痔磁示而

耳自蒔辞汐鹿式識鴫竺

軸宍雫七叱執失嫉室悉

湿漆疾質実蔀篠偲柴芝

屡蕊縞舎写射捨赦斜煮

社紗者謝車遮蛇邪借勺

尺杓灼爵酌釈錫若寂弱

惹主取守手朱殊狩珠種

腫趣酒首儒受呪寿授樹

綬需囚収周

宗就州修愁拾洲秀秋

終繍習臭舟蒐衆襲讐蹴

輯週酋酬集醜什住充十

First Three

Digits

315

316

317

318

319

320

321

322

323

324

325

326

327

328

293

294

295

296

297

298

299

300

301

302

303

304

305

306

307

308

309

310

311

312

313

314

315

Last Digit

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

従戎柔汁渋獣縦重銃叔

夙宿淑祝縮粛塾熟出術

述俊峻春瞬竣舜駿准循

旬楯殉淳準潤盾純巡遵

醇順処初所暑曙渚庶緒

署書薯藷諸助叙女序徐

恕鋤除傷償

勝匠升召哨商唱嘗奨

妾娼宵将小少尚庄床廠

彰承抄招掌捷昇昌昭晶

松梢樟樵沼消渉湘焼焦

照症省硝礁祥称章笑粧

紹肖菖蒋蕉衝裳訟証詔

詳象賞醤鉦鍾鐘障鞘上

丈丞乗冗剰城場壌嬢常

情擾条杖浄状畳穣蒸譲

醸錠嘱埴飾

拭植殖燭織職色触食

蝕辱尻伸信侵唇娠寝審

心慎振新晋森榛浸深申

疹真神秦紳臣芯薪親診

身辛進針震人仁刃塵壬

尋甚尽腎訊迅陣靭

す

笥諏

須酢図厨逗吹垂帥推水

炊睡粋翠衰遂酔錐錘随

瑞髄崇嵩数枢趨雛据杉

椙菅頗雀裾

澄摺寸

せ

世瀬畝是凄制

勢姓征性成政整星晴棲

栖正清牲生盛精聖声製

西誠誓請逝醒青静斉税

脆隻席惜戚斥昔析石積

籍績脊責赤跡蹟碩切拙

接摂折設窃節説雪絶舌

蝉仙先千占宣専尖川戦

扇撰栓栴泉浅洗染潜煎

First Three

Digits

329

330

331

332

333

334

335

336

337

338

339

340

341

342

354

355

356

357

358

359

360

361

362

363

343

344

345

346

347

348

349

350

351

352

353

354

Last Digit

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

煽旋穿箭線

繊羨腺舛船薦詮賎践

選遷銭銑閃鮮前善漸然

全禅繕膳糎

そ

噌塑岨措曾

曽楚狙疏疎礎祖租粗素

組蘇訴阻遡鼠僧創双叢

倉喪壮奏爽宋層匝惣想

捜掃挿掻操早曹巣槍槽

漕燥争痩相窓糟総綜聡

草荘葬蒼藻装走送遭鎗

霜騒像増憎

臓蔵贈造促側則即息

捉束測足速俗属賊族続

卒袖其揃存孫尊損村遜

た

他多太汰詑唾堕妥惰打

柁舵楕陀駄騨体堆対耐

岱帯待怠態戴替泰滞胎

腿苔袋貸退逮隊黛鯛代

台大第醍題鷹滝瀧卓啄

宅托択拓沢濯琢託鐸濁

諾茸凧蛸只

叩但達辰奪脱巽竪辿

棚谷狸鱈樽誰丹単嘆坦

担探旦歎淡湛炭短端箪

綻耽胆蛋誕鍛団壇弾断

暖檀段男談

ち

値知地弛恥

智池痴稚置致蜘遅馳築

畜竹筑蓄逐秩窒茶嫡着

中仲宙忠抽昼柱注虫衷

註酎鋳駐樗瀦猪苧著貯

丁兆凋喋寵

帖帳庁弔張彫徴懲挑

暢朝潮牒町眺聴脹腸蝶

調諜超跳銚長頂鳥勅捗

直朕沈珍賃鎮陳

18-10

366

367

368

369

370

371

372

373

374

375

376

377

378

379

380

381

382

383

384

385

386

First Three

Digits

363

364

365

366

386

387

388

389

390

391

Last Digit

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

つ

津墜椎

槌追鎚痛通塚栂掴槻佃

漬柘辻蔦綴鍔椿潰坪壷

嬬紬爪吊釣鶴

て

亭低停偵

剃貞呈堤定帝底庭廷弟

悌抵挺提梯汀碇禎程締

艇訂諦蹄逓

邸鄭釘鼎泥摘擢敵滴

的笛適鏑溺哲徹撤轍迭

鉄典填天展店添纏甜貼

転顛点伝殿澱田電

と

兎吐

堵塗妬屠徒斗杜渡登菟

賭途都鍍砥砺努度土奴

怒倒党冬凍刀唐塔塘套

宕島嶋悼投搭東桃梼棟

盗淘湯涛灯燈当痘祷等

答筒糖統到

董蕩藤討謄豆踏逃透

鐙陶頭騰闘働動同堂導

憧撞洞瞳童胴萄道銅峠

鴇匿得徳涜特督禿篤毒

独読栃橡凸突椴届鳶苫

寅酉瀞噸屯惇敦沌豚遁

頓呑曇鈍

奈那内乍凪薙

謎灘捺鍋楢馴縄畷南楠

軟難汝

な

に

二尼弐迩匂賑肉

虹廿日乳入

如尿韮任妊忍認

ぬ∼の

濡禰

祢寧葱猫熱年念捻撚燃

First Three

Digits

392

393

422

423

415

416

417

418

419

420

421

422

393

394

395

396

397

398

399

400

401

402

403

404

405

406

407

408

409

410

411

412

413

414

415

Last Digit

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

粘乃廼之埜嚢悩濃納能

脳膿農覗蚤

は

巴把播覇杷

波派琶破婆罵芭馬俳廃

拝排敗杯盃牌背肺輩配

倍培媒梅楳煤狽買売賠

陪這蝿秤矧萩伯剥博拍

柏泊白箔粕舶薄迫曝漠

爆縛莫駁麦

函箱硲箸肇筈櫨幡肌

畑畠八鉢溌発醗髪伐罰

抜筏閥鳩噺塙蛤隼伴判

半反叛帆搬斑板氾汎版

犯班畔繁般藩販範釆煩

頒飯挽晩番盤磐蕃蛮

ひ

匪

卑否妃庇彼悲扉批披斐

比泌疲皮碑秘緋罷肥被

誹費避非飛樋簸備尾微

枇毘琵眉美

鼻柊稗匹疋髭彦膝菱

肘弼必畢筆逼桧姫媛紐

百謬俵彪標氷漂瓢票表

評豹廟描病秒苗錨鋲蒜

蛭鰭品彬斌浜瀕貧賓頻

敏瓶

ふ

不付埠夫婦富冨布

府怖扶敷斧普浮父符腐

膚芙譜負賦赴阜附侮撫

武舞葡蕪部封楓風葺蕗

伏副復幅服

福腹複覆淵弗払沸仏

物鮒分吻噴墳憤扮焚奮

粉糞紛雰文聞

へ

丙併兵塀

幣平弊柄並蔽閉陛米頁

First Three

Digits

424

425

426

436

437

438

439

440

441

442

443

444

445

446

447

448

449

426

427

428

429

430

431

432

433

434

435

436

Last Digit

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

僻壁癖碧別瞥蔑箆偏変

片篇編辺返遍便勉娩弁

鞭

ほ

保舗鋪圃捕歩甫補輔

穂募墓慕戊暮母簿菩倣

俸包呆報奉宝峰峯崩庖

抱捧放方朋

法泡烹砲縫胞芳萌蓬

蜂褒訪豊邦鋒飽鳳鵬乏

亡傍剖坊妨帽忘忙房暴

望某棒冒紡肪膨謀貌貿

鉾防吠頬北僕卜墨撲朴

牧睦穆釦勃没殆堀幌奔

本翻凡盆

ま

摩磨魔麻埋妹

昧枚毎哩槙幕膜枕鮪柾

鱒桝亦俣又抹末沫迄侭

繭麿万慢満

漫蔓

み

味未魅巳箕岬密

蜜湊蓑稔脈妙粍民眠

む

務

夢無牟矛霧鵡椋婿娘

め

冥

名命明盟迷銘鳴姪牝滅

免棉綿緬面麺

も

摸模茂妄

孟毛猛盲網耗蒙儲木黙

目杢勿餅尤戻籾貰問悶

紋門匁

也冶夜爺耶野弥

矢厄役約薬訳躍靖柳薮

鑓

や

First Three

Digits

449

450

451

452

453

454

455

456

457

458

466

467

468

469

470

471

472

473

474

475

476

458

459

460

461

462

463

464

465

Last Digit

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

ゆ

愉愈油癒

諭輸唯佑優勇友宥幽

悠憂揖有柚湧涌猶猷由

祐裕誘遊邑郵雄融夕

よ

予

余与誉輿預傭幼妖容庸

揚揺擁曜楊様洋溶熔用

窯羊耀葉蓉要謡踊遥陽

養慾抑欲沃浴翌翼淀

ら

羅

螺裸来莱頼雷洛絡落酪

乱卵嵐欄濫藍蘭覧

り

利吏

履李梨理璃

痢裏裡里離陸律率立

葎掠略劉流溜琉留硫粒

隆竜龍侶慮旅虜了亮僚

両凌寮料梁涼猟療瞭稜

糧良諒遼量陵領力緑倫

厘林淋燐琳臨輪隣鱗麟

る∼れ

瑠塁涙累類令伶例冷励

嶺怜玲礼苓鈴隷零霊麗

齢暦歴列劣烈裂廉恋憐

漣煉簾練聯

蓮連錬

ろ

呂魯櫓炉賂路

露労婁廊弄朗楼榔浪漏

牢狼篭老聾蝋郎六麓禄

肋録論

わ

倭和話歪賄脇惑

枠鷲亙亘鰐詫藁蕨椀湾

碗腕

18-11

509

510

511

512

513

514

515

516

499

500

501

502

503

504

505

506

507

508

489

490

491

492

493

494

495

496

497

498

477

478

479

480

481

482

483

484

485

486

487

488

First Three

Digits

Last Digit

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

弌丐丕个丱丶丼丿乂

乖乘亂亅豫亊舒弍于亞

亟亠亢亰亳亶从仍仄仆

仂仗仞仭仟价伉佚估佛

佝佗佇佶侈侏侘佻佩佰

侑佯來侖儘俔俟俎俘俛

俑俚俐俤俥倚倨倔倪倥

倅伜俶倡倩倬俾俯們倆

偃假會偕偐偈做偖偬偸

傀傚傅傴傲

僉僊傳僂僖僞僥僭僣

僮價僵儉儁儂儖儕儔儚

儡儺儷儼儻儿兀兒兌兔

兢竸兩兪兮冀冂囘册冉

冏冑冓冕冖冤冦冢冩冪

冫决冱冲冰况冽凅凉凛

几處凩凭凰凵凾刄刋刔

刎刧刪刮刳刹剏剄剋剌

剞剔剪剴剩剳剿剽劍劔

劒剱劈劑辨

辧劬劭劼劵勁勍勗勞

勣勦飭勠勳勵勸勹匆匈

甸匍匐匏匕匚匣匯匱匳

匸區卆卅丗卉卍凖卞卩

卮夘卻卷厂厖厠厦厥厮

厰厶參簒雙叟曼燮叮叨

叭叺吁吽呀听吭吼吮吶

吩吝呎咏呵咎呟呱呷呰

咒呻咀呶咄咐咆哇咢咸

咥咬哄哈咨

咫哂咤咾咼哘哥哦唏

唔哽哮哭哺哢唹啀啣啌

售啜啅啖啗唸唳啝喙喀

咯喊喟啻啾喘喞單啼喃

喩喇喨嗚嗅嗟嗄嗜嗤嗔

嘔嗷嘖嗾嗽嘛嗹噎噐營

嘴嘶嘲嘸噫噤嘯噬噪嚆

549

550

551

552

553

554

555

556

539

540

541

542

543

544

545

546

547

548

529

530

531

532

533

534

535

536

537

538

517

518

519

520

521

522

523

524

525

526

527

528

First Three

Digits

Last Digit

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

嚀嚊嚠嚔嚏嚥嚮嚶嚴囂

嚼囁囃囀囈囎囑囓囗囮

囹圀囿圄圉

圈國圍圓團圖嗇圜圦

圷圸坎圻址坏坩埀垈坡

坿垉垓垠垳垤垪垰埃埆

埔埒埓堊埖埣堋堙堝塲

堡塢塋塰毀塒堽塹墅墹

墟墫墺壞墻墸墮壅壓壑

壗壙壘壥壜壤壟壯壺壹

壻壼壽夂夊夐夛梦夥夬

夭夲夸夾竒奕奐奎奚奘

奢奠奧奬奩

奸妁妝佞侫妣妲姆姨

姜妍姙姚娥娟娑娜娉娚

婀婬婉娵娶婢婪媚媼媾

嫋嫂媽嫣嫗嫦嫩嫖嫺嫻

嬌嬋嬖嬲嫐嬪嬶嬾孃孅

孀孑孕孚孛孥孩孰孳孵

學斈孺宀它宦宸寃寇寉

寔寐寤實寢寞寥寫寰寶

寳尅將專對尓尠尢尨尸

尹屁屆屎屓

屐屏孱屬屮乢屶屹岌

岑岔妛岫岻岶岼岷峅岾

峇峙峩峽峺峭嶌峪崋崕

崗嵜崟崛崑崔崢崚崙崘

嵌嵒嵎嵋嵬嵳嵶嶇嶄嶂

嶢嶝嶬嶮嶽嶐嶷嶼巉巍

巓巒巖巛巫已巵帋帚帙

帑帛帶帷幄幃幀幎幗幔

幟幢幤幇幵并幺麼广庠

廁廂廈廐廏

廖廣廝廚廛廢廡廨廩

廬廱廳廰廴廸廾弃弉彝

彜弋弑弖弩弭弸彁彈彌

彎弯彑彖彗彙彡彭彳彷

徃徂彿徊很徑徇從徙徘

徠徨徭徼忖忻忤忸忱忝

悳忿怡恠怙怐怩怎怱怛

First Three

Digits

589

590

591

592

593

594

595

596

579

580

581

582

583

584

585

586

587

588

569

570

571

572

573

574

575

576

577

578

557

558

559

560

561

562

563

564

565

566

567

568

Last Digit

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

怕怫怦怏怺恚恁恪恷恟

恊恆恍恣恃恤恂恬恫恙

悁悍惧悃悚

悄悛悖悗悒悧悋惡悸

惠惓悴忰悽惆悵惘慍愕

愆惶惷愀惴惺愃愡惻惱

愍愎慇愾愨愧慊愿愼愬

愴愽慂慄慳慷慘慙慚慫

慴慯慥慱慟慝慓慵憙憖

憇憬憔憚憊憑憫憮懌懊

應懷懈懃懆憺懋罹懍懦

懣懶懺懴懿懽懼懾戀戈

戉戍戌戔戛

戞戡截戮戰戲戳扁扎

扞扣扛扠扨扼抂抉找抒

抓抖拔抃抔拗拑抻拏拿

拆擔拈拜拌拊拂拇抛拉

挌拮拱挧挂挈拯拵捐挾

捍搜捏掖掎掀掫捶掣掏

掉掟掵捫捩掾揩揀揆揣

揉插揶揄搖搴搆搓搦搶

攝搗搨搏摧摯摶摎攪撕

撓撥撩撈撼

據擒擅擇撻擘擂擱擧

舉擠擡抬擣擯攬擶擴擲

擺攀擽攘攜攅攤攣攫攴

攵攷收攸畋效敖敕敍敘

敞敝敲數斂斃變斛斟斫

斷旃旆旁旄旌旒旛旙无

旡旱杲昊昃旻杳昵昶昴

昜晏晄晉晁晞晝晤晧晨

晟晢晰暃暈暎暉暄暘暝

曁暹曉暾暼

曄暸曖曚曠昿曦曩曰

曵曷朏朖朞朦朧霸朮朿

朶杁朸朷杆杞杠杙杣杤

枉杰枩杼杪枌枋枦枡枅

枷柯枴柬枳柩枸柤柞柝

柢柮枹柎柆柧檜栞框栩

桀桍栲桎梳栫桙档桷桿

First Three

Digits

629

630

631

632

633

634

635

636

619

620

621

622

623

624

625

626

627

628

609

610

611

612

613

614

615

616

617

618

597

598

599

600

601

602

603

604

605

606

607

608

Last Digit

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

梟梏梭梔條梛梃檮梹桴

梵梠梺椏梍桾椁棊椈棘

椢椦棡椌棍

棔棧棕椶椒椄棗棣椥

棹棠棯椨椪椚椣椡棆楹

楷楜楸楫楔楾楮椹楴椽

楙椰楡楞楝榁楪榲榮槐

榿槁槓榾槎寨槊槝榻槃

榧樮榑榠榜榕榴槞槨樂

樛槿權槹槲槧樅榱樞槭

樔槫樊樒櫁樣樓橄樌橲

樶橸橇橢橙橦橈樸樢檐

檍檠檄檢檣

檗蘗檻櫃櫂檸檳檬櫞

櫑櫟檪櫚櫪櫻欅蘖櫺欒

欖鬱欟欸欷盜欹飮歇歃

歉歐歙歔歛歟歡歸歹歿

殀殄殃殍殘殕殞殤殪殫

殯殲殱殳殷殼毆毋毓毟

毬毫毳毯麾氈氓气氛氤

氣汞汕汢汪沂沍沚沁沛

汾汨汳沒沐泄泱泓沽泗

泅泝沮沱沾

沺泛泯泙泪洟衍洶洫

洽洸洙洵洳洒洌浣涓浤

浚浹浙涎涕濤涅淹渕渊

涵淇淦涸淆淬淞淌淨淒

淅淺淙淤淕淪淮渭湮渮

渙湲湟渾渣湫渫湶湍渟

湃渺湎渤滿渝游溂溪溘

滉溷滓溽溯滄溲滔滕溏

溥滂溟潁漑灌滬滸滾漿

滲漱滯漲滌

漾漓滷澆潺潸澁澀潯

潛濳潭澂潼潘澎澑濂潦

澳澣澡澤澹濆澪濟濕濬

濔濘濱濮濛瀉瀋濺瀑瀁

瀏濾瀛瀚潴瀝瀘瀟瀰瀾

瀲灑灣炙炒炯烱炬炸炳

炮烟烋烝烙焉烽焜焙煥

18-12

660

661

662

663

664

665

666

667

668

669

670

671

672

673

674

675

676

650

651

652

653

654

655

656

657

658

659

643

644

645

646

647

648

649

637

638

639

640

641

642

First Three

Digits

Last Digit

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

煕熈煦煢煌煖煬熏燻熄

熕熨熬燗熹熾燒燉燔燎

燠燬燧燵燼

燹燿爍爐爛爨爭爬爰

爲爻爼爿牀牆牋牘牴牾

犂犁犇犒犖犢犧犹犲狃

狆狄狎狒狢狠狡狹狷倏

猗猊猜猖猝猴猯猩猥猾

獎獏默獗獪獨獰獸獵獻

獺珈玳珎玻珀珥珮珞璢

琅瑯琥珸琲琺瑕琿瑟瑙

瑁瑜瑩瑰瑣瑪瑶瑾璋璞

璧瓊瓏瓔珱

瓠瓣瓧瓩瓮瓲瓰瓱瓸

瓷甄甃甅甌甎甍甕甓甞

甦甬甼畄畍畊畉畛畆畚

畩畤畧畫畭畸當疆疇畴

疊疉疂疔疚疝疥疣痂疳

痃疵疽疸疼疱痍痊痒痙

痣痞痾痿痼瘁痰痺痲痳

瘋瘍瘉瘟瘧瘠瘡瘢瘤瘴

瘰瘻癇癈癆癜癘癡癢癨

癩癪癧癬癰

癲癶癸發皀皃皈皋皎

皖皓皙皚皰皴皸皹皺盂

盍盖盒盞盡盥盧盪蘯盻

眈眇眄眩眤眞眥眦眛眷

眸睇睚睨睫睛睥睿睾睹

瞎瞋瞑瞠瞞瞰瞶瞹瞿瞼

瞽瞻矇矍矗矚矜矣矮矼

砌砒礦砠礪硅碎硴碆硼

碚碌碣碵碪碯磑磆磋磔

碾碼磅磊磬

磧磚磽磴礇礒礑礙礬

礫祀祠祗祟祚祕祓祺祿

禊禝禧齋禪禮禳禹禺秉

秕秧秬秡秣稈稍稘稙稠

稟禀稱稻稾稷穃穗穉穡

穢穩龝穰穹穽窈窗窕窘

窖窩竈窰窶竅竄窿邃竇

First Three

Digits

700

701

702

703

704

705

706

707

708

709

710

711

712

713

714

715

716

690

691

692

693

694

695

696

697

698

699

683

684

685

686

687

688

689

677

678

679

680

681

682

Last Digit

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

竊竍竏竕竓站竚竝竡竢

竦竭竰笂笏笊笆笳笘笙

笞笵笨笶筐

筺笄筍笋筌筅筵筥筴

筧筰筱筬筮箝箘箟箍箜

箚箋箒箏筝箙篋篁篌篏

箴篆篝篩簑簔篦篥籠簀

簇簓篳篷簗簍篶簣簧簪

簟簷簫簽籌籃籔籏籀籐

籘籟籤籖籥籬籵粃粐粤

粭粢粫粡粨粳粲粱粮粹

粽糀糅糂糘糒糜糢鬻糯

糲糴糶糺紆

紂紜紕紊絅絋紮紲紿

紵絆絳絖絎絲絨絮絏絣

經綉絛綏絽綛綺綮綣綵

緇綽綫總綢綯緜綸綟綰

緘緝緤緞緻緲緡縅縊縣

縡縒縱縟縉縋縢繆繦縻

縵縹繃縷縲縺繧繝繖繞

繙繚繹繪繩繼繻纃緕繽

辮繿纈纉續纒纐纓纔纖

纎纛纜缸缺

罅罌罍罎罐网罕罔罘

罟罠罨罩罧罸羂羆羃羈

羇羌羔羞羝羚羣羯羲羹

羮羶羸譱翅翆翊翕翔翡

翦翩翳翹飜耆耄耋耒耘

耙耜耡耨耿耻聊聆聒聘

聚聟聢聨聳聲聰聶聹聽

聿肄肆肅肛肓肚肭冐肬

胛胥胙胝胄胚胖脉胯胱

脛脩脣脯腋

隋腆脾腓腑胼腱腮腥

腦腴膃膈膊膀膂膠膕膤

膣腟膓膩膰膵膾膸膽臀

臂膺臉臍臑臙臘臈臚臟

臠臧臺臻臾舁舂舅與舊

舍舐舖舩舫舸舳艀艙艘

艝艚艟艤艢艨艪艫舮艱

First Three

Digits

740

741

742

743

744

745

746

747

748

749

750

751

752

753

754

755

756

730

731

732

733

734

735

736

737

738

739

723

724

725

726

727

728

729

717

718

719

720

721

722

Last Digit

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

艷艸艾芍芒芫芟芻芬苡

苣苟苒苴苳苺莓范苻苹

苞茆苜茉苙

茵茴茖茲茱荀茹荐荅

茯茫茗茘莅莚莪莟莢莖

茣莎莇莊荼莵荳荵莠莉

莨菴萓菫菎菽萃菘萋菁

菷萇菠菲萍萢萠莽萸蔆

菻葭萪萼蕚蒄葷葫蒭葮

蒂葩葆萬葯葹萵蓊葢蒹

蒿蒟蓙蓍蒻蓚蓐蓁蓆蓖

蒡蔡蓿蓴蔗蔘蔬蔟蔕蔔

蓼蕀蕣蕘蕈

蕁蘂蕋蕕薀薤薈薑薊

薨蕭薔薛藪薇薜蕷蕾薐

藉薺藏薹藐藕藝藥藜藹

蘊蘓蘋藾藺蘆蘢蘚蘰蘿

虍乕虔號虧虱蚓蚣蚩蚪

蚋蚌蚶蚯蛄蛆蚰蛉蠣蚫

蛔蛞蛩蛬蛟蛛蛯蜒蜆蜈

蜀蜃蛻蜑蜉蜍蛹蜊蜴蜿

蜷蜻蜥蜩蜚蝠蝟蝸蝌蝎

蝴蝗蝨蝮蝙

蝓蝣蝪蠅螢螟螂螯蟋

螽蟀蟐雖螫蟄螳蟇蟆螻

蟯蟲蟠蠏蠍蟾蟶蟷蠎蟒

蠑蠖蠕蠢蠡蠱蠶蠹蠧蠻

衄衂衒衙衞衢衫袁衾袞

衵衽袵衲袂袗袒袮袙袢

袍袤袰袿袱裃裄裔裘裙

裝裹褂裼裴裨裲褄褌褊

褓襃褞褥褪褫襁襄褻褶

褸襌褝襠襞

襦襤襭襪襯襴襷襾覃

覈覊覓覘覡覩覦覬覯覲

覺覽覿觀觚觜觝觧觴觸

訃訖訐訌訛訝訥訶詁詛

詒詆詈詼詭詬詢誅誂誄

誨誡誑誥誦誚誣諄諍諂

諚諫諳諧諤諱謔諠諢諷

First Three

Digits

770

771

772

773

774

775

776

777

778

779

780

781

782

783

784

785

786

787

788

789

790

791

792

793

794

795

796

763

764

765

766

767

768

769

757

758

759

760

761

762

Last Digit

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

諞諛謌謇謚諡謖謐謗謠

謳鞫謦謫謾謨譁譌譏譎

證譖譛譚譫

譟譬譯譴譽讀讌讎讒

讓讖讙讚谺豁谿豈豌豎

豐豕豢豬豸豺貂貉貅貊

貍貎貔豼貘戝貭貪貽貲

貳貮貶賈賁賤賣賚賽賺

賻贄贅贊贇贏贍贐齎贓

賍贔贖赧赭赱赳趁趙跂

趾趺跏跚跖跌跛跋跪跫

跟跣跼踈踉跿踝踞踐踟

蹂踵踰踴蹊

蹇蹉蹌蹐蹈蹙蹤蹠踪

蹣蹕蹶蹲蹼躁躇躅躄躋

躊躓躑躔躙躪躡躬躰軆

躱躾軅軈軋軛軣軼軻軫

軾輊輅輕輒輙輓輜輟輛

輌輦輳輻輹轅轂輾轌轉

轆轎轗轜轢轣轤辜辟辣

辭辯辷迚迥迢迪迯邇迴

逅迹迺逑逕逡逍逞逖逋

逧逶逵逹迸

遏遐遑遒逎遉逾遖遘

遞遨遯遶隨遲邂遽邁邀

邊邉邏邨邯邱邵郢郤扈

郛鄂鄒鄙鄲鄰酊酖酘酣

酥酩酳酲醋醉醂醢醫醯

醪醵醴醺釀釁釉釋釐釖

釟釡釛釼釵釶鈞釿鈔鈬

鈕鈑鉞鉗鉅鉉鉤鉈銕鈿

鉋鉐銜銖銓銛鉚鋏銹銷

鋩錏鋺鍄錮

錙錢錚錣錺錵錻鍜鍠

鍼鍮鍖鎰鎬鎭鎔鎹鏖鏗

鏨鏥鏘鏃鏝鏐鏈鏤鐚鐔

鐓鐃鐇鐐鐶鐫鐵鐡鐺鑁

鑒鑄鑛鑠鑢鑞鑪鈩鑰鑵

鑷鑽鑚鑼鑾钁鑿閂閇閊

閔閖閘閙閠閨閧閭閼閻

18-13

820

821

822

823

824

825

826

827

828

829

830

831

832

833

834

835

836

810

811

812

813

814

815

816

817

818

819

803

804

805

806

807

808

809

797

798

799

800

801

802

First Three

Digits

Last Digit

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

閹閾闊濶闃闍闌闕闔闖

關闡闥闢阡阨阮阯陂陌

陏陋陷陜陞

陝陟陦陲陬隍隘隕隗

險隧隱隲隰隴隶隸隹雎

雋雉雍襍雜霍雕雹霄霆

霈霓霎霑霏霖霙霤霪霰

霹霽霾靄靆靈靂靉靜靠

靤靦靨勒靫靱靹鞅靼鞁

靺鞆鞋鞏鞐鞜鞨鞦鞣鞳

鞴韃韆韈韋韜韭齏韲竟

韶韵頏頌頸頤頡頷頽顆

顏顋顫顯顰

顱顴顳颪颯颱颶飄飃

飆飩飫餃餉餒餔餘餡餝

餞餤餠餬餮餽餾饂饉饅

饐饋饑饒饌饕馗馘馥馭

馮馼駟駛駝駘駑駭駮駱

駲駻駸騁騏騅駢騙騫騷

驅驂驀驃騾驕驍驛驗驟

驢驥驤驩驫驪骭骰骼髀

髏髑髓體髞髟髢髣髦髯

髫髮髴髱髷

髻鬆鬘鬚鬟鬢鬣鬥鬧

鬨鬩鬪鬮鬯鬲魄魃魏魍

魎魑魘魴鮓鮃鮑鮖鮗鮟

鮠鮨鮴鯀鯊鮹鯆鯏鯑鯒

鯣鯢鯤鯔鯡鰺鯲鯱鯰鰕

鰔鰉鰓鰌鰆鰈鰒鰊鰄鰮

鰛鰥鰤鰡鰰鱇鰲鱆鰾鱚

鱠鱧鱶鱸鳧鳬鳰鴉鴈鳫

鴃鴆鴪鴦鶯鴣鴟鵄鴕鴒

鵁鴿鴾鵆鵈

鵝鵞鵤鵑鵐鵙鵲鶉鶇

鶫鵯鵺鶚鶤鶩鶲鷄鷁鶻

鶸鶺鷆鷏鷂鷙鷓鷸鷦鷭

鷯鷽鸚鸛鸞鹵鹹鹽麁麈

麋麌麒麕麑麝麥麩麸麪

麭靡黌黎黏黐黔黜點黝

黠黥黨黯黴黶黷黹黻黼

First Three

Digits

837

838

839

840

Last Digit

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

黽鼇鼈皷鼕鼡鼬鼾齊齒

齔齣齟齠齡齦齧齬齪齷

齲齶龕龜龠

堯槇遙瑤凜熙

First Three

Digits

Last Digit

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

First Three

Digits

Last Digit

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

18-14

Pictograph List

Note H Pictographs do not appear in e-mail or on incompatible Vodafone handsets.

Tip H Pictographs in 2 are animated.

18-15

Specifications

C804SH

Weight

Continuous Talk Time

Approximately 120 g (with battery)

Approximately 150 minutes (3G)

Approximately 240 minutes (GSM)

Continuous Standby

Time (when closed)

Approximately 370 hours (3G)

Approximately 370 hours (GSM)

Video Call Continuous

Talk Time

Approximately 1.5 hours

Charging Time

(Power off)

Maximum Output

AC Charger: Approximately 140 minutes

In-Car Charger: Approximately 140 minutes

Dimensions (W x H x D)

Approximately 52 x 102 x 24 mm

(clamshell closed, without protruding parts)

0.25 W (3G)

2.0 W (GSM)

Mobile Light

LED Properties a) Emission Duration: Continuous b) Wavelength

Red: Centre 619 nm/ 612 - 625 nm

Green: Centre 525 nm/ 520 - 530 nm

Blue: Centre 470 nm/ 465 - 475 nm c) Maximum Emission Output

Red: 1.982 mW

Green: 0.472 mW

Blue: 1.172 mW

^ Values left were calculated with battery installed.

^ Continuous Talk Time is an average measured with a new, fully charged battery, with stable signals. Continuous Talk

Time may be less than half this value if signal is weak.

^ Continuous Standby Time is an average measured with a new, fully charged battery, with clamshell closed without calls or operations, in Standby with stable signals. Standby Time may be less than half this value if 804SH is out-of-range/signal is weak. Standby Time may vary by environment (battery status, ambient temperature, etc.).

^ Talk Time/Standby Time decrease with frequent use of

Display/Keypad backlights.

^ Talk Time/Standby Time may decrease when a V-application is active.

^ Talk Time/Standby Time decrease with handset use in poor

signal conditions (see P.1-12 "Battery Time").

^ Display employs precision technology, however, some pixels may appear brighter/darker.

18-16

CAC Charger

Power Source AC 100V-240V, 50/60 Hz

Power Consumption 12VA

Output Voltage/Current DC 5.2V/650 mA

Charging Temperature 5]C to 35]C

Dimensions (W x H x D)

Approximately 55 x 45 x 22 mm

(without protruding parts, cord)

Approximately 1.5 m Cord Length

CBattery

Voltage 3.7 V

Battery Type

Capacity

Lithium-ion

900 mAh

Dimensions (W x H x D)

Approximately 35.8 x 4.5 x 55 mm

(without protruding parts)

CLCD Remote/Mic with Headphones

0 LCD Remote/Mic

Dimensions (W x H x D)

Approximately 17 x 83 x 18.6 mm

(without cord)

Weight Approximately 24 g

Cord Length

0 Ear Buds and Cord

Approximately 80 cm

Weight

Cord Length

Approximately 11 g

Approximately 1 m

Memory List

Received

Drafts

Sent

Unsent

Templates

Messaging

Approximately 4 M

Approximately 1 M*

Approximately 200 KB

Drafts, Sent and Unsent share memory.

V-appli

V-applications

Approximately 20 MB (100 items)*

Shared with other folders in Data Folder (see P.9-2).

18-17

Index

Number

3G.....................................................2-15

About .............................................15-13

AC Charger......................................1-16

Access History ...............................15-4

Access Log ...................................15-12

Access Point .................................10-33

Acquire Dictionary .......................10-15

Acquire Mail List...........................14-14

Activation Time...............................16-7

Add Date............................................8-7

Add Email Address...........................4-3

Add Frame.......................................6-12

Alarm Volume................................11-12

Alarms ...........................................11-10

Alarms (cancelling/reactivating) ...11-12

All Calls ...........................................2-12 alternative image ..............................5-5

Answer Phone......................... 2-8, 10-2

Any Key Answer ..................... 2-5, 10-2 as Ring Video....................................9-7

Assign Ringtone .............................4-11

Assign Tone/Video: .............. 11-4, 11-8 attachment ......................................14-9

Authentication ..................................... 15-14

Authorisation Code .......... 10-21, 10-28

Auto .................................................2-15

Auto Add Code .............................10-19

Auto Bookmark.............................11-27

18-18

Auto Delete ...................................14-23

Auto Mark Level................................7-8

Auto Power On..............................11-13

Auto Save ........................................6-18

Automatic Resend ........................14-23

Back (E-Book)...............................11-26

Backlight..... 5-6, 7-14, 10-7, 15-10, 16-8

Backup ..............................................8-5 battery ....................................1-11, 1-15

Battery Strength ....................1-13, 1-14

Bit Rate..............................................7-8

Blink.................................................16-8

Bluetooth.......................................10-20

Bluetooth Timeout........................10-27

Bookmarks................... 15-6, 15-7, 15-8

Bracket ............................................6-11

Brightness.......................................10-7

Browser Data ................................15-12

By Category ......................................4-8

By Katakana......................................4-8

By Reading Order.............................4-8

Cache Memory................................15-2

Calculator......................................11-14

Calendar ..........................................11-2

Calendar Format........................... 10-14

Call Barring .....................................12-6

Call Costs........................................2-14

Call Forwarding ..............................12-2

Call Notice/Priority .........................16-8

Call Remote Lock ........................... 17-5

Call Settings ................................. 10-19

Call Time Counter ........................ 10-20

Call Timers...................................... 2-13

Call Waiting..................................... 12-5

Caller Display ................................. 10-8

Caller ID (sending/blocking) ...2-2, 12-9

Calls & Alarms................................ 16-8 calls (ending) .................................... 2-2 calls (placing) ...................2-2, 2-16, 5-3

Camera Effects ............................... 6-13

Category Ringtone/Ringvideo....... 4-11

Centre Access Code ...................... 1-24

Certificates.................................... 15-13

Change Handset Code................. 10-18

Change N/W Password .................. 12-9

Change PIN ................................... 10-16

Change to BCC............................... 14-8

Change to CC ................................. 14-8

Change to TO.................................. 14-8

Character Code (entering)............... 3-8

Character Code List ....................... 18-9 character entry modes..................... 3-2 charging time...... 1-11, 1-16, 1-17, 1-18

Check Print Setting .......................... 8-7 clamshell closed............................. 1-10 clamshell open ............................... 1-10

Clear DNS Cache.......................... 10-36

Compass ....................................... 11-28

Conference Call.............................. 12-5

Connection Type .......................... 14-25

Connectivity.................................. 10-21

Contact Groups ..............................4-12

Continuous Shoot ..........................6-11

Cookies ............................. 15-12, 15-14

Copy (text).......................................3-12

Cost Units .......................................2-14

Countdown Timer .........................11-23

Country Codes..............................10-19

Create QR Code ............................11-20

Creation Mode ..............................14-25

Crop .................................................7-15 cursor ..............................................15-5

Custom Profile ..............................10-33

Custom Screens .............................10-4

Custom Time.................................14-11

Cut (images)......................................9-8

Cut (text)..........................................3-12

Data Counter ...................................2-13

Data Folder........................................9-2

Date & Time...................................10-13

Date Format ..................................10-14

Datum On/Off ................................10-36

Daylight Saving................. 10-14, 11-13

Default Image....................................5-5

Default View ....................................11-2

Delete Posterior ..............................3-13

Delivery Rep. Allow ......................14-25

Delivery Report...... 14-11, 14-14, 14-24

Delivery Time ................................14-11

Desktop Holder ...............................1-17

Device Name .................................10-27

Dialled Numbers ..................... 2-3, 2-12

Digital Zoom......................................6-4

Display Call Cost ..........................10-20

Display Date & Time.....................10-14

Display (indicators) ..........................1-9

Display Saving ................................10-7

Display Settings (E-Book) ...........11-26

Display settings..............................10-3

Display Size ............. 7-14, 10-10, 15-11

Download to.................................. 15-14

Downloads ....................................15-14

DPOF .................................................8-6

Earpiece Volume......................2-10, 5-4

E-Book...........................................11-25

Edit Category ................................11-24

Edit Dictionary ..............................10-15

Edit Signature ...............................14-23

Edit URL ..........................................15-8

Emoticons .........................................3-8

Enter URL................. 15-4, 15-11, 15-12

Event Light....................................10-12

Expenses Memo ........................... 11-24

Expiry Time ........................14-11, 14-24

Exposure ..................................5-5, 6-15

External Display ....................1-10, 10-8

Face Arrange ..................................9-10 fast forward/reverse .......................7-11

Favourites .....................................15-11

FeliCa...............................................17-2

File Format ......................................9-11

Font Colour ............................7-18, 14-7

Font Settings ..................................10-4

Font Size .................. 11-26, 14-7, 15-13

Format Card ......................................8-4

Frame .............................................. 9-11

Free Text ........................................... 9-9

Function List................................... 18-2

Function Lock............................... 10-17

Go to................................................ 11-5

Greeting Message .......................... 10-4

GSM ................................................. 2-15

Handset Code ......................1-24, 10-18

Handset Lock................................ 10-17 handsfree ...................................... 10-26

Handsfree Setting ........................ 10-27

Help ..........................................6-4, 11-2

Hide Indicators ............................... 6-14

Hide Picture ...................................... 5-3

Hiragana to Katakana/Alphanumerics

Conversion.................................. 3-10

Hold ..........................................2-10, 5-4

Hold Guidance Pict .......................... 5-6

Home ............................................. 15-12

Home Download ........................... 14-24

IC Card ............................................ 17-2

IC Card Lock ................................... 17-4

IC Card Status ................................ 17-4

IC-appli ............................................ 17-2

In-Car Charger ................................ 1-18 incoming calls ...........................2-5, 5-3

Incoming Calls (Call Barring)........ 12-8

Incoming Picture .............................. 5-6

Index Print......................................... 8-7

18-19

Information................... 2-7, 14-13, 16-2

Input Memory..................................15-6

Interface Settings ...........................17-7 international calls.............................2-4

Internet Setting .............................10-33

Int'l Calling ....................................10-19

Int'l Prefix ......................................10-19

K key assignments (text entry) ...........3-3

Keypad Lock ...................................1-20

Keypad Tones ...............................10-12

Language ........................................10-4

Last Played................. 7-11, 7-13, 15-11

LBS Settings .................................10-36

LBS URL Setting...........................10-36

LCD Contrast ..................................10-8

Location Prompt ...........................15-14

Locks .............................................10-16

Loudspeaker ........................... 2-10, 5-6

Mail address (customising handset address)........................14-3

Mail Remote Lock ...........................17-5

Main Menu .......................................1-21

Manage Category ...........................4-11

Manner mode ..................................2-17

Manufacture Number....................15-14

Mass Storage ................................10-31

Master Reset .................................10-18

Max Cost .........................................2-14

Max Message Size ........................14-25

Media Console ................................14-6

Media Player .....................................7-2

Memory All Clear ............................16-9

Memory Card ....................................8-2

Memory Status

....4-7, 8-2, 9-2, 11-5, 11-9, 14-3, 16-4

Merge Panorama ............................9-12

Message Centre............................14-24

Message List View........................14-24

Message Notice/Priority.................16-8

Message Type ...............................14-12

Messaging..............................13-2, 14-2

Messaging (checking messages)

........................................14-13, 14-15

Messaging (creating & sending messages)...................................14-6

Messaging (deleting messages).........14-19

Microphone .....................................6-16

Minute Minder ...............................10-20

Mirror Image......................................5-5

MMS .................................................14-2

MMS (retrieving remaining portion) ...14-14

MMS Accounts..............................10-34

MMS Settings................................14-25 mobile camera ..................................6-2

Mobile Internet (accessing) ...........15-3

Mobile Light ....................................6-15

Mode Settings.................................10-2

Money Converter ..........................11-14

Monitor Level ....................................7-8

Month View .....................................11-2

Motion Control..............................11-29

Move to Card...................................16-6

Multi Selector........................................ i

Music Player .....................................7-9

Music Search .................................... 7-3

Mute..........................................2-10, 5-4

Mute Microphone ............................. 5-6

My Details ..............................1-19, 4-14

My Folders .................................... 14-21

Network (adding, editing & deleting) ... 10-32

Network Info.................................. 10-32

Network Password ................1-24, 12-9

Network Settings .................2-15, 10-32

Network V-applications.................. 16-2

Next ............................................... 11-26

Normal Finder................................. 6-14

Offline Mode ................................... 2-19

One Hiragana Predictive Entry ..... 3-11

One Hiragana Word Call ................ 3-11

One-Hiragana Conversion ............. 3-10

OPP Authentication...................... 10-27

Outgoing Calls................................ 12-7

Outgoing Picture .............................. 5-6 out-of-range .............................1-9, 18-4

Overlapped ..................................... 6-11

P packet transmission volume ......... 2-13

Pager Code ....................................... 3-8

Pager Code List ................................ 3-9

Paired Devices.............................. 10-22

Paste................................................ 3-12

Paste (Picture Editor)....................... 9-9

Pen Light ......................................... 1-20

Permission ...................................... 16-7

18-20

Phone Book ......................................4-2

Phone Book (deleting entries) ......4-10

Phone Book (editing) .......................4-9

Phone Book (quoting information) ...... 3-13

Phone Book (saving)........................4-3

Phone Book (searching) ..................4-8

Phone Book Lock .........................10-17

Phone Help....................................11-29

Phonetic Conversion......................3-10

Photo Camera mode ........................6-5

Pictograph List .............................18-15

Pictographs.......................................3-7

Picture (Phone Book) .......................4-6

Picture Editor ....................................9-8

Picture Quality ................................6-16

Picture Size .....................................6-15

PIN ......................................... 1-6, 10-16

PIN Entry .......................................10-16

Play Voice Mail ................................12-4

Playback Pattern................... 7-12, 7-14

Playlist .............................................7-19

Power Off Sound ..........................10-13

Power On Sound...........................10-13 power on/off ....................................1-19

Predictive (conversion) ....................3-6

Preview Message............................14-7

Previous Usage (conversion) ..........3-6

Print ...................................................9-6

Priority...........................................14-11 properties .............. 7-11, 9-5, 16-4, 16-5

Proxy..............................................10-33

Quick Conversion ...........................3-11

Quick Entry .....................................11-2

Quick Operations ...........................1-23

Received Box View.......................14-23

Received Calls .........................2-6, 2-12

Record Time (Voice Recorder).......11-15

Record Time/Size (Video Camera) ...6-16

Rejected Numbers..........................12-8

Remote Lock...................................17-5

Reply..............................................14-17

Reply All ........................................14-17

Re-Provisioning ...................1-19, 10-35

Reset All ........................................10-19

Reset Learning ...............................3-12

Reset Settings ..............................10-18

Reset Settings (DPOF) .....................8-7

Resize ................................................9-8

Restart Browser............................15-13

Restore ..............................................8-5

Retouch .............................................9-9

Ringtone/Ringvideos ...................10-11 roaming ...........................................2-15

Roaming Download......................14-24

Root Certificates ..........................15-14

Rotate ..............................................9-11

Ruby ..............................................11-26

Save Address.....................14-18, 15-10

Save and Send..................................6-9

Save Item (MMS)........................... 14-20

Save Items (Web)............................15-8

Save Pictures to .............................6-17

Save Rec. to .................................. 11-16

Save to Drafts ...............................14-12

Save to Phone Book .................... 15-10

Save Videos to................................ 6-17

Saved Page ....... 15-6, 15-7, 15-8, 15-11

Scan Barcode ............................... 11-17

Scan Text ...................................... 11-22

Scene............................................... 6-16

Screensaver.................................... 16-6

Scroll Bar ........................................ 15-5

Scroll Step .................................... 15-13

Scrolling .......................................... 7-18

SD AUDIO Recorder ......................... 7-7

SD Local Contents ........................... 8-7

Search ........................................... 15-13

Search for Devices ....................... 10-22

Search This Page ......................... 15-13

Secret .....................................11-4, 11-8

Secure Prompt.............................. 15-14

Security ......................................... 15-14

Select Network ............................. 10-32

Select Service................................. 2-15

Self-timer......................................... 6-10

Send All..............................10-25, 10-30

Send Page ............................15-4, 15-12

Send Referrer ............................... 15-13

Sent ................................................. 14-2

Server Mail Box ............................ 14-14

Server Mail Volume ...................... 14-15

Service Dial No. ................................ 4-2

Set as Ringtone ................................ 9-7

Set as Wallpaper....................9-7, 11-27

Set Custom Zone.......................... 10-14

Set Date/Time ............................... 10-13

Set Preferred................................. 10-32

Set Time Zone....................10-14, 11-13

Set to Default .................................. 16-9

18-21

Settings (Send Options) ..............14-11

Settings (V-application)..................16-8

Shortcuts.........................................1-22

Show Operator Name .....................10-4

Show Secret Data .........................10-18

Shutter Sound.................................6-14

Side Keys .............................................. i

Slide Duration ................... 14-11, 14-25

Slide Show ........................................9-4

Slides.............................................14-10

SM Orig. Address .........................10-36

Small Light ......................................1-14

SMS..................................................14-2

SMS Settings ................................14-24

SMSC Address..............................10-36

Soft Key ...........................................1-21

Sort ........................ 7-11, 7-13, 9-3, 14-2

Sound Settings ...............................7-14

Sounds & Alerts ...........................10-10

Speed Dial ............................. 4-13, 4-14

Speed Mail.....................................14-22

Split Picture ....................................9-13

SSL ..................................................15-2

Stamp ................................................9-9

Standby ...........................................1-19

Status Light...................................10-12

Stopwatch .....................................11-23

Streaming ......................................15-10

Streaming Link .............................15-12

Subtitle ............................................7-16

Surround ............................. 10-13, 16-9

Suspend Time .................................16-7

SVG files............................................9-5

Switch Images ..................................5-4

Switch Line .....................................12-5

18-22

Switch to Read..............................14-16

Switch to Unread ..........................14-16

Symbols ............................................3-7

Synch Recording ..............................7-8

Synchronisation .............................16-2

System Graphics ............................10-3

System Sounds ............................10-12

Tasks ...............................................11-6

Templates......................................14-13 text (editing)....................................3-12 text (entering) ...................................3-5

Text Code ......................................11-26

Text Optimisation .........................14-24

Text Orientation ............................11-26

Text Templates.......................3-13, 9-14

Time Format.................................. 10-14

Tone Control .................................17-12

Totals .............................................11-24

Touch Tones....................................2-10

Transfer Audio ..................................5-5

TV System .......................................10-9

U unsent messages ...........................14-2 uploading ......................................15-13

User Dictionary.............................10-15

USIM Card .........................................1-4

V-appli Library ................................16-2

V-appli Settings ..............................16-8

V-application ..........................13-3, 16-2

V-application (deleting)..................16-6

V-application (downloading) ......... 16-3

V-application (exiting or pausing).... 16-5

V-application (resuming) ............... 16-5

V-application (starting) .................. 16-4

Via Infrared ................................... 10-29

Vibration....................10-11, 11-12, 16-8

Video Call.......................................... 5-2

Video Call settings ........................... 5-5

Video Camera mode......................... 6-7

Video Encode ................................. 6-17

Video Output..........................10-8, 16-3

Video Player.................................... 7-12

Video Quality .................................. 6-16

View Attachments ........................ 14-10

Visibility ........................................ 10-22

Vodafone live! ........................13-2, 15-3

Vodafone live! FeliCa ..................... 17-2

Voice Mail ........................................ 12-3

Voice Recorder ............................. 11-15

Volume..................................10-10, 16-8

Wake-up Alarm ............................. 10-15

Wallpaper ........................................ 10-3

Warning Tone................................ 10-13

Web.........................................13-2, 15-2

Web content.................................... 15-2

Week View....................................... 11-2

White List ...................................... 10-36

Withheld Call .................................. 12-9

World Clock .................................. 11-13

Warranty & After-Sales Services

CWarranty

Warranty is provided when you purchase 804SH.

^ Check the name of distributor and date of purchase.

^ Read through contents and keep in a safe place.

^ The warranty term is described in the warranty.

CAfter-Sales Services

See P.18-4 "Troubleshooting" before contacting Vodafone

for service or repairs. If you cannot find solutions or solve problems, contact Vodafone Customer Centre, Customer

Assistance (see P.18-24) for your subscription area and

provide a detailed description of the problem.

^ During the warranty term, repairs are performed under the terms and conditions described in the warranty.

^ After the warranty term, repairs, if possible, are performed upon your request at your expense.

For other services, contact the distributor, the nearest

Vodafone shop or Vodafone Customer Centre, General

Information (see P.18-24). Replacement parts are available

for 6 years after termination of production.

Note

H ^ Vodafone is not liable for any damages resulting from use of this product.

^ Vodafone is not liable for any damages resulting from accidental loss/alteration of handset data. Keep a copy of Phone Book entries, etc. in a separate place.

^ Disassembling or modifying handset may violate the

Radio Law. Modified handset will not be repaired.

18-23

Customer Service

If you have questions about Vodafone handsets or services, please call General Information. For repairs, please call

Customer Assistance.

Vodafone Customer Centres

From a Vodafone handset, call toll free at 157 for

General Information or 113 for Customer Assistance

CCall these numbers toll free from landlines.

Vodafone International Call Centre

From outside Japan, dial +81-3-5351-3491

(International charges will apply.)

Subscription Area

Hokkaido, Aomori, Akita, Iwate, Yamagata, Miyagi, Fukushima,

Niigata, Tokyo, Kanagawa, Chiba, Saitama, Ibaraki, Tochigi, Gunma,

Yamanashi, Nagano, Toyama, Ishikawa, Fukui

Service Centre

General Information

Customer Assistance

Phone Number

G0088-240-157

G0088-240-113

Aichi, Gifu, Mie, Shizuoka

Osaka, Hyogo, Kyoto, Nara, Shiga, Wakayama

Hiroshima, Okayama, Yamaguchi, Tottori, Shimane

Tokushima, Kagawa, Ehime, Kochi

Fukuoka, Saga, Nagasaki, Oita, Kumamoto, Miyazaki, Kagoshima,

Okinawa

General Information

Customer Assistance

General Information

Customer Assistance

General Information

Customer Assistance

General Information

Customer Assistance

General Information

Customer Assistance

G0088-241-157

G0088-241-113

G0088-242-157

G0088-242-113

G0088-259-157

G0088-259-113

G0088-247-157

G0088-247-113

G0088-250-157

G0088-250-113

18-24

Vodafone 804SH Instruction Manual

March 2006, First Edition

Vodafone K.K.

For additional information, please visit a Vodafone shop.

Model: Vodafone 804SH

Manufacturer: SHARP Corporation

Please help the mobile industry maintain high environmental standards. Recycle your old handsets, batteries and charger units (all manufacturers and brands). Before you recycle, please remember these important points:

^ Handsets, batteries and chargers submitted for recycling cannot be returned.

^ Always erase all data recorded on old handsets (Phone Book entries, call records, mail, etc.) before recycling.

Anúncio